Strata CIX670 Programming Manual
Telecommunication Systems Division
®
Title Page
Strata
®
CIX
™
Programming Manual
Volume 1
(Software Release 5.2
for Network eManager
®
)
December 2009
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.
CIX-MA -PRGM1-VK
Version K, December, 2009
Our mission to publish accurate, complete and user accessible documentation. At the time of printing the information in this document was as accurate and current as was reasonably possible. However, in the time required to print and distribute this manual additions, corrections or other changes may have been made. To view the latest version of this or other documents please refer to the Toshiba FYI web site.
Toshiba America Information Systems shall not be liable for any commercial losses, loss of revenues or profits, loss of goodwill, inconvenience, or exemplary, special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever, or claims of third parties, regardless of the form of any claim that may result from the use of this document.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION PROVIDED HEREIN ARE FOR INFORMATIONAL
PURPOSES ONLY AND ARE NOT A WARRANTY OF ACTUAL PERFORMANCE, WHETHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE. ACTUAL PERFORMANCE MAY VARY BASED ON INDIVIDUAL
CONFIGURATIONS, USE OF COLLATERAL EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER FACTORS.
© Copyright 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
This document is copyrighted by Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this document cannot be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, without prior written permission of Toshiba. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Trademarks
Toshiba, Strata, SmartMedia, SD (Secure Digital) and CIX are trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy, SoftIPT, eManager, My Phone Manager and Info Manager are trademarks of Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc.
Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, .NET, and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft.
Trend Micro and PC-cillin are registered trademarks of Trend Micro Inc.
BeyondVoice and SIPconnect are registered trademarks of CBeyond.
IPtimize VoIP Connect is a service mark of IPtimize Inc.
Norton Anti-Virus is a registered trademark of Symantec Corp.
McAfee and Virusscan are registered trademarks of McAfee, Inc.
DESI is a registered trademark of DESI Telephone Labels, Inc.
Adobe and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe corporation.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Strata CIX40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 General End User
Information
The Strata CIX 40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and
Regulations.
FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules which permit the Strata CIX system to be connected directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company—connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area, log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/ pages/support_dealerlocator.html or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Strata CIX40, CIX100,
CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 system, the telephone company will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CIX system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
1.Your telephone number.
2.FCC and ACTA registration
• Strata CIX 40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of the system.
• If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a Key telephone system.
• If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial access, Least Cost
Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid telephone system registration in some areas.
• If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor for assistance.
SYSTEM
PBX
Fully-protected PBXs
CIX40 CJ6PF03BDTCHS402
CIX100 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E
FCC Registration Numbers
Hybrid
Fully-protected multifunction system s
KEY
Fully-protected telephone key systems
CJ6MF03BDTCHS40
CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E
CJ6KD03BDTCHS40
CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
CIX200 CJ6PF03BDTCHS192
CIX670 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E
CIX1200 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E
CJ6MF03BDTCHS192
CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E
CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E
CJ6KD03BDTCHS192
CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
• Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
3.Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
4.Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN,
02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Underwriters Laboratory
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory (UL). Secondary protection is required on any wiring from any telephone that exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical surges, and on DID,
OPS, and Tie lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
Important Notice — Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc., strongly recommends not using radio or television broadcasts and hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Ringer Equivalence Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
Hearing Aid Compatibility Notice: The FCC has established rules that require all installed business telephones be hearing aid compatible. This rule applies to all telephones regardless of the date of manufacture or installation. There are severe financial penalties which may be levied on the end-user for non-compliance.
TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. (“TAIS”)
Telecommunication Systems Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (“YOU”) AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, “SOFTWARE”) INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS DIGITAL SOLUTIONS PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE AVAILABLE TO
YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIER. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR DISTRIBUTION
THROUGH TAIS AUTHORIZED CHANNELS ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying, distributing, printing, sublicensing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the
Software is strictly prohibited except as permitted by applicable law; you agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against you or any other person in possession of the Software. You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the
Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that you or any other person violates this License Agreement. Execution of the Software for any additional capabilities require a valid run-time license.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein will result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO
YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS’ OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. The Software and other materials provided hereunder constitute Commercial Computer Software and
Software Documentation and Technical Data related to Commercial Items. Consistent with F.A.R. 12.211 and 12.212 they are licensed to the U.S. Government under, and the U.S. Government’s rights therein are restricted pursuant to, the vendor’s commercial license.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
12. Supplier Software. The Software may include certain software provided by TAIS suppliers. In such event, you agree that such supplier may be designated by TAIS as a third party beneficiary of TAIS with rights to enforce the Agreement with respect to supplier’s software.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
DSD 020905
5932
T
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
End-User Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment manufactured by
Toshiba (except for fuses, lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery, except as otherwise provided by TAIS in the TAIS warranty accompanying the products or posted on TAIS’s website. Products which are not manufactured by Toshiba but are purchased from Toshiba, will be subject to the warranty provisions provided by the equipment manufacturer, unless TAIS notifies the end-user of any additional warranty provisions in writing.
This warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment’s serial number is defaced or missing, or (f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement of such defective or missing parts as are causing the malfunction by TAIS or its authorized dealer with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special, indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention of one of TAIS’ authorized dealers within the applicable warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized
TAIS dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the Vice President and General Manager, Telecommunication Systems Division.
WARRANTIES FOR NON-TOSHIBA BRANDED THIRD
PARTY PRODUCTS
A valuable element of Toshiba’s product strategy is to offer our customers a complete product portfolio.
To provide this value to our customers at the most optimal prices, we offer both Toshiba-branded and third-party manufactured products that support our Toshiba Strata CIX product portfolio. Similar to other resellers of software, hardware and peripherals, these third-party manufactured products carry warranties independent of our Toshiba limited warranty provided with our Toshiba-branded products.
Customers should note that third-party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product and are covered by the warranties provided through the original manufacturer and passed on intact to the purchaser by Toshiba. Customers should consult their product documentation for third-party warranty information specific to third-party products. More information may also be available in some cases from the manufacturer’s public website.
While Toshiba offers a wide selection of software, hardware and peripheral products, we do not specifically test or guarantee that the third-party products we offer work under every configuration with any or all of the various models of the Toshiba Strata CIX. Toshiba does not endorse, warrant nor assume any liability in connection with such third party products or services. If you have questions about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software, hardware and peripheral product manufacturer directly.
Contents
Chapter 1 – Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09 i
ii
Chapter 3 – Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09 iii
iv
Chapter 8 – IP Telephone Programming
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09 v
vi
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming
Chapter 14 – Data Backup and Restore
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09 vii
Appendix O – Applications Guide
Appendix P – Software and Firmware Updates
Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 11/09 viii
Introduction
This manual provides information required to program the Strata® CIX™ business telephone systems using Toshiba’s Network eManager programming interface and the 900 series Button
Programming.
Important!
Whenever the CIX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CIX100-S and
CIX100, unless specified otherwise. Whenever the CIX is mentioned in this book, it applies to all CIX40, CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 systems, unless specified otherwise.
Important!
Do not downgrade to previous versions of CIX software. Downward compatibility of
CIX database is not supported. Toshiba recommends keeping the current database for emergency situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of the database so you can upgrade the system without any problems.
Release 4 and above Processors
The chart below shows the processor PCB required to support the Release 4 and later software packages.
System: Processor PCB
Required to Support Release 4.x
CIX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCTU2A
CIX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTU3A
CIX200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCTU1A, LCTU2A
CIX670 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A
CIX670 Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A with BEXU2A
CIX1200 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1
CIX1200 Expanded A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1 with HEXAU1
CIX1200 Expanded B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1 with HEXBU1
Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CIX system has the current software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CIX R5.20 and Network eManager
V5.20 are the most current versions.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 02/09 ix
x
Organization
Organization
Chapter 1 - Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CIX Programming operation.
Chapter 2 – Network eManager provides general information about the Strata Network eManager software capabilities. Includes the installation steps needed to install Strata Network eManager on a PC and establish a connection to the Strata CIX system.
Chapter 3 – Licenses
Strata CIX license descriptions and procedures
Chapter 4 – System
provides system programming information
Chapter 5 – Station
discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 – Trunks
explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 – Attendant
describes Attendant Console support and settings available in eManager.
Chapter 8 – IP Telephony Programming describes the programs required to program IP
Telephony features.
Chapter 9 – Services
discusses programming of services available to Strata CIX through eManager.
Chapter 10 – Operation
explains system setup options available to eManager users. System initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP) configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 – Maintenance
provides system and component trace program information. eManager Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile
discusses Strata CIX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CIX System more efficiently.
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming
discusses the 900 series button programming interface provided with Strata CIX.
Chapter 14 – Data Backup, Restore and Update
provides Strata CIX maintenance procedures that can be activated from the programming telephone.
Appendix A – Applications Guide
for setup and program specific applications such as Voice
Mail, IP Telephony, StrataNet and others
Appendix B – Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware update procedures.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 02/09
Conventions
Conventions
Note
Important!
CAUTION!
WARNING!
[DN]
[PDN]
[SDN]
[PhDN]
Plus (+)
Tilde (~)
Start > Settings >
Printers
See Figure 10
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to specific items.
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on another telephone is considered an SDN.
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter.
Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.
Example: # + 5.
Means “through.” Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.
Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you should select.
Grey or blue words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic version of this document, cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Conventions
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 02/09 xi
xii
Related Documents/Media
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on the back of the document’s title page.
Installation and Programming
•
Strata CIX & MAS Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 1
•
Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 2 – (Stratagy ES Voice Mail Application)
• Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 3 – (Application Implementation)
•
Strata CIX SIP Trunk Configuration Manual
• Telephone Button Programming Manual
User Guides
• Strata CIX IP5000-Series Telephone
•
Strata CIX DKT/IPT Telephone
• Strata DP5000-Series Telephone
•
My Phone Manager™ User Guide
• Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
•
Strata CTX Standard Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephones
Quick Reference Guide
• Strata CIX IP5000-Series Telephone
•
Strata CIX DP5000-Series Telephone
• Strata CIX/CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
CD-ROMs
• Strata CIX Application Software and CIX Documentation Library - includes Network eManager™ software.
•
Strata CIX Call Center Solutions Application Software and CIX Documentation
For authorized users, Internet site FYI ( http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com
) contains all current Strata CIX documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 02/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
1
This chapter discusses Strata CIX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CIX Network eManager, and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline your programming tasks.
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Important!
All programs and instructions apply to all Strata CIX100, CIX1200 and CIX670 systems, unless specified otherwise.
The CIX40 has a default database already stored. Refer to the CIX40 Installation Manual
(CIX-IM-CIX40) for details.
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CIX systems. The Strata CIX system will automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify ”Station and BIOU Auto-programming’ on page 1-2 .
4. Verify ”Station PDN Auto-programming’ on page 1-3
.
5. Verify ”CO Line Auto-programming’ on page 1-3 .
6. Verify ”CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming’ on page 1-9 .
Note
•
The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization; or, when powering the CIX processor for the first time.
•
Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot position of the PCB.
•
Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
•
Other default data, such as the Strata CIX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware originally installed.
1-1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Auto-programming Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CIX auto-programming.
• CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
• Strata CIX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CIX’s LAN system data,
CIX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
• When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
• The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other buttons are not assigned automatically.
• In the Strata CIX100, CIX670 or CIX1200 Slot 0101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The
BDKU is assigned if no PCB is installed.
• In the Strata CIX200 Slot 0101 must always have an MIPU, LIPU, BDKU or PDKU. An xIPU is assigned if no PCB is installed, however no stations are assigned. R5 software assigns an MIPU; R4 software assigns an LIPU.
Station and BIOU Auto-programming
Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during autoprogramming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU/LIPU/MIPU/GIPU during auto-programming.
Table 1-1 Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB Code
000
002
003
004
017
018
019
020
PCB Name
RSTU
PDKU2
PCB Circuit Type
No PCB or RRCU
8 standard telephone circuits
8 digital telephone
Parameter
Setting
PCM
Highway: 8
Comments
None or Remote Cabinets
Standard telephone - no VM interface settings
DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without
S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations: DKT2000, 16 character LCD display on DKT3000,
DKT3000/3200 LCD Feature key does not function, DKT3014 large screen LCD does not display).
Not used
BDKU
Not used
8 digital telephones 8, 1B circuits DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA
DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA BDKU1+BDKS 16 digital telephones 16, 1B circuits
BIOU Page/MOH/Relay interface#1
No functions assigned
BIOU2 Page/MOH/Relay interface#2
No functions assigned. Strata CIX100 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a virtual location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05, to provide control of the ACTU relay.
1-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Station PDN Auto-programming
When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:
• Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU). MIPUs, GIPUs and LIPUs are not assigned PDNs.
• PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the lowest equipment number in the system. The PDN is then incremented by one digit and assigned to the next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.
• Program 205 Feature Button Setting – A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to FB01 on each digital telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20 on 20-button telephones. DND is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 1-2
First digit
2
3
Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number
CIX Basic Processor
Primary DNs (3-digits)
200~299 depending on quantity of station
PCBs installed
Primary DN (3-digits)
300~399 depending on the quantity of station PCBs installed
CIX670 Exp Processor/CIX1200
Primary DNs (4-digit)
2000~2571 depending on the quantity of station
PCBs installed
CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during autoprogramming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG), and
CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance Manual.
Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB
Code
000 -
PCB Name PCB Circuit Type
No PCB or RRCU
001 RCOU, RGLU 4 analog Loop or
Ground start lines
005 RCOU+RCOS 8 analog Loop start lines
006 RDDU
007 RDTU2
4 analog DID lines
16 or 24 digital T1 lines
Parameter setting
PCM Highway:
16 or 24
1
Comments
None or Remote cabinets
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
Direct Inward Dial lines
T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-3
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)
PCB
Code
PCB Name
008 RDSU
PCB Circuit Type Parameter setting Comments
4 standard telephone and 4 digital Telephone
Standard Telephone, DKT2000 and
DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA, DP5xxx
(DKT3000 limitations:
009
010
RCIU2+RCIS
RMCU+RCMS
4 or 8 Caller ID interface
2 or 4 E911 analog
CAMA lines
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display on
DKT3000/3200, DKT3000/3200 LCD
Feature key does not function, DKT3014/
3214 large screen LCD does not display)
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS and
RGLU analog CLID lines. Note: The same Prog 100 code (009) is used for
RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
CAMA lines Note: The same Program
100 code (009) used for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
Tie lines 011 REMU, BVPU 4 analog Tie lines, 4
VoIP circuits
012 RBSU 2 ISDN BRI (S/T) circuits
TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
013
014
RBSU+RBSS
RPTU
4 ISDN BRI (S/T) circuits
16 or 24 ISDN PRI channels two TEIs
TEI Type: two TEIs
PCM Highway:
16 or 24
1
ISDN BRI CO lines
ISDN BRI CO lines
015 RBUU 2 ISDN BRI (U) circuits
TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
016 RBUU+RBUS 4 ISDN BRI (U) circuits two TEIs
TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines two TEIs
1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 lines or channels will be installed; If the slot next to an installed
RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
Table 1-4 Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types
CO line type
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog Loop and Ground start
1
OLG
Prog 306
1
ILG
Prog 304
RDDU analog DID
RDTU (T1)
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI - set as CO side
1
1
1
2
2
3
-
4
CO Service Type
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN
(200 or 2000 – see Table 5)
DID, wink – no default DID numbers
DID – no default DID numbers
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN
(200 or 2000 – see next table)
DID – no default DID numbers
1-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-4 Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types (continued)
CO line type
OLG
Prog 306
ILG
Prog 304
CO Service Type
ISDN PRI
REMU analog E&M
2
3
5
6
DID – no default DID numbers
Non-Strata Net
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements. Example:
Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.
Table 1-5
DID numbers - not assigned
Program 309
Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters
Item
DIT line ringing assignment
Program 310
Format setting for DIT (T1)
Setting for CAMA / E911
Setting for ISDN BRI CO
Setting for ISDN PRI CO
Setting for E&M Tie lines
Settings
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
PDN 200 for CIX100, CIX200 and Basic Proc CIX670 (1~2 cab), CIX1200 Basic
PDN2000 for Expanded Processor CIX670. (3~7 cabinets), CIX1200 Expanded
The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing destinations must be assigned manually from Strata eManager or the programming telephone.
Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF
The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
Common D channel is not assigned. One channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned to each BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The destination of DID is not assigned.
Common D channel is not assigned. One channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned to each PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The destination of DID is not assigned.
The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned automatically.
The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number (CPN) and Out Of Search [for] DID number, is assigned to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day
2 and Night).
The DIT line (Ground and Loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size – see Table 1-4.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-5
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
MIPU / GIPU / LIPU / BIPU Settings
Table 1-6 MIPU, GIPU, LIPU, BIPU-M Automatic Settings
Item
Card Type
IP address (xIPU)
Subnet mask (xIPU)
Default gateway
Card Type
Description
IP address of xIPU
Settings
BIPU-M, LIPU, MIPU, GIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot where xIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200
.201
.202/.......
Subnet mask of xIPU substrate
Private address will be set
255.255.255.0
Default gateway of xIPU substrate 0.0.0.0
Table 1-7
DN Setting
IP Terminal Automatic Settings
Item
Accommodated terminal setting
(Station ID)
Accommodated terminal setting
(IP Address)
Accommodated terminal setting
(MAC addresses)
Description
DN setting of the terminal accommodated in xIPU
Parameter setting of station
ID in xIPU
Parameter setting of IP address in xIPU
Parameter setting of MAC addresses in xIPU
Settings
Assigned in the order of the lowest slot number
Station ID = PDN
IP address = 0.0.0.0
MAC addresses = (no data)
Table 1-8 System Related Basic Settings
QoS control
Item Description
Setting of priority control by
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p
Settings
Use of Diffserv: Not applicable
Set value of DSField = 0
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Station ID Automatic setting of Station ID
Terminal authentication setting Application or non-application of connection restriction function using MAC address
Priority level: Voice
Not allowed
Not apply
1-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming
After initializing the CIX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CIX detects the BIPU card for
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.
Table 1-9 BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings
Item
Card Type
IP address (BIPU)
Card Type
Description
IP address of BIPU-Q1A
Subnet mask (BIPU)
Default gateway
Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A
Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A
Settings
BIPU-Q1A
In the order of smallest number of the slot where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.800 for 1st BIPU
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU
Private address will be set
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
Table 1-10
ILG
OLG
ISDN trunk
IP-Trunk Information
Program Description
ILG number
Kind of trunk (Analog/ISDN)
Type of trunk
OLG number
Kind of trunk (Analog/ISDN)
Type of trunk
CG number
Voice coding procedure
Index of Voice attribute table
Parameter of voice attribute table
Type of protocol
ILG
OLG
CODEC (G.711, G.729A)
(1~256)
-
Settings
7
ISDN
TIE
4
ISDN
TIE
1: 1st BIPU-Q
2: 2nd BIPU-Q
3: 3rd BIPU-Q
IP
7
4
G.711
1
Packet Interval: 20ms
Type of Jitter buffer: Fixed
Size of Jitter buffer: 1
Max Acceptable Delay: 1
Measure Time: 1000ms
Packet Loss Ratio: 5
Packet Discard Ratio: 5
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-7
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-11 LIPU Strata Net Automatic Settings
Item
Card Type
IP address (LIPU)
Card Type
Description
IP address of LIPU
Subnet mask (LIPU)
Default gateway
.
Table 1-12
Subnet mask of LIPU
Default gateway of LIPU
Strata Net IP-Trunk Information
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
Trunk Type
Strata Net
Assignment
Basic
Node
Remote node
Mapping
Network over IP
304
656
670
657
672
306
651
658
671
Settings
LIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot where the LIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200 for 1st LIPU
.201 for 2nd LIPU
.202 for 3rd LIPU
Private address will be set
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
653
659
654
660
655
Table 1-13
QoS control
System Information
Item Description
Priority control by Diffserv.
IEEE802.1p
Settings
Diffserv: Disable
DS Field: 0
IEEE802.1p: Disable
Priority: Voice (6)
1-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
•
Network TCP/IP. See “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-10 .
-
IP address – 192.168.254.253
-
Sub network master – 255.255.255.0
-
Default gateway – 0.0.0.0
-
IP routing table – Not used
• SNMP Agent settings
Community name – communityName
IP address – 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
Privileges – WRITE
community-id – 1
User level – Super user
• Trap destination
-
Community name – Nothing
-
IP address – Nothing
• Modem PPP Server settings
IP Address – 192.168.255.254 (Strata CIX modem fixed IP address for dial-up connections).
Table 1-14 Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Number
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9
1NXX
N11
NXX
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Number
11
3
7
Table 1-15 E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
Emergency Call Group Number
1
OLG1
1
Table 1-16 E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
System Mode
DAY1
DAY2
Emergency Call Called Number Index
1
1
Emergency Call Called Number
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1, DAY2
NIGHT).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-9
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-17 Program 204 Default Data
In Program 204, all telephones are programmed as 20 buttons.
Table 1-18 Program 102 New Default Data
Table 1-19
Feature Code
870
Default Value
#963
Program 205/213/215 New Default Data
Feature Code
870
Program 313 Default Data Table 1-20
Caller ID Prog 313
field 1 field 2
Function
Caller ID receive method
Caller ID identification notice contents
Underlined entry is CIX100 and CIX200 default
Function
Call monitor log off
Function
Call monitor feature button nothing/ANI-MCI/ANI-Sprint/CLASS
ANI and DNIS/DNIS/DID
Table 1-21
Virtual Slot
Equip.
Nos. *
0101
0102
0103
Program 100 Default Data
8 - Digital telephones (no spkr OCA)
3 - CO lines, with CLID
Not used
Circuits
PCB
Code
017
028
Station Line
Numbers
200~207
CO1~CO3
0104 Standard telephone 01~02 026
01~208
02~217
220~223 0105
0106
0107
0108
4 - Voice mail ports
Not used
8 - Digital telephones
3 - CO lines with CLID
026
017
028
0205 Virtual BIOU 020
*Slot codes are set during system initialization and cannot be changed.
209~216
CO4~CO6
Relay Contact
Page, MOH
Connection
GMAU1A
(motherboard)
01-GMAU1A
02-GSTU1A
GVMU1A
GCDU1A
GCTU1A
1-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Default Feature Access Codes
Refer to
”102 Flexible Access Codes’ on page 4-3 .
Note For DKT and IP telephone, assign only the PDN. Do not program any other Flexible Buttons or features in the phones. Strata CIX recognition and setup is automatic for these telephones.
Plan Your System Requirements
Plan your Strata CIX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. The following are some areas to consider:
• Flexible Numbering Plan (102) – Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas of consideration.
• COS (103) – Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
• DRL (111) – Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important!
Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CIX’s Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction requirements.
• FRL and QPL (506) – Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.
Program the CIX for First Time
Follow these steps to program the CIX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure enables you to perform a Strata CIX setup with common System and Station default assignments. Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup. Refer to the CIX40 Installation and
Maintenance Manual (CIX-IM-CIX40-Vx) for the CIX40 default database and start-up procedures.
1. Card Assignments (100) – Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to physically install
PCBs prior to programming the Strata CIX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, Strata Network eManager automatically recognizes PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations
and trunks automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See ”100 Cabinet Slot PCB
for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) – Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See ”304, 305
Incoming Line Group’ on page 6-1
for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared Class of
Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) – Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See ”306, 307
Outgoing Line Groups’ on page 6-5
for more details.
4. Trunk Assignment (300) – Choose Trunk > Trunk Assignments and click the Basic tab. Set up your
trunks in the following order (see ”300, 301 Trunk Assignment’ on page 6-7 for more details):
Loop Start Trunks
Ground Start Trunks
T1 Trunks
Tie lines
FX lines
PRI lines
BRI lines
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-11
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
5. Station Assignment (200) – Choose Station >Station Assignments > Basic tab. Set up your stations in the following order (see
for more details):
-
DKT Stations
-
DP Stations
-
IP Stations
-
Standard Stations
-
Voice Mail (VM) Ports
-
Attendant Positions
-
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
-
Door Phones
6. Create Station Links – Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as necessary.
-
Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
-
Paging Groups using Program 502
-
Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
-
Park Orbits using Program 102
-
Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data – Choose Maintenance > CIX Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly
formatted (see ”Restoring Data from SM/SD’ on page 10-2
) prior to running backup. See ”910 Data
for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CIX details.
1-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Review Program Flow
The basic program flow needed to set up the Strata CIX is shown below. The figure displays the most critical programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from specific (left) to general (right).
Card Assignment
(Program 100)
Create ILGs
(Program 304)
Create OLGs
(Program 306)
LS Trunks
GS Trunks
T1 Trunks
Tie Trunks
FX Trunks
PRI Trunks
BRI Trunks
SIP Trunks
IP Stations
SIP Stations
DKT Stations
STD Stations
VM Ports
Attd Positions
Pilot DNs (ACD)
Door Phones
BRI Stations
Admin
Services
LCR / TR
System Program
Recommended*
Planning the following before proceeding:
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102)
Trunk Group Access Plan
Station Range Plan
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
(Program 103)
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532 - 533)
Define FRL and QPL meanings (up to 16)
Hunt Group
Paging Group
Call P.U. Group
Park Orbits
Paging Devices
* Planning these details in advance enables Strata setup to proceed smoothly.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-13
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Identify Program Sequences
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.
Station Setup
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up station requirements.
Station
Type
SLT
IP
DKT
DP
Assignment
ISDN
Pilot DN
Station Hunting
Call Pickup Groups
Ext
VM
Ext
Emergency Ringdown
Paging Groups
Station Speed Dial
DN
PDN
PDN
PhDN
DADM
DDSS
Attd
100
100
100
540
209
210
216
502
516
100
100
100
205
204
214
100
200
150
200
206
213
215
200
200
200
202
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
260
204
204
208
204
217
208
208
206
205
209 218 579
218
Trunk Setup – Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog trunk requirements.
580
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304 306 300
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
LS/GS
Ring
Timer
Tie line
DISA
Basic
Timer
DISA
100
310
308
310
100
308
310
304 306 300
1-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
DID
Ring
Timer
DISA
DNIS/ANI
Intercept
100
309
308
309
313
318
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304 306 300
319
Trunk Setup – T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 trunk requirements.
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
LS/GS
Data
Ring
Timer
DISA
Basic
Data
Tie line
Timer
DISA
Basic
Data
DID
Ring
Timer
DISA
DNIS/ANI
Intercept
308
310
100
315
309
308
309
313
318
100
315
310
308
310
100
315
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304 306 300
304
304
319
306
306
300
300
Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI trunk requirements.
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304 306 302 320 105
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
Ring
DISA
DID
DNIS/ANI
Intercept
CNIS
100
309
309
309
318
321
319
322
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-15
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Trunk Type
Tie line
Assignment
Basic
Ring
Timer
100
309
308
304
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
306
Shared D-Channel
CBC
100
100
304
304
1
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
306
306
1
302
302
302
2
320
320
320
105
316
323
3
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.
324
Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI - Strata Net
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI trunk requirements.
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
Node
Strata Net Remote Node
Mapping
Network DN
SIP Trunking
100
656
670
657
318
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304
651
306
653
302
654
120
655
658
319
659 660
Trunk Type Assignment
Basic
SIP Trunk Service
MIPU/GIPU
100
327
161
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
304 306 326
328 329
Miscellaneous
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CIX features.
Feature
Account-Codes
Alarm Notification
Analog Station with CLID
Support
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
570 571 103 506 306
Utilities>Operations>Trap IP Setup
100
103
200
208 104
1-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Feature
Automatic Call Back (ACB)
Automatic Camp-On
Auto-Release of CO
Background-Music (BGM)
Call Forwarding
Call History
Call Park Orbit
Call Pick Up
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On
Centralize SMDR
COS-CO
COS-Station
Credit-Card Calling
Day/Night service
Destination Restriction
Dial Directory
Digital PAD
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward Termination
DISA
Do not Disturb (DND)
Door Lock Control
Door Phones
DR Override by System's Speed
Dial
DTMF Back Tone
DTMF DP Compatible
DTMF Signal Time
210
103
803
304
200
105
500
200
104
304
308
102
103
204
104
204
107
309
304
311
103
104
102
105
204
104
579
E911
Emergency Ring-Down
Executive Override
External Ringing Repeat
Flash
Flexible Numbering
Group Paging
Identification Services
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR)
Line Group
Message-Waiting Light
Music-on-Hold
105
216
103
300
308
102
502
309
520
304
204
102
103
200
205
102
103
801
306
202
111
106
202
114
318
310
204
204
507
104
200
202
105
204
205
503
318
521
305
102
105
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
109
217
200
306
112
306
304
205
508
573
217
102
102
579
522
306
579
109
205
113
650
102
205
550
103
523
307
309
102
103
530
104
524
317
310
105
531
306
525
302
532
526
323
533
528
300
534
529 103
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
1-17
Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Feature
Network Call – Incoming
Network Call – Outgoing
Off-Hook Camp-on
Out-Going calls
Relay Services
Ringing-Transfer
SMDI
SMDR
Station CO Line Access
System Call-Forward
Tandem Connection
102
102
104
200
515
105
200
512
204
200
103
Tone-First/Voice-First 204
Traffic Measurement and Report 921
656
651
200
217
202
513
217
104
206
922
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
653
217
104
579
514
104
300
654
580
803
500
655
801
504
804
Travelling COS
Uniform CAll Distribution
105
103
200
209
510
218 219 205
VLAN Tagging
Voice-Mail Interface
See ”Telephone Station Ports’ on page A-2
Advanced Configuration>IP-Telephony>IPT VLAN Setup
100 200 209 218 579 580 803 804 309 318
1-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager
®
2
The Strata CIX systems are programmed using Network eManager. It is recommended you check FYI to ensure you have the latest version.
Network eManager is designed to reduce the time needed to manage multiple CIX equipment sites and improves system installation through such capabilities as the “Smart Checker” installation process and the Active Directory
Services export/import feature.
Situations when an administrator needs to configure multiple CIX systems as a group include:
• Multiple CIX systems in a Strata NET configuration.
• Setting up several CIX systems at different sites through a LAN at the same time.
• Several sites, at different geographical locations, each with its own CIX, all managed centrally over a
WAN.
Note
Your version of Network eManager may be different from the version in these screens. However, the installation procedure is the same for all versions of Network eManager version 5.20A06 and later.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-1
Network eManager®
Installation Procedures
Download the new latest version of Network eManager from FYI and run the Network eManager install file to begin the InstallShield as shown below.
1.
Run NetworkeManager .exe install file.
2-2
2.
Select Install Now
3.
The system will continue to check other prerequisites.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
4.
If the user has a previous version of Network eManager installed and performs an upgrade, either this window is displayed or the Migration screen below.
Migration Screen
5.
Select Create New Database in either screen to install SQL database:
6.
After the SQL database completion, the installer starts the Network eManager installation:
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-3
Network eManager®
2-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-5
Network eManager®
2-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
At the end of the installation process, click Finish to restart the PC. Once the PC is restarted, verify that you are able to login to Network eManager and, if necessary, reconnect to the Windows domain.
System Requirements
A PC or server must meet the minimum requirements listed below.
• 1 GHz 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
• Windows® XP Professional SP2 (See Important! below) or above, Windows Vista Business Edition,
Windows 2003 Server or Windows 2000 Professional
• Memory and available hard disk space requirements
Operating System
Memory Required
Available Hard Disk
Space
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2003 Server
512 MB (min), 1 GB (recommended)
512 MB (min), 1 GB (recommended)
Windows Vista Business
1 GB (min), 2 GB (recommended)
1 GB (min), 2 GB (recommended)
• CD or DVD-ROM drive
• 10/100BaseT Network Interface Card
• Internet Explorer 6.00 or later
• Microsoft Add-On Components:
•
IIS, Management and Monitoring Tools, .NET Framework 2.0 or above.
Note
The Windows operating system (as appropriate) CD-ROM must be available if any of the above are not already installed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-7
Network eManager®
Note
The Network eManager Help file is compatible with Adobe
®
Reader
®
5.0 and later, except versions 7.0.6, 7.0.7 and 7.0.8.
Important!
•
If the system is running Windows XP Professional with SP2, the firewall that is automatically included and enabled in Windows XP Professional - SP2 prevents login to Network eManager. When running
Windows XP Professional with SP2 you should turn off the firewall or follow the firewall configuration guides in the MAS Installation section.
•
The pop-up blocker in all Windows applications, anti-virus, and other applications must also be turned off.
Anti-Virus Software
When a system has access to the internet anti-virus protection is recommended.
2-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
Network eManager Main Menu
When a user logs into Network eManager the main menu appears. The main menu includes the following menu icons:
• Equipment Setup — This new location is where the CIX system sites are built. The Equipment Setup allows the technician to add new equipment or add equipment to an existing site, update equipment and delete equipment.
• Connect to Equipment — This new option allows the user to select one or multiple CIX systems.
• MAS Licensing — This new MAS Licensing utility is similar to the previous eManager utility Add New
User — This is where individual Network eManager user IDs can be built with one of four permission levels.
.
• CIX Help – This feature allows the technician to view the online version of this manual, Programming
Manual, Vol 1
• Voice Mail Help - This selection allows the technician to view the Programming Manual, Vol 2, Stratagy
ES Voice Mail Application.
There is also a menu bar in the top right corner of the screen. This menu has four Menu Headings.
• Home - Returns to the main menu screen.
• Clients
– Client Equipment Setup - This is the same as selecting the Equipment Setup Icon
– Connect to Client Equipment - This is the same as selecting the Connect to Equipment icon
– Connect to Client SES Only - Allows you to connect to just SES system without connecting to
Strata CIX system.
• Connected Equipment - Shows the system(s) to which NeM is connected. Only available when the
NeM is connected to one or more systems.
• Application Settings
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-9
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
–
Choose another Theme
–
Account Setup
•
Add New User - Available only to the Administrator
•
Change Password - A user can change his own password, the Administrator can change any user’s password - Passwords can be up 32 alphanumeric and some special characters (!, @, #,
%, $, &)
•
Change User Level - Available only to the Administrator - the User level can be changed
•
Reset Password - Available only to the Administrator - The Administrator can change a user’s password
•
Change Password Policy - Available only to the Administrator - Refer to
•
Delete User - Available only to the Administrator - The Administrator can delete a user
– Restriction
•
Restrict User Access
•
Update User Restriction
•
Remove User Restriction
Password Policy
Using the password policy setting, the Administrator can either disable or enable the password security scheme for
Network eManager. By default, the Password Policy is set for disable. In disable mode, Network eManager functions as described above. The passwords never expires and can be up to 32 characters in length. If this function is enabled, then all security policy criteria is enabled.
When Password Policy is enabled the system will require the users to change any passwords that do not meet the policy.
Password Complexity
Password complexity allows for more granular control of the password security features. Password Policy can only be set by the Administrator. Password Policy effects all users. If password complexity is enabled passwords must meet the following:
• Password cannot match the user login name
• Password must have at least the minimum number of characters
2-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
• Password is case sensitive
• Password history criteria must be met
Force Password Change
The force password change criteria allows the network administrator to force all Network eManager users to change their password the next time they log in.
Days After Password Expires
The password will expire in this many days. The range is 1 to 365 days.
Days to Remind Password Will Expire
The number of days, before the password will expire, the Network eManager will begin to remind logged in users to change the password. The range is 1 to 365 days.
Days After Password Expires
The password will expire in this many days. The range is 1 to 365 days.
Minimum Password Length
This value determines the least number of characters that a user account can specify for a password. The minimum value is one character and the maximum value is 14 characters. The default value is six characters. The maximum number of characters is 32.
Password History
This parameter sets the number of unique passwords that must be used before a previous password can be reused. If Password History is set to three, the system will ‘remember’ the last three passwords, any password entered must be different than the previous three. The default value is two. The range is zero to seven. When set to zero the password history is not enforced.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-11
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
Equipment Setup
The Client Equipment Setup is used to build new equipment groups, add equipment to existing groups, update equipment, and delete equipment. The Equipment is setup in a three-tier format:
• Company
• Site
• Equipment
In the example, Toshiba Training is a company with a site - Remote Training System. At that site are seven systems. The buttons at the bottom of the screen are:
– Add Equipment (New Client) – Add a new company, a site, and the first system (Equipment) at that site.
– Add Equip. (Existing Client) – Add a site to a company or a system to a site.
– Update – Change a company name, site name, system name, or any information about the system.
– Delete – Delete the checked item. If a system is checked, only that system is deleted. If a site is checked, all of the equipment assigned to that site is deleted. If a company is checked, all of the sites and equipment is deleted.
2-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
Add Equipment Window
The Add Equipment window is used to add a new Company Name, a new Site Name or new Equipment to a site.
When adding a company, all of the data including a site and one system must be entered. When adding a site or system, the screen shown below will have the company name and/or the site name fields filled-in based on what was selected when the Add Equip (existing client) button was clicked.
Connect To Multiple CIX Systems
One of the most powerful features of Network eManager is the ability to connect to multiple systems at one time.
The eManager user can connect to multiple CIX systems in multiple nodes in multiple locations simultaneously.
This feature requires an IP connection to all the equipment to which the user wants to connect. In this example, by simply clicking on the Toshiba Training main tree, it places a check mark to all the branch equipment beneath.
Connection Mode
There are two ways to connect to Network eManager. The default is Non-Strata Net mode. The Strata Net mode allows the technician a feature to automatically build Network DNs to multiple nodes simultaneously.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-13
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
Add New Station
The Add New Stations utility allows the technician to add a station DN to multiple systems in multiple nodes in a
Strata Net system by simply clicking on the Node Selection Panel
.
MAS Licensing
The MAS licensing screen is used to: Upload, Delete, Issue, Activate, and View Licenses.
Add New Network eManager User
The Account Setup utility creates new Network eManager users, each with one of four levels of permissions.
2-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu
Clicking on the View Levels Default Permission will shows the different access permissions of each level.
Network eManager Toolbar Setup Menu
In addition to the icons on the main menu page, there is a set of menus in the top right hand corner of the Network eManager screen. These menus, similar to the icons on the body of the page, include a menu item, Clients.
In the drop-down menu, click on Connect to Client SES Only to connect to the SES in the selected system. Only the Voice Mail menu will be available, all other menu items will be disabled
Application Settings
The Application Settings menu is used change the color theme of Network eManager, perform account setup and set restriction access. The Account Setup and Restriction Menus are identical to the icon-based menus.
Navigating The Menus
When you click on a command, a drop-down box displays the commands in that function set. For example, all of the Station-related programs are under the Station main menu. The list of station DNs are on the right side. The
Node Selection Panel allows you to see the data values from different CIX systems by simply clicking on the equipment name without having to log out.
The left column on the screen shows the Node Connection Panel. All of the current CIX sites that you are connected to are shown. The graphic in the middle of the screen shows the details of all the CIX equipment in the node. The detail information includes: Equipment Type, Equipment Version, Equipment Name, IP Address, Voice
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-15
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Mail, MAC Address and Country. One node will be highlighted to indicate the current node connection. Clicking on the other nodes display the data for that given node.
Features of Network eManager
Particular features of Network eManager are:
Excel Import
Toshiba has implemented an Excel import utility into Network eManager. Dealer technicians and Network
Administrators are able to populate Program 200 Station Data from an Excel spreadsheet. The Excel import utility allows the technician to upload the following information:
• First Name
• Last Name
• Phone Number
• Email Address
• VM MW Center Port
The Excel spreadsheet utility is compatible with any version of Microsoft Excel including Excel 2007.
The Excel import utility works in conjunction with the Active Directory Services utility that is already built-in to the current version of Network eManager.
The technician can either create a new spreadsheet with the above information or use an existing customer spreadsheet that already has the information. The technician simply has to tell which Network eManager which column in the spreadsheet corresponds to: First Name, Last Name, Phone Number,
Email Address and VM MW Center port. It does not matter if there are other columns in the spreadsheet that are populated with data.
Performing the Excel Import
1.
Prepare the Excel spreadsheet
The technician can either create a new spreadsheet from scratch as shown in Figure 2-1 or use an existing Excel spreadsheet that already has the data populated.
-
The columns do not need to be in any specific order. During the import process the technician has the option of specifying which column represents which field.
The first row of the Excel spreadsheet MUST BE USED AS THE HEADER. Specifically, cell A1 must have data entered (see example, below). The Excel spreadsheet import utility DOES
NOT use the first row as data.
2-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Data in cell A1
Figure 2-1. Excel Import Data
2.
Access the Excel import feature in Network eManager
-
The Excel import feature is located in the same location as the Active Directory Services import: Station -> Strata Synch/Excel
The first time the Excel utility is executed the file list will be empty.
-
Click on the Browse button as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2. Strata Synch/Excel
-
Locate the .xls file that was created with the station data and click the Open button as shown in Figure 2-3.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-17
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Figure 2-3. Choose File Screen
3.
Upload the spreadsheet into Network eManager
Once the path to the to the target .xls file has been entered, click the Upload button as shown in Figure 2-4.
2-18
Figure 2-4. Upload Screen
4.
Define the data
-
Figure 2-5 is the data definition screen. This screen allows the technician to specify which column represents which particular field. Notice that in Figure 2-5 below, column C is defined as “Column for Extension” but the data actually shows phone numbers. This is acceptable because the technician has the chance to specify which part of the phone number represents the extension number.
Click on Process Data to continue.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Figure 2-5. Data Definition Screen
5.
Step 5 – Verify the data
-
Figure 2-6 is the verification screen. This screen allows the technician to make sure field names correspond with the data. Clicking the Back button on this screen takes the technician back to the screen shown in Figure 2-5 and modify the columns, if necessary. Clicking the
Cancel button allows the technician to cancel the entire process and return to Figure 2-1.
Click the Save button to continue with the import process and save the .xls file to the Network eManager PC as shown on Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6. Verification Screen
6.
Start the import
Figure 2-7 shows that the spreadsheet has been parsed and verified by Network eManager and is now ready for importing.
-
If this is the very first time the Excel import utility has been executed, click the Initial Install button.
The Delete button is simply used to delete the previously uploaded spreadsheet file.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-19
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
-
The Ongoing Change button is the process for adding, deleting, or changing stations after the initial install. After an initial install has been performed, an image of the database is created on the Network eManager PC. This image is used for comparison when adds, moves and changes are executed. This button is only available after a successful initial install.
The View Log button shows any recent activities adds/deletions and modifications.
Figure 2-7. Import Screen
7.
Define the station types and extension numbers
From the initial install screen as shown in Figure 2-8, the “Number of DN Digits” specifies how many digits from far right to left should be counted as the extension number. Notice, for example, the user Ericson Abing in Figure 2-8. The telephone number listed is 9495833500.
Since the “Number of DN Digits” is set to 4, Network eManager will use the last four numbers as the extension number, in this example, 3500.
-
Click Start to begin the import process.
2-20
Figure 2-8. Number of DN Digits
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8.
Finish the Import Process
Figure 2-9 shows that 5 users were created successfully.
-
Click Done to exit.
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Figure 2-9. Created Users
-
Figure 2-10 shows that extensions 3500-3504 have been created.
Figure 2-10.Program 260 - Full IP Station Assignments
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-21
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Strata Synch - Export/Import from Active Directory
®
Services
Active Directory Services (ADS) is a Microsoft database technology used as a central repository to store information about a network resource. The primary goal of Active Directory services is to provide centralized authentication and authorization services for Windows system-based computers. There are three main objects stored in Active Directory Services: Resources (e.g., printers), Services (e.g., email) and Users. ADS provides control, management, organization, and security for these objects. While Network eManager has its own set of databases, these are not compatible with the ADS databases. This incompatibility in database format forces extra work because data entry must be duplicated in both ADS and Network eManager. However, Strata Synch, in conjunction with Network eManager, provides an interface between ADS databases and Strata CIX systems and
Strategy ES voice mail systems. The goal of Strata Synch is to decrease the programming time in new installations by eliminating the need to manually create users in Network eManager and then create a corresponding voice mail box for each user.
The Strata Synch utility can also be used for ongoing maintenance. Changes made to the ADS database (deletion, name change, extension change) can be propagated to the CIX by simply re-running Strata Synch and importing the database file into the CIX via Network eManager. Strata Synch is a one-way synchronization tool - changes made to the CIX (user deletion, name change, extension change) will not update the ADS database.
Strata Synch, in conjunction with Network eManager, performs the following:
• Directly connects to the ADS database and displays a real-time representation of all folders and organization units.
• Technicians can choose to download user information from a single folder or from multiple folders for a multi-CIX site.
• The selected users database is exported to an XML file.
• Using the exported XML file, Network eManager populates the following programs:
– Program 200/260: Station Data/Full IP Station Assignment
- Auto create all types of extensions (DKT/IPT/SIP/SLT) and either manually or automatically assigns
PDN equipment numbers.
- FK19 – Automatically assigns VMID code to match extension numbers.
- FK09 – Populates the Name To Display field from information taken from the ADS database.
– Stratagy ES Voice Mail
- Auto-creates a voice mail box for each extension.
- Pre-fills Name1 and Name2 in the User Mode tab based on the ADS database.
- Pre-fills the email account information based on the ADS database.
– Distribution List
- Auto-creates voice mail distribution lists from group information gathered from the ADS database.
Strata Synch automatically creates stations and voice mailboxes from the user information taken from Active
Directory Services. Technicians spend the most time in on new installations creating and modifying stations. If the user information is already stored in the ADS database, Strata Synch can assist in creating stations and voice mail boxes saving the technician the task of having to manually enter in all the stations.
Strata Synch can also assist Network Administrators who manage their company’s Strata CIX system. Changes made in the ADS database such as when employees leave the company, name changes, phone number changes, etc., can be propagated into the CIX database by re-running Strata Synch.
2-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
System Requirements for Strata Synch
• PC running Windows 2000 or higher (Win2000/2003, XP, Vista).
• The PC running Strata Synch must have network access to the Active Directory Services server.
• Strata Synch requires a Domain Admin level user account in order to connect to the ADS database.
• Network eManager V5.20 A08b or later.
• Strata CIX software R3.X or higher.
Optimum Strata Synch use requires preparation by both the technician and the Network Administrator. In order to extract the user information from ADS correctly, Strata Synch needs to know which folder or organizational unit in which the user information is kept. Strata Synch can either pull the information from one folder or multiple folders based on a keyword. The Network Administrator needs to enter a keyword to define which CIX system the user is assigned to when the user information is entered in the ADS database.
Strata CIX Configuration Assumptions
• Extension Number – By default, the last four digits of the telephone number entered into the
Telephone number field, as shown in the following figures. This parameter can be set to use up to the last five digits.
• Extension Name – The display name is taken from the First and Last Name fields of the General tab in the User properties window.
• Voice Mail box Number – The extension number is used as the voice mail box number.
• Voice Mail Name 1, Name 2 – Name 1 and Name 2 of the voice mail box is taken from the First and
Last name fields of the General tab in the User properties window.
• VMID Code – The VMID Code in Program 260 FK19 is the same as the Extension number.
• Unified Messaging email address – The email address is taken from the eMail field in the General tab of the User properties window in Active Directory.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-23
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Example 1 – Single Strata CIX Node
All Users in ADS stored in a Single Folder or Organizational Unit
Shown below is a sample Active Directory Users and Computers screen. In this first example, all of the users are stored in one folder, the default Users folder. In this example the technician can simply select the Users folder from within Strata Synch and export all of the contents of the Users folder.
All users stored in the default Users folder
2-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Example 2 – Multiple Strata CIX Nodes
All Users located in the same Users Folder
This example is more complex because it requires assistance from the Network Administrator.
For example, this customer has two CIX nodes: one in Los Angeles and one in Irvine. All of the users, however, are stored in the same default Users folder. Since all the users are stored in the same folder, Strata Synch must be told how to differentiate users belonging to the Los Angeles CIX versus users belonging to the Irvine CIX.
The only way to differentiate users is to put a tag in the Users properties window to allow Strata Synch to filter the different nodes. In the screen below, the user Ericson Abing belongs to the Irvine office as shown in the Office field. Users in the Los Angeles office would be tagged as belonging to the Los Angeles location.
Important!
The Telephone number field must be populated. ADS uses this field to assign the extension number. If this field is left blank no station is created for this name.
In the General tab - the Office field is used to identify the user location.
The last four digits (default) are used to create the extension and the voicemail account.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-25
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Installing and Launching Strata Synch
The Strata Synch file (StrataSych_V1.2_Setup.zip) is a small file that must be run on a PC with Windows XP, 2000, or 2003 which has network access to the Active Directory Server. The Strata Synch file is downloaded as a zip file.
1.
After extracting the file, double-click the StrataSynch1_2.exe file. The setup wizard displays as shown.
2.
Click Next.
3.
The License Agreement Dialog opens. Read the license agreement, click to select I agree, then click Next.
2-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4.
In the Select Installation Folder screen accept the default parameters and click Next.
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
5.
In the Confirm Installation dialog click Next.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-27
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
6.
When the installation is complete click the Close button.
7.
Check for critical updates from Microsoft for .NET Framework.
Launch Strata Synch and Login to ADS:
1.
Click on Start > Programs > Strata Synch > Strata Synch.
2.
The login screen shown here appears. Type in either the host name or the IP Address of the Active Directory
Server in the Active Directory Server field.
3.
Type in a user name that has Administrative privileges to the Active Directory Server.
4.
Type in the password for that user name.
2-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Example 1
1.
After a successful login, Strata Synch connects to the Active Directory Server and displays a real-time view of all the folders or organizational units from the Active Directory Users and Computers screen as shown here.
From this screen, the technician or Network Administrator can select multiple folders from which to export users. From our previous case example where there is only one CIX system and all the users are stored in the default users folder, the technician can simply select the Users folder.
Click to check-mark the Users folder to use this folder for the export.
2.
Click the Next button and the site configuration dialogue box appears. Because our first example is for a single node CIX system, select the default single site as shown here. The Site Name field value is user configurable.
The value for this field is used for the file name of the export file.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-29
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
3.
Click Next and the dialog box as shown here displays. This screen shows that the tool is ready to start exporting all the users Strata Synch found in the default Users folder in ADS.
4.
Enter the directory path or click the Browse button to select the directory to which to export the users.
5.
Click Export.
6.
Once Export is pressed, the export process begins as shown in these figures.
2-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
The File Export Log displays as shown.
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
7.
When the export process is finished, the log screen shows how many users were exported as well as how many groups were exported. The export file (Site1.xml) is the name entered in the Site Name field in Step 2.
8.
Click Next and the window as shown is displayed.
9.
Selecting the Site1.xml displays all of the users exported to that file.
10. The files are saved by default to a folder in: C:\Documents and Settings\(user_name)\My Documents\Strata
Synch.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-31
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
11. Click Finish to close the Strata Synch program. The XML files that were created are now saved to the folder as shown here.
2-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Example 2 – Multiple Strata CIX Nodes
Example 2 is more complex than Example 1 because Strata Synch needs to be told how to filter users belonging to different CIX nodes but are all in the same default Users folder. In order for Example 2 to work properly, the
Administrator has to put a tag on each user that is exported to the CIX system. The tag, as shown here, is the entry in the User’s property window, General tab, Office field.
1.
For multi-node CIX installations, click on the Multiple Sites radio button as shown here.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-33
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
2.
Enter the number of sites. For our example, chose two sites. The key field value allows the technician or
Network Administrator to choose which field in the Users property window in ADS to use as the tag filter. For our example, we will use the Office field in the General tab of the User’s property window in Active Directory
Services.
3.
This figure shows how the Office field is mapped to the Office field in the General tab (General_Office) of the
User’s property window.
4.
The box that shows the Site names, Site1 and Site2 are default names but is user configurable. For example, a more meaningful name would be CIX670 and CIX200 or Irvine and Los Angeles. The name chosen will be the exported file name for each individual node as shown here.
5.
The Key field in the figure above is the match word criteria (tag) that Strata Synch uses to determine which users belong in the Irvine node and which users belong in the Los Angeles node.
6.
The key field must be input manually and must match exactly with what the Network Administrator typed in the
Office field of the General tab in the User’s property window.
2-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
7.
Click Next to start the Export process.
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
8.
Click Export to start the export process.
Export Progress Display
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-35
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
9.
When the export process is finished, the log screen shows how many users were exported per site as well as how many groups were exported. Notice that the file names are CIX670.XML, CIX200.XML, Unassign.XML and Group.XML.
10. The Unassigned.XML file shows all the users that did not match the criteria for either Irvine or Los Angeles.
This means that these users either had nothing entered in the General_Office field, or the value does not match the criteria.
11. The Group.XML file shows all of the groups found in the ADS. These groups can potentially be used for eMail distribution groups.
2-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
12. Selecting either the CIX670.xml or CIX200.xml displays all of the users exported to that file.
13. The files are saved by default to a folder in: C:\Documents and Settings\(user)\My Documents\Strata Synch.
14. Click Finish to close the application.
Import User Data to Network eManager
As described previously, Strata Synch is used for gathering station user information from the ADS, formatting it, and saving that information in an XML file. This section describes how to import the XLM files into Network eManager.
Important!
You must be logged into Network eManager as Administrator for the Active Directory feature to appear under the Stations menu.
Before using Network eManager:
1.
Login to Strata Synch.
2.
Create the XML files.
The following process shows how to upload the XML file, import the file into Network eManager, and create the station assignments.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-37
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
1.
Launch Network eManager (version R520A08b or higher). On the main menu screen select: Station > Strata
Synch/Excel.
2.
The Active Directory window opens. The Upload Target, by default, automatically checks both the CIX and voice mail boxes, indicating that Strata Synch will populate both the Strata CIX system and the Stratagy voice mail system.
2-38
Note
If you have connected to a CIX system without voicemail, only the CIX check box is shown.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
3.
Click Browse to locate the XML file Strata Synch created earlier. When the file is located click Open. The
Choose file dialog box opens.
In the example shown here, Irvine.xml file is selected. Highlight the file you wish to use then click the Open button. Group.xml is the voicemail group.
4.
The selected XML file displays on screen. Click Upload. This copies the XML file from the target directory into the Network eManager PC to be processed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-39
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
With a file uploaded the following functions are available:
- Delete – Deletes the uploaded XML file.
- Ongoing Change – see “Ongoing Change” later in this section.
- Initial Install – Used to import the first file into the system database. This function allows the technician to load all of the station data without the need to manually enter all the station names into the CIX system database.
Note
Strata Synch assumes that there are no users in the system database, not even the default extensions created on first power-up. If there are any station cards in the system during the first power-up and the CIX system creates the default extensions, they must be removed so the resources can be freed from the xIPU cards to be used by the Strata Synch application. Do not use the Strata Synch application on a Strata CIX system that already has an existing database.
If this is a new installation (no system data saved) click the Initial Install button.
Note
If using multiple XML files:
1.
Select one XML then, select Initial Install.
2.
Select the next XML file and select Ongoing Change.
• Clicking Initial Install displays the screen shown here .
Notice that the XML file has been parsed and
Network eManager displays the following information extracted from the XML file:
• Telephone number
• First Name
• Last Name
• eMail Address
When the XML file has been parsed, the technician can select the station type of each DN. By default, all the extensions are created as DKT-type. Select the type of phone all of the extensions by clicking on the drop-down box to select the correct phone type and then clicking the Set All Phones Type to command. In the example given above the two extensions were set to be IPTs.
2-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
By default, Network eManager builds the stations using the first available xIPU with open resources to build the stations. Station cards are found by scanning the system cabinet card slots from left to right and from the top down.
For example, it starts with Cabinet 1 and looks for a card from Slot 1 to Slot 8. Then it goes to Cabinet 2 and performs the same routine until all the cabinets have been checked.
If the technician wants to specify a particular xIPU card for an IPT extension, the Equipment Number (Cabinet # and Slot #) must be specified in the PDN Equipment Number field for that DN.
When you are satisfied that all of the Phone Types and PDN Equipment Numbers are set, click Start.
Network eManager starts to process the XML file and begins building the extensions. When completed, Network eManager displays the number of users created as shown here.
The figure shows that extension 5551 has been built on an LIPU card. Notice that field #10 [Name to Display] has been populated with the correct name and field #19 [VMID Code] has been populated to match that of the extension.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-41
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Strata Synch also builds a corresponding mailbox by default (uncheck the voice mailbox to create stations without mailboxes). Notice that in this example, a mailbox has been created for extension 5551, and that Name1 and
Name 2 have been populated.
Strata Synch also populates the eMail account field in the voice mailbox if it finds a corresponding email address from the imported XML file.
2-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Ongoing Change
An Ongoing Change is the process for adding, deleting, or changing stations after the initial install. After an initial install has been performed, an image of the database is created on the Network eManager PC. This image is used as the comparison when adds, moves and changes are executed. The Ongoing Change button is only available after a successful initial install.
Note
Strata Synch cannot verify that an XML file is valid for a specific CIX system before it is uploaded to that system. You must ensure that the correct XML to be used for the ongoing change is selected.
In the example, shown here, the last name for extension #5555 is changed from ‘L’ to ‘Lemon’. The first name for extension #5551 is changed from ‘Eric’ to ‘Ericson’.
The uploaded ‘ongoing change’ information is compared to the ‘initial install’ image. The differences are flagged and shown on this screen.
The changes are not made until you check mark the box and click the Apply button.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-43
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
This example shows both items were selected, the Apply button was clicked, and Network eManager successfully applied both changes.
The View Log screen displays all the actions that were performed using the Strata Synch application.
2-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager
Access Multiple Systems
A powerful feature of Network eManager is the ability to access the programming data on multiple CIX systems without having to log-off of one system and then log-on to the next system. In this example Network eManager is currently viewing the Station programming data for the CIX200-TECH switch. Program 200 displays the familiar list of stations on the right with the details of each station in the work area.
By simply clicking on a different system in the Node Selection Panel, the Administrator can switch from viewing the
Station Programming data at one node to viewing the data from another node without having to logout.
Node Selection Panel
The Node Selection Panel provides the following features:
• Provides a list of the group member CIX systems and CIX/SES pairs (nodes).
• Allows the user to show the data from another node on the current page by simply clicking on the node.
• Indicates Active Node with a distinct glyph. The Active Node is the CIX or CIX/SES pair that is currently accessed by the page.
Copy To Multiple Equipment
A powerful feature of Network eManager is the ability to selectively copy data from one CIX system to multiple CIX systems. For example, to copy selected fields in Program 260, Full IP Station Assignments:
1.
Click on the DN to select the fields to copy and click on Selective Copy.
2.
Click on all the fields to be copied. For example; COS Day1, DRL Day1, FRL Day1, QPL Day1 and LCR
Group. The ‘Highlight All’ button is still available to select all values for a copy.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-45
Network eManager®
Back Up Database on Multiple CIX Systems
3.
Click the ‘Select Copy To PDN(s)’ button.
4.
Notice that PDNs from different systems are visible. Select all the PDNs the selected fields will be copied to.
Apply To Multiple Equipment
Network eManager allows the user to modify programming and Apply To multiple CIX systems. When you click the
Apply To button (not seen in all commands), the Apply To Group CIX dialogue box appears (right). From the dialogue box the user can select which CIX systems the changes are applied to.
2-46
When the Submit button is clicked the changed program values propagates to all of the connected systems. There is no need to switch back and forth between CIX systems to copy the changed data to different systems.
Back Up Database on Multiple CIX Systems
CIX Data Backup
Network eManager can backup data from multiple systems. This function can save significant time when preparing to update the CIX system software on multiple nodes and when a backup needs to be done on each node.
The new database backup method provides extended functionality including:
• Selecting the new software file directly from the user’s PC.
• Selecting multiple CIX systems for update and starting the procedure at once without further user interaction during the procedure.
The following actions must be done before the update process can start:
• Locate the new CIX software by CIX system type.
• Decide which CIX systems will be updated - type should match with software.
• Decide for each system whether the new software should be automatically activated after it is uploaded.
• Decide for each system whether the current CIX database should be restored during the new software activation. If yes, Network eManager creates a CIX database backup prior to uploading the new software.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Update Software on Multiple CIX Systems
The new CIX Data Backup is under Maintenance > CIX Data Backup. The user can select which systems need to be backed up or can select all of the systems at the site. If any of the systems fail to backup, it will not halt the entire backup operation. The backup procedure continues to run for the other systems.
Update Software on Multiple CIX Systems
The new CIX Software Update is located under Maintenance > CIX Software Update. In the window you have the option of backing up the CIX systems prior to the upgrade. If the user clicks the Yes button, the database backup screen is displayed allowing you to select the databases to backup. Once the backup procedure is completed, click the Browse button to find the corresponding CIX software update for each CIX system which needs backing-up.
The update software must match the corresponding system, otherwise the update procedure will fail. Then click the
Upload file(s) to eManager server button. Network eManager then copies the update software to a designated folder in the Network eManager server.
When all the CIX software updates have been uploaded press Start to complete the process.
Note
Network eManager requires the update file you download from the Toshiba FYI website to remain in zip format. Do not unzip the update file or the update process will fail.
Create Network DNs in Multiple Systems
Network eManager can automatically build Network DN stations from one system and have it automatically created in the other nodes of a Strata Net network. From the Network eManager configuration screen, click on Strata Net >
Network DN Setup > Add New Station.
Note
Only one DN can be created across multiple nodes at one time.
In the Add New Station window, fill in the following information:
• User Name
• Phone Type
• Extension
Click Submit.
Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or from the program itself by clicking a button in the command screen. For example, the System Speed Dial Table View can be accessed by clicking System > System Speed Dial Table View, or by clicking System > System Speed Dial, then clicking the System Speed Dial Table View button at the bottom of the screen.
Notes
•
Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database the table may take several minutes to download.
•
Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an independent window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-47
Network eManager®
Table Views
The tables have the following functionality (see Table View example below):
Navigational controls enable viewing or moving in a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help sort information found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and Next buttons above the header.
If you want to print or analyze the table you can also select All from the Drop down between the Previous and Next buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.
In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the figure above, the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. Submit is also not available because nothing has been changed.
• Sort – You can sort tables by clicking the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates the column the sort is performed by.
• Bookmark – You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move forward or backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note
The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button. Tables that have a
Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All buttons.
• Edit/Refresh/Print buttons – You can edit, refresh or print the table by clicking the appropriate buttons at the top of the screen. In some tables the Edit button toggles between View Collected Data and Edit.
- The Edit function works for the Name, Number and Destination columns. Use the Refresh button if you add, delete or make changes to table entries in Programs that feed tables or in Guide pages.
- The Print button enables you to print tables. However, when you click the Print button only the part of the table that is displayed on the screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is displayed. It will then automatically print from where the last screen ended.
2-48
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
The enhancements listed below can be used with all Releases of CTX/CIX systems.
These new features can save significant time and effort by exporting data such as station speed dial lists or DID assignments to a file and then importing the file for assignment.
Network eManager DID/DNIS Assignments - Import/Export
This feature allows all DID/DNIS numbers and parameters assigned to one or more Incoming Line Groups (ILG) to be exported as a comma separated value (CSV) file and saved on the Network eManager PC. This file can then be imported and automatically uploaded to another ILG in the same CIX or to a different CIX system.
Download
The system will create a text file. The text is the CSV data.To download DID/DNIS assignments:
1.
Display the DID/DNIS Table by clicking Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View.
2.
Click Yes in the popup.
3.
Click on the Export button.
4.
A dialog box will open. Select the location to save the file and assign a file name.
Example
The following is an example of using this process to copy the DID/DNIS numbers from ILG #5 to ILG #7 in the same CIX system. After the DID/DNIS numbers and parameters have been assigned to ILG #5 perform the following:
1.
Create DID/DNIS numbers and parameters, etc. for ILG Group 5 using the DID/DNIS wizard.
2.
Open the DID/DNIS Table View located under Trunk > DID/DNID Table View. All assignments for DID
ILG Group 5 are displayed.
3.
At the top of the DID/DNID Table View screen click on the Export button.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-49
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
4.
Select or create the folder where the ILG #5 DID/DNIS assignment file will be saved and then click
Save. This will save the DID numbers and parameters of ILG #5 as a comma delimited text file.
5.
Create DID Incoming Line Group ILG #7 in Trunk Programming, Program 304. Assign the number of digits the DID numbers should have in Program 304 -11 (four digits in this example). The number of digits for ILG #7 should be the same as ILG #5.
6.
After creating DID ILG #7 open the exported ILG #5 DID text file using Windows. This is the file saved in Step 4.
7.
In the text file, change the ILG number from 5 to 7. Be sure to keep the same comma delimited format intact as shown below, then save the file under a different name.
2-50
8.
In Network eManager, open the DID/DNIS Table View located under Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View. All assignments for DID ILG Group 5 are displayed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
9.
On the top of the DID/DNID Table View screen click on the Import button.
10. In the Choose file dialog box use the Browse button to find the text file containing ILG #7 created in
Step 7.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-51
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
11. After selecting the ILG #7 file click on Open. The Network eManager Select Import File dialog box will open. Click on Import Now. Network eManager will import and upload the ILG #7 data to the CIX.
12. In Network eManager, open the DID/DNIS Table View, select Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View and click
Refresh. All assignments for DID ILG Group 5 and 7 are displayed. This means that all of
ILG #5 DID assignments have been applied to ILG #7 in the CIX database.
2-52
13. If you failed to create ILG #7 in Step 5 with the correct number of DID digits in Program 309 -11 the following error message will be presented on the Table View screen.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
Network eManager Station Directory - Import/Export
This feature allows CIX station assignments such as user names and telephone numbers to be exported to a comma separated value (CSV) text file. This file can be imported by third party software to create dialing directories. Station Assignments Table View is displayed in Network eManager, then exported as a CSV text file to the Network eManager computer.
Station Directory Information Example
1.
In Network eManager select Station > Station Assignments > PDN Table button, or go directly to the table view by selecting Station > PDN Table View.
2.
Click Yes in the popup. All station assignments are displayed in a table.
3.
Click the Export button on the top of the screen.
4.
From the dialog box that appears after clicking Export, name the file and select or create the folder it should be downloaded to.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-53
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
5.
Open the exported text file.
6.
One application for this file is to edit the unwanted fields out to allow third party software to create a directory.
The format of the edited file may need to vary depending on the third party software that creates the directory.
The file below has all table view fields deleted except:
• Extension Number (PRG 200 Prime DN)
• Extension Name (PRG 200-09)
• Network Calling Number (PRG 200-46)
2-54
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
The edited text file can be opened with Microsoft Excel as a comma delimited text file and columns can be rearranged as needed.
Microsoft Excel can be used to format the directory appearance.
System Speed Dial Export/Import
This feature allows station and system speed dial names and numbers to be exported and imported. The exported speed dial data is saved into a comma separated value (CSV) text file which can be edited using any text editor such as Word Pad. The exported file can be imported by other CIX systems to save installation time.
The exported and imported speed dial file format is shown below. The exported file header and line format must not be change or an error message will occur when trying to import a file. Commas are always required between fields as shown.
• System Speed Dial File Format:
Speed Dial Index (01 ~ 799),Speed Dial Number,Name
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-55
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
• Station Speed Dial Format:
Prime DN,Speed Dial Index (01 ~ 99),Speed Dial Number,Name
You can edit exported speed dial files to add more speed dial names and numbers, change formats between system and station, and change Prime DNs. Editing allows:
• One station’s speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into another station’s speed dial bins.
• A station’s speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into CIX system Speed Dial.
• System speed dial names/numbers can be imported into another CIX system.
• System speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into station speed dial bins.
• System and Station speed dial files can be used by third party software to create dialing directories.
Station Speed Dial Export/Import
This feature allows all station speed dial numbers of one station to be exported and saved as a file on the eManager PC. The assignments in this file can then be imported and automatically uploaded to another station speed dial bin in the same CIX or into System Speed dial.
Example: Assign station 200 speed dial numbers to station 205 in the same CIX system.
1.
Make sure that station 200 has speed dial number memory assigned in Program 200-35. Create station speed dial numbers and names for station 200 using the Station Speed Dial Table View.
2.
Open the Station Speed Dial Table View, select Advanced Configuration > Station > Station Speed Dial
Table View. All of the assignments for station speed dial are displayed.
3.
At the top of the Station Speed Dial Table View screen click on the Export buttom.
2-56
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
4.
Select or create the folder where the station speed dial assignment file for station 200 will be saved, then click Save. This will save the station speed dial names and numbers as a CSV text file.
5.
Make sure that station 205 has speed dial number memory assigned in Program 200-35.
6.
Open the exported station 200 speed dial CSV text file saved in Step 4, using Word Pad.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-57
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
7.
In the text file, change the Prime DN from 200 to 205 – be sure to keep the same comma delimited format intact as shown below and do not change the header. Save the file under a different name.
8.
In Network eManager, select Station > Speed Dial Table View. All assignments for Station Speed Dial are displayed.
9.
On the top of the Station Speed Dial Table View screen click on Import.
2-58
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
10. The Choose File dialog box will open. Use the Browse button to find the text file containing the speed dial assignments for station 200 (created in Step 7 above).
11. After selecting the station 205 speed dial file click Open. A Network eManager dialog box will prompt you to Import the data to the CIX. Click Import Now. This will cause Network eManager to import and upload the station 205 speed dial data to the CIX.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-59
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
12. In Network eManager select Station > Speed Dial Table View. All assignments for station speed dial are displayed. Station 205 will have the same speed dial assignments as station 200.
Network eManager Network Calling Number Upload
The Network Calling Number is normally entered and submitted one-at-a-time for each PDN using Program 200-
46. This can take a lot of time if the system has many PDNs. The Network Calling Number Upload feature allows you to create a comma separated (CSV) text file containing PDNs and their associated Network Calling Numbers and then upload the text file to the CIX once.
The format of the text file is: Prime DN,Network Calling Number
To create the CSV file for uploading you must create a list of all of the stations in the CIX system. One method for creating the list is display the Table View of the stations, export the table, then delete all but the station numbers in the text file that was exported.
Example: Upload Network Calling numbers for stations 200~207.
1.
Create a CSV text file containing the PDN and Network Calling number for each station. In this example the file shown was created using Microsoft Notepad.
As noted above, a Network eManager Imported Table View file could be used to start this by
2-60
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features
generating all PDNs (then, in the imported text file, delete all other fields except the PDNs so that all that would need to be entered is the Network Calling numbers).
2.
Open the station PDN Table View and select Station > PDN Table View. All of the station table view assignments will be displayed (Note: Network Calling Numbers not are shown).
3.
Click on the Upload CID button at the top of the PDN Table View screen and browse to the file created in Step 1.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-61
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
4.
Click Import Now. Network eManager will upload the selected file into the CIX database and then update Program 200-46 and the PDN Table View automatically (Note: Network Calling Numbers are shown).
Connection Entry for Dial-up
This new connection setup must be completed in order to use the modem in the Network eManager PC to dial-up a CIX system. The following steps cover the network connection setup in the PC that must be done to use the PC modem.
1.
In Control Panel Network Connections, select Create a new connection to start the wizard:
2.
Click Next.
2-62
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3.
Select ‘Connect to the network at my workplace’ then click Next.
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-63
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
4.
Select ‘Dial-up connection,’ then click Next.
RemoteCTX1
5.
Enter “RemoteCTX1” as the name of the connection (this entry is case sensitive and must not have any spaces), and click Next.
2-64
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
6.
You must leave the Phone number empty, the phone number will be configured later in the Network eManager equipment profile. Click on Next.
RemoteCTX1
7.
Do not click on the ‘Add a shortcut’ box.’ Click Finish, it will create the new entry and pop up the Connect dialog.
8.
Do not make any entries in this dialog box. Click on Properties to continue with the setup:
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-65
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
The CIXModem Properties dialog box will open.
9.
Select your modem and configure if necessary, otherwise leave the default values for other fields including the
Options Security and Advanced tabs. You must leave the Phone number empty for now. The phone number will be configured later in the Network eManager equipment profile. Click on the Networking tab.
PPP protocol
2-66
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up
10. Select PPP protocol from the ‘Type of dial-up server I am calling:’ drop-down list. Uncheck all items on the other list except TCP/IP. (You cannot uncheck Network Monitor Driver if it is there.) Select TCP/IP and click
Properties:
11. Click to select: Enter an IP address between 192.168.255.2 and 192.168.255.252. Use an IP address that is not already in use on this PC and its network.
12. Click OK, then OK again to close the Properties.
13. Click Cancel on the Connect CIXModem dialog to close it. The new entry is created in Network Connections.
14. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen will appear. Click on Cancel.
The new network connection entry can be viewed by going to the Control Panel.
RemoteCTX1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-67
Network eManager®
Help Topics/Context Help
Help Topics/Context Help
In Network eManager, move the pointer over Help>. The drop-down menu shows: Command Table, CIX Help, SES
Help. Click Command Table to show the entire Command structure in numerical order. Click CIX Help to open the
Programming Manual Vol. 1 (this manual), or SES Help to open the Stratagy ES Programming Manual Vol. 2.
About Network eManager
Every Network eManager screen displays the software version numbers.
No Response from Device
While using Network eManager the error message ‘No response from device’ may appear. The following is a list of conditions that may cause the problem and suggestions for trouble shooting.
• The connection parameters in the Profile database Equipment List are incorrect. No CIX is configured as listed on the network. Check whether the IP Address and the Community Name are correct as shown in the Equipment List.
• There is no IP network path between Network eManager and the CIX. Ping the CIX from the Network eManager server PC to determine if there is connectivity.
• Between Network eManager and the CIX, the SNMP messages are blocked by a network device
(router, firewall, etc.). Check the network device(s) and firewall configuration, verify that the SNMP protocol and IP ports 161 and 162, and also the FTP protocol and IP ports 20 and 21 are not blocked.
• Network latency is due to high traffic, not enough bandwidth. Use network monitoring tools to verify that
SNMP responses from the network location of the CIX arrive at the Network eManager PC location within 3000ms.
• The CIX is turned off or not functioning. Verify that the targeted CIX is turned on and running.
• The CIX processor is overloaded, delaying processing SNMP request messages. In this case the normal SNMP message flow will be restored by CIX. The system congestion is cleared up and the system is running under normal load.
2-68
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Network eManager®
Network eManager DESI Integration / Telephone Keystrip Printing
Network eManager DESI Integration / Telephone Keystrip
Printing
Network eManager provides a function to collect all keystrip button assignments programmed in a system and download them as a comma separated value (CSV) text file to the Network eManager Hard Drive. The keystrip data file contains the data for all IP and DKT Telephones, DSS Consoles and Add-On-Modules.
Telephone Keystrip Label software from DESI Telephone Labels, Inc. can import this file and print keystrips on
DESI keystrip paper. Keystrips can be printed without having to manually type labels for each button on each
Telephone, DSS and ADM keystrip. This feature provides a large labor cost saving. Clicking on Download Keystrip
Data will display this screen.
This feature supports DESI Telephone Labels, Inc. products only and requires DESI Print Engine 2.74 software or later and Toshiba format Keystrip paper. DESI keystrip paper is available for all Toshiba DKT2000/DKT3000/
DKT3200/IPT2000/IP5000-series telephones DSS consoles and Add-On-Modules. To order DESI Software and
Keystrip paper for Toshiba telephone products go to www.DESI.com or call 1-800-814-3922.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
2-69
Network eManager®
Manage Stand-Alone SES Systems
Manage Stand-Alone SES Systems
Network eManager provides a sparate menu item to select an SES system for administration. NeM connection to a stand-alone SES sytem is different from connection to an SES with Strata CIX system in that only voice mail menus are available.
1.
To connect to a stand-alone SES select Connect to Client SES Only from the NeM home page Client menu.
2.
Click on Connect to Client SES Only.
2-70
Main VM
3.
Enter the IP addreess or the host name of the SES system then, lick on the Connect button.
4.
The Stratagy ES menu will appear when the connection is made.
Main VM
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses -
SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
3
License Consideration
This chapter describes the content and use for Strata CIX, Media Application Server (MAS) and ACD dongle license.
•
Each of the following items requires an IP Port (end point) license:
– IP5000/IPT2000 series
– SIP telephones
– SoftIPT (Also requires a Soft IPT License)
•
Basic Port licenses are required for each of the following when using GIPU, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS ports (the LIC-CIX is not required to support these items):
– IP Voice Mail
– IP ACD Announcement port
– IP Attendant Console (does not require a Soft IP License)
– Strata Net IP trunks (requires a Strata Net License)
•
IP End-Point Licenses included with the IP System license:
– CIX100 and CIX670 ship with four IP End-Point licenses
– CIX200 ships with 16 IP End-Point licenses
– CIX1200 ships with 4 IP End-Point licenses
3-1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for
Dealers and National Accounts
Important!
Pop-Up Blockers should be disabled before beginning this process
1.
Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Generation.
2.
The License Code Generation screen as shown below appears. Enter the information as specified.
3-2
•
Select the Product Line.
• Select the Generation Type.
•
For National Account, check the National Account box.
• Enter the Order #.
•
Enter the Serial # OR the MAC Address.
• Click Set Software Version.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
3.
Select the features to apply to the system. The required minimum software version is automatically populated based on the features selected.
Click Submit.
4.
You are returned to the License Code Generation screen with the software version populated.
Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-3
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
5.
When a license is generated for a version greater than the last license generated, a warning displays asking if you have upgraded your software. If you answer Yes, you continue with the generation; a No takes you back to
Select Version.
CAUTION! Once this version has been generated, you CANNOT go back to a lower version, nor can you regenerate a lower version.
Click Continue.
6.
This displays the Purchased quantity, Available quantity, Serial # and MAC Address. Enter the Activate Qty (for
National Accounts, the Activate Qty is automatically filled and cannot be changed). The Site Description and
Install Instructions are for your information only.
3-4
Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
7.
Enter the End User Site information (
*
are required fields) and click Continue.
8.
The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.
9.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code into Network eManager.
CAUTION! Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or at the end of the code
•
Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information for maintenance reminders.
• Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
•
Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-5
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
3-6
License Inquiry
1.
Click on License Codes. A drop-down box appears - click Inquiries.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
2.
You can inquire on the Serial # OR MAC Address. Click Submit.
3.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. By clicking on the down arrow in the Date
Box and highlighting a date, the generation for that date displays, or enter the Order # and click Submit (see next page).
•
Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information that is used for maintenance reminders.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-7
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
Licenses generated from the order display as follows. Click on the red Generation Time to display details.
Open License Summary
1.
Click on License Codes and click on Open License Summary.
3-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
2.
Search by any option or simply check the Search All box and click Search.
• To view the license use HTML format.
• To save to another file use the XLS format.
3.
Find the license you want and click on the red Part Num. Click Expand Orders Lists to see all order numbers.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-9
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for
Dealers and National Accounts
Important!
Pop-Up Blockers should be disabled before beginning this process.
1.
Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Generation.
Make the following entries:
•
Select the Product Line
• Select the Generation Type - For National Account check the National Account box
•
Enter the Order #
• Enter the Serial # OR the MAC Address
•
Click Set Software Version
3-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
2.
Select the features to apply to the system. The required minimum software version is automatically populated based on the features selected. Click Submit.
3.
You are returned to the License Code Generation screen with the software version populated.
Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-11
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
4.
When a license is generated for a version greater than the last license generated, a warning displays asking if you have upgraded your software. If you answer Yes, you continue with the generation; a No takes you back to
Select Version.
CAUTION! Once this version has been generated, you CANNOT go back to a lower version, nor can you regenerate a lower version
Click Continue.
5.
This displays the Purchased quantity, Available quantity, Serial # and MAC Address. Enter the Activate Qty (for
National Accounts, the Activate Qty is automatically filled and cannot be changed). The Site Description and
Install Instructions are for your information only.
3-12
Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
6.
Enter the End User Site information (
*
are required fields) and click Continue.
7.
The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.
8.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code into Network eManager.
Important!
Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or the end of the code.
•
Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information for maintenance reminders.
•
Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
•
Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
•
Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-13
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
Transfer License
1.
Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click Inquires.
2.
In the License Code Inquiry screen (shown next):
•
Select the Product Line.
• Select the Generation For Replacement.
3-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
•
For National Account, check the National Account box.
• Enter the old Serial # OR the MAC Address.
•
Enter the new replacement Serial # OR the MAC Address.
Click Submit.
3.
In the next screen, License Code Generator, enter the End User Site information (
*
are required fields).
Click Continue.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-15
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
4.
The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree.
Click Finalize.
5.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. This page explains that a transfer was generated from one serial # to another.
3-16
•
Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
License Inquiry
1.
Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Inquiries.
2.
You can inquire on the Serial # OR MAC Address.
Click Submit.
3.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. By clicking on the down arrow in the Date
Box and highlighting a date, the generation for that date displays.Or you can enter the Order # (shown next page).
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
•
Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information that is used for maintenance reminders.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-17
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
3-18
Click Submit.
Licenses generated from the order number display as shown below. Click on the red Generation Time to display details.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts
Open License Summary
1.
Click on License Codes and in the drop down box click on Open License Summary.
2.
Search by any option or simply check the Search All box and click Search.
• To view the license use HTML format.
• To save to another file use the XLS format.
3.
Find the license you want and click on the red Part Num. Click Expand Orders Lists to see all order numbers.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-19
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
ACD Dongle License
Important!
Pop-Up Blockers must be disabled before beginning this process.
National Accounts License Codes can be generated by either the originating or installing dealer. To generate a license code, you need the Order # for the license and the Serial # of the ACD Dongle.
•
Order # – An Order # is issued to your dealership for every order placed. You need to obtain the applicable license order #. The order MUST be placed on FYI, passed through credit and the invoice generated before the license can be generated (please allow 24 hours).
• Serial # - The Serial # is located on a sticker on the dongle. FYI License Code Generation Help Desk:
(800) 645-6078.
1.
Click on License Codes. A drop-down box appears.
3-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
2.
Click on Generation. The first License Code Generator screen appears. Enter the information as follows:
• Choose Product Line: ACD Dongle
•
License Generation Type: Standard Generation
• Check National Account if applicable
•
Enter the Order #
• Enter the ACD Dongle Serial #
Click Submit.
If a serial number is entered that does not belong to your dealership, the warning below will display. If you reenter the serial number it will allow you to continue (however, once the license has been generated, it CAN-
NOT be returned or refunded).
3.
Click Cancel to go back, or re-enter the Serial # and click Continue.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-21
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
Another License Code Generator page displays giving the number of licenses Purchased, licenses still Available, Current Cfg and Max Cfg.
4.
Enter the quantity of licenses to be activated under Activate Qty.
Note If this is a National Account, the Activate Qty field is already populated and cannot be altered.
Site Description and Install Instructions fields are designed for you to enter information to assist you.
Click Submit.
5.
Enter the End User Site information ( are required fields).Click Continue.
3-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6.
Verify information and click Finalize.
7.
The License Agreement will display for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-23
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
8.
The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Enter the required information as follows:
3-24
•
Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code into Network eManager.
Important!
Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or the end of the code.
• For TASKE License, click Download License File or Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information for maintenance reminders.
•
Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
•
Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License
R5 License Generation for CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200
Upgrading from R4 to R5 software is a straight forward process. To upgrade from R3 to R5 you must first upgrade from R3 to R4.
To generate a Release 5 license for a CIX100, CIX670 or CIX1200:
1. Login to the Toshiba FYI web site.
2. Select License Codes -> Generation.
3. Enter your dealer number.
4. Under Choose Product Line select 100, 200, 670 or 1200.
5. Under Select Version choose 5.x.
6. Then select Standard Generation or Generation for Replacements (must be same processor type).
Note Please notice that the new license string will have additional characters. You must use Network eManager 5 or later to apply the license to the system.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-25
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses
Strata CIX System Licenses
These are the licenses are for the Strata CIX system. Licenses for the MAS and the ACD dongle are in following sections.
IP5022-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 4-line LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-channel on
GIPU8, MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.
IP5122-SDC-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with analog loop start line interface for connection to local Central Office and 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses
1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.
IP5122-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.
IP5131-SDL-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 9-line Backlit LCD and key labels, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint
License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/
200/670, or 1-channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.
IP5132-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 20-button IP telephone with 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.
LIC100S-8 PORTS
8-port Line/Station License CIX100S (17-24/25-32 Ports).
Required for CO Line/Station Ports 17-24 and 25-32 on a ACTU2A-S or ACTU3A-S processor.
LIC100-STRATA N
CIX/CTX100 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CTX or CIX 100 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.
LIC1200STRATA N
CIX1200 Strata Net system license.
Enables unlimited Strata Net channels on a CIX1200 system. Valid on HCTU1A processor only.
LIC-1-DP5022SDM
License to allow DP5022-SDM to operate on CIX100, CIX200, CIX670.
The DP5022-SDM operates on CIX40 without this license. This license is required for DP5022-SDM to operate on
CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200 and CIX670 systems. This license can only be applied to aforementioned systems running CIX Rls 5.1 or higher software. It must be ordered on FYI and applied to the CIX processor as any other
CIX license.
3-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses
LIC-2 GVPH
2-port GVPH License for Strata CIX40 Systems.
Enables 2 additional VM ports on a GVPH1A Voice Processing card. The CIX40 software enables 4 GVPH ports by default, the LIC-2 GVPH is used to enable 2 additional ports with each license up to 8 GVPH ports maximum. The
LIC-2 GVPH can only be applied to CIX40 processors with R5.1 software and above. This license can be used on
CIX40 R1 and R2 cabinets with R5.1 software. This license can be used on GVPH1A V1 and V2 circuit cards.
LIC-2 LVMU
2-port LVMU License for Strata CIX Systems.
Enables 2 additional VM ports on an LVMU1A card. The CIX R4.2 processor enables 2 LVMU ports by default, the
LIC-2 LVMU is used to enable 2 additional port with each license up to 8 LVMU ports maximum. The LIC-2 LVMU can be only applied to CIX processors with R4.2 software and above.
LIC200-STRATA N
CIX200 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CIX 200 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.
LIC-2P-VM-MAS-H
Two Voice Mail Port License for MicroMAS with HMP 3.0.
Increments the voice mail port allotment of a MicroMAS-H equipped with Dialogic Host Media Processing (HMP)
Version 3.0. MAS systems running HMP 1.1 must first install HMP 3.0 prior to applying this license. Failure to do so will cause a disruption in service.
LIC-4 BASIC
4-port CO Line/Station License for Strata CIX/CTX Systems.
Required for every 4 ports used for CO lines, DKT or SLT stations, Attendant Consoles, voice mail ports, Strata Net channels, and ACD announcement ports beyond the ports bundled with the system processor.
LIC-4 DTMF
4-port DTMF Receiver License for Strata CIX/CTX Systems.
Required for activation of 4 DTMF receiver ports number 5 and above on system. Maximum is determined by the
CTU card in use.
LIC-4P-VM-MAS
Four Voice Mail Port License for MAS with HMP 3.0.
Increments the voice mail port allotment of a Media Application Server equipped with Dialogic Host Media
Processing (HMP) Version 3.0. MAS systems running HMP 1.1 must first install HMP 3.0 prior to applying this license. Failure to do so will cause a disruption in service.
LIC670-STRATA N
CIX/CTX670 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CTX or CIX 670 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.
LIC-ACD
ACD Server License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
Required to activate ACD support in a Strata CIX/CTX system (one license is included in ACD turnkey packages and software packages). One license is required for each CIX system in the network ACD system. Also required for
Tracer and Talkument system if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-27
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses
LIC-ATT
Attendant Console License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
One license is required to activate each Attendant Console on a Strata CIX or CTX system. This license is also bundled with Toshiba supplied Attendant Console PCs CIX-IPATTCONS and CTX-ATTCONSOLE2 so it is NOT necessary to order the LIC-ATT for these parts. LIC-ATT should only to be ordered separately when using a Dealer or customer supplied PC for the Attendant Console. This license can be used for the Attendant Console with an IP or Digital talk path. Attendant Console Software and Documentation is available for download on TSD FYI.
LIC-CIX-FF
FeatureFlex license for Strata CIX.
Strata CIX license to activate FeatureFlex. Requires one per CIX system to run FeatureFlex applications.
LIC-CIX-IP PORT
IP Endpoint License for Strata CIX.
IP Endpoint License required per IP telephone connected to LIPU/S-X.
LIC-CIXR3.1-VCS
VCS System License for CIX R3.1.
VCS system license for CIX R3.1 system. This license can be used with CIX R4.0 but R4.0 customers are encouraged to upgrade to R4.1. This license is not needed with CIX R.4.1 or later release.
LIC-CIX-SIPT-CH
License for one SIP Trunk channel.
One required for each SIP Trunk. SIP Trunk licenses are supported by CIX40, CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200 and
CIX670 and requires CIX R5.1 MS18 or higher software. SIP Trunking is only supported by the MIPU card with version MIPU01_07 or higher. eManager R5.1 A07 or higher is required to program SIP Trunking.
LIC-CIX-STRN-CH
License for one Strata Net Channel.
One required for each Strata Net channel when the Strata Net system license (LIC100-SRTATA-N, LIC200-
SRTATA-N, LIC670-SRTATA-N) is not used. Strata Net Channel licenses are supported by CIX40, CIX100,
CIX100-S, CIX200 and CIX670 and requires CIX R4.1 software. Note: All CIX40 systems support LIC-CIX-STRN-
CH licenses but do not support Strata Net System licenses.
LIC-HMP3.0-UPG
HMP 3.0 Upgrade System License.
One time system license to upgrade any Media Application Server to HMP 3.0. This license must be purchased in order to upgrade an existing HMP 1.1 equipped system to HMP 3.0. After May 2, 2008, all installed MAS systems, that require additional voice mail or voice assistance ports, must be first upgraded to HMP 3.0 before applying additional port licenses. This applies to 1U and 2U Standard MAS systems and MicroMAS-H platforms. MicroMAS-
D platforms DO NOT require this upgrade.
LIC-SER PORT
Serial Port License required for 2nd BSIS Port on Strata CIX/CTX.
One each required to activate serial ports 2~4 in Strata CTX and CIX systems (license for serial port 1 included with BSIS).
3-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LIC-SOFTIPT
License for one SoftIPT user on Strata CIX/CTX systems.
1 required for each SoftIPT application interfaced to the Strata CTX or CIX. 1 LIPU-X or LIPS-X or BIPU-M port required for each SoftIPT. Requires IP endpoint license when connected to LIPU/S-X.
LIC-VCSBASIC5
VCS Starter - 1 Server License (No Charge), 5 User License.
This includes the VCS Server license and 5 User licenses. Add additional User licenses as needed.
LIC-VCSTRIAL
VCS 90 Day Trial License - 1 Server License, 512 User Licenses.
90 Day period starts from the day the license key is issued from FYI. You can purchase and activate permanent server and user licenses before the trial license expires.
LIC-VCSUSER1
1 VCS User License.
1 additional VCS User License beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.
LIC-VCSUSER10
10 VCS User License.
10 additional VCS User Licenses beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.
LIC-VCSUSER20
20 VCS User License.
20 additional VCS User Licenses beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-ACDBRA
MAS Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo SW.
Includes ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant and HMP license (LICMAS-ACDBR2), Taske Contact demo license (LICMAS-TASDEMO) and LIC-ACD. Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy voice mail.
LICMAS-ACDIVR
MAS OAISYS IVR Option with Database Assistant & Text Reader.
Provides IVR operation with customer's existing ODBC database. Requires custom development quote from Computer Telephony Solutions, Inc. to create the IVR application. Requires Strata ACD for MAS.
LICMAS-ACDVA2
MAS VA port license with HMP license.
1 VA port license and 1 HMP license used for announcement. Requires MAS based ACD system.
LICMAS-APPLSWB
MAS ACD Application SW Pack.
Strata ACD application SW package includes LICMAS-APPLSW2 (Basic 10 agent,1 VA port/HMP, 10 NetPhone) and CIX license (LIC-ACD). Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy Voice Mail system.
LICMAS-BAADDL1
MAS Single basic agent license. One additional basic agent license
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-29
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-CALLRUTR
MAS Call Router License for Strata ACD. Provides advanced call routing capabilities for ACD or CTI applications.
Requires Strata ACD for MAS.
LICMAS-CHATSEAT
MAS Chat Text Messaging License.
Provides Text Messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD for MAS. One license is required for each user.
LICMAS-D-2P-UPG
MicroMAS-D 2 port upgrade. Upgrades a MicroMAS-D by 2 voice mail ports. Dialogic boards sold separately.
LICMAS-DACDBRA
MAS ACD Demo SW - Branches for Micro MAS-D.
Includes ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant (LICMAS-ACDBR1), Taske Contact Demo (LICMAS-TAS-
DEMO) and LIC-ACD. Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy voice mail and available ports on Dialogic
D4PCI card.
LICMAS-DACDVA
MAS VA port for Micro MAS-D.
One Voice Assistant license for MicroMAS-D system required per announcement port. Requires Strata ACD application package (Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net Server).
LICMAS-DAPPLSWB
MAS ACD Application SW Pack for Micro MAS-D.
Strata ACD application SW package includes LICMAS-DAPPLSW1 (Basic 10 agent,1 VA port, 10 NetPhone) and
CIX license (LIC-ACD). Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy Voice Mail system and available D4 PCI card.
LICMAS-ENADDL1
MAS Single enhanced agent license. One additional enhanced agent license
LICMAS-FF-ACLK
FeatureFlex application license for FF Alarm Clock.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Alarm Clock application to provide the alarm clock function on the DKT and
IPT phone. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FF-APBD1
FeatureFlex application license for FF Application Bundle #1.
FeatureFlex application license bundle that includes FF Call Monitor, FF Call Return, FF Alarm Clock, FF One
Number Access, and FF Call Screen. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FF-CMON
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Monitor.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Monitor application which enables the user to listen to the voice message being recorded by the caller. Requires one per system. Requires MAS or MicroMAS-H.
LICMAS-FF-CRET
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Return.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Return application which enables the user to respond to the caller while listening to the message and return to the voice mail. Requires one per system.
3-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-FF-CSCR
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Screen.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Screen application where the call is screened selectively by the caller
ID. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FF-HDSK
FeatureFlex application license for FF HotDesk.
Application license to run FeatureFlex HotDesk application where the shared office user can use any phone for the user's published directory number. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FF-ONUM
FeatureFlex application license for FF One Number Access.
Application license to run FeatureFlex One Number Access application where the system contacts multiple destinations sequentially to reach the party. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FFOPEN
FeatureFlex open license.
FeatureFlex runtime license to run 3rd party or plain script FeatureFlex applications. Not required for Toshiba FeatureFlex applications. Requires one per system.
LICMAS-FF-PCH
FeatureFlex application license for FF Personal Call Handler.
Promotion price is valid through December 31, 2008.
LICMAS-FF-SRNG
FeatureFlex application license for FF Simultaneous Ring.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Simultaneous application where the incoming call rings both the desk phone and one more phone such as cell phone, specified by the user. Requires MAS or MicroMAS-H.
LICMAS-FF-SUPD
FeatureFlex application license for FF Security Code Update.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Security Code Update application that prompts user for the new security code periodically to provide the better security.
LICMAS-FG-FAX
MAS Fax Feature Group License.
Enables the fax feature on all MAS systems. Actual number of available fax ports predicated by what the installed fax hardware (e.g. fax modem boards or D/4PCIU-F) supports.
LICMAS-INSAP10
MAS Insight for application pack.
Insight-CIX for 10 agent. Includes one supervisor license. An agent can be added by INSIGHT-APBAG1. Can be upgraded to INSIGHT Plus by appropriate quantity of LICMAS-INSPUP1.
LICMAS-INSBAG1
MAS additional basic agent for Insight application pack.
One Insight basic agent license to be included in the realtime display and reporting for MAS Insight for application pack.
LICMAS-INSIGHT
MAS Insight license.
Includes the license to activate Insight for MAS. Requires Strata ACD for MAS.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-31
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-INSITSUB
MAS additional Supervisor license for Insight Plus.
Includes the license to activate additional one Supervisor for Insight for MAS. Requires Insight Plus for MAS.
LICMAS-INSITUPG
MAS Insight upgrade to Plus for Strata ACD.
Includes the license to upgrade to Insight Plus. Requires Insight for MAS.
LICMAS-INSPAG1
MAS additional Plus agent for Insight Application pack.
One agent license to be included in the realtime display and reporting for MAS Insight Plus for application pack.
LICMAS-INSPUP1
MAS agent upgrade to Insight Plus.
Upgrades a basic Insight agent to MAS Insight Plus agent. All basic agents need to be upgraded to Insight Plus.
LICMAS-INVIEW1
MAS inView client license for one user.
Includes the license to activate one concurrent inView client.
LICMAS-INVIEW10
MAS inView client license for ten users.
Includes the license to activate ten concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-INVIEW20
MAS inView client license for twenty users.
Includes the license to activate twenty concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-INVIEW30
MAS inView client license for thirty users.
Includes the license to activate thirty concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-INVIEW40
MAS inView client license for forty users.
Includes the license to activate forty concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-INVIEW5
MAS inView client license for five users.
Includes the license to activate five concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-INVIEW50
MAS inView client license for fifty users.
Includes the license to activate fifty concurrent inView clients.
LICMAS-NETPHACD
MAS ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and no VA port. This is only applicable an add-on to a Net Phone system (LICMAS-NETPHSW). Add necessary number of VA port separately (LICMAS-ACDVA2/LICMAS-
DACDVA).
3-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-NETPHSWB
MAS Net Phone server and 10 client license.
Includes the CIX license (LIC-ACD) and Net Server and 10 client license (LICMAS-NETPHSW). Requires the
MAS. MicroMAS-H or MicroMAS-D.
LICMAS-NETPH-VO
MAS voice plug-in for NetPhone.
Voice plug-in license to support VoIP for NetPhone for MAS. Requires the NetPhone license (LICMAS-NETSEAT) as well as IP end point license (LIC-CIX-IP-PORT).
LICMAS-NETSEAT
MAS NetPhone and chat license.
Provides desktop call control, PC phone functionality, and Chat text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD for MAS. One license is required for each user.
LICMAS-NETST10
MAS Net Phone 10 client license pack.
Includes Net Phone 10 client license. Requires the MAS Strata ACD system or Net Phone system.
LICMASSFGTTSETI
Text-To-Speech Feature Group for MAS.
This Feature Group for the Media Application Server uses ETI Eloquence TTS to provide 2 channels of Text To
Speech for reading email messages. REQUIRES Release 4 Stratagy ES/iES32 system software and the Unified
Messaging (UM) Feature Group to be installed. Max. 8 Channels.
LICMAS-SUP-OAI
MAS Maintenance support.
Covers annual ongoing support for Call Router, Net Phone, and Chat per MAS after the warranty period. This includes all software upgrades and technical support during the covered period. Specify number of years. Please contact Customer Service to place an order.
LICMAS-TASAGENT
MAS TASKE Contact Agent. License to add an agent in TASKE reporting for MAS.
LICMAS-TASAGNTP
TASKE Contact agent for promo bundle.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting. Available only when ordered with the Taske promo bundle (LICMAS-
TASPROMO). Valid through March 31, 2009.
LICMAS-TASBASEP
MAS TASKE Contact system.
TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor, 1 DisplayCentral, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support. Valid through March 31, 2009.
LICMAS-TASCONA
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Per Agent.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for TASKE for MAS. Required LICMAS-TASCONB.
The quantity must match with the number of licensed agents. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR).
Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-33
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-TASCONB
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Base Renewal.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for smaller sites (guideline: less than 150 agents) for
TASKE for MAS. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance
Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
LICMAS-TASCONR
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Re-enlist Site.
Order 1 if the maintenance for the license on your site has been expired for at least 3 months for TASKE for MAS.
Must be activated with LICMAS-TASCONA/TASCONB. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE
Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
LICMAS-TASCONS
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Per Site.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades. Recommended for larger TASKE Site (guideline: more than 150 agents) in lieu of the Base plus agent model for TASKE for MAS. If the system is out of maintenance more that 3 months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative
(CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
LICMAS-TASDC1
MAS Taske Display Central.
Single Display Central license for Taske Contact for MAS to show realtime statistics and/or external data on the computer screen such as large LCD/plasm display. May be used as the replacement of wall mount display.
LICMAS-TASDESUP
MAS Taske Desktop Advance upgrade per Taske Desktop.
Taske Desktop upgrade to Advance for screen pop and other automated tasks. Quantity must be same as the number of Taske Desktop license.
LICMAS-TASECLI
MAS Taske Essential Supervisor client.
Taske Essential supervisor client license for realtime status display and reporting
LICMAS-TASEEXTN
MAS Taske Essential Extension. Adds 50 extension to Taske Essential
LICMAS-TASENTER
MAS TASKE Enterprise Client Software for MAS.
Allows the supervisor to manage multiple contact centers simultaneously. Requires TASKE Contact for MAS at each site and a TCP/IP network connection.
LICMAS-TASESSB
MAS Taske Essential Base.
Taske Essential Base license to support up to 50 extensions with 1 supervisor client license. Requires ACD or Net
Phone system.
3-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-TASESUP
MAS Taske Essential annual maintenance.
Taske Essential annual maintenance service allows the software upgrade and the technical support after the initial year
LICMAS-TASLBWF
MAS TASKE Contact Left Bank integration.
Provides an interface between TASKE Contact and Left Bank Solutions Monet for MAS. Used to transfer historical data for forecasting and scheduling and real-time data for agent adherence.
LICMAS-TASLICUP
MAS license for the latest release of Taske Contact or Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must be under the valid maintenance.
LICMAS-TASMTP
MAS Taske Reporter promo.
Taske Reporter, web based reporting promo license includes 20 agents and 1 supervisor. Requires Strata MAS
ACD or Voice mail system. Valid through October 30, 2008.
LICMAS-TASMTSUP
MAS myTaskeReporter additional supervisor.
Additional supervisor client license for myTaskeReporter for MAS.
LICMAS-TASMTUPP
MAS Taske Reporter promo upgrade to Contact.
Taske Reporter promo (LICMAS-TASMTP) upgrade to Taske Contact Promo package. Valid through October 30,
2008.
LICMAS-TASNETP
MAS Taske Contact Net Phone/Tracer integration.
Adds Net Phone/Oaisys Tracer integration capability to Taske Contact so that Taske web client can show the ACD silent monitor status and control the playback of OAISYS Tracer.
LICMAS-TASPROMO
TASKE Contact promotion for MAS.
Promo package includes LICMAS-TASBASEP (TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor, 1 Display Central, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support). Additional agents at the discounted price
(LICMAS-TASAGNTP) may be purchased when it is ordered with this promotion part number. Valid through March
31, 2009.
LICMAS-TASSIGN
MAS TASKE Contact Desktop.
Concurrent user license for an agent to view customizable real-time contact center information on the agents desktop for TASKE for MAS.
LICMAS-TASSITE
MAS Taske Contact Site license.
TASKE Contact with 360 agents. Also includes 2 supervisor user license, 1 DisplayCentral user license, 5 Desktop user license and 12 Months Total Care maintenance. Software only. Requires a dedicated computer.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-35
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses
LICMAS-TASSUP1
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 1 license for MAS.
Concurrent user license for monitoring, reporting, database searches, database administration, and forecasting for
TASKE for MAS.
LICMAS-TASSUP10
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 10 license for MAS.
Supervisor client license package including 10 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.
LICMAS-TASSUP3
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 3 license.
Supervisor client license package including 3 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.
LICMAS-TASSUP5
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 5 license.
Supervisor client license package including 5 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.
LICMAS-TASSUPMT
MAS myTaskeReporter Total Care support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrade for myTaskeReporter after the initial first year warranty.
LICMASUM10SEATS
10 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messaging Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM10SEATS, total UM seats would be 15 (5 + 10).
LICMAS-UM-1SEAT
Single Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messaging Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMAS-UM-1SEAT, total UM seats would be 6 (5 + 1).
LICMASUM25SEATS
25 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messaging Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM25SEATS, total UM seats would be 30 (5 + 25).
LICMASUM50SEATS
50 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messaging Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM50SEATS, total UM seats would be 55 (5 + 50).
LICMASUMUNLIMT
Unlimited Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group.
3-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
LICMAS-UPGREN1
MAS upgrade single basic agent to enhanced agent.
Upgrade one basic agent to one enhanced agent. Quantity must match with the number of existing basic agents as all basic agents must be upgraded to enhanced agents.
LICMASUPTTSETI
2 Channel upgrade for Text To Speech for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires prior installation of LICMASF-
GTTSETI. Maximum 8 Channels.
MAS-ACDBR-DPKG
ACD Demo System for Micro MAS-D.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD system with Micro MAS platform, ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant (LICMAS-
DACDBR1). Taske Contact demo (LICMAS-TASDEMO) with a Dialogic card (SYS-D4PCIUF), and CIX license
(LIC-ACD).
MAS-ACDBR-PKG
Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo System.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD system with Media Application Server platform and ACD software with 2-port Voice
Assistant and HMP license (LICMAS-ACDBR2), Taske Contact demo license (LICMAS-TASDEMO) and ACD license for CIX (LIC-ACD).
ACD Dongle
CTI-TASKE-LICUP
License for the latest release of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must be under the valid maintenance.
ACD-APP-BRA
Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo System - Branches.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD sys w/ PC hardware and ACD software and license w/ 2-port VA (ACD-APP-BR1).
ACD-APPL-SWB
ACD Application SW Pack.
Strata ACD application SW package includes ACD dongle (ACD-STARTER-TOS), ACD-APPL-SW1(Basic 10 agent/1 VA port, 10 NetPhone) and LIC-ACD (CIX license). Requires customer supplied hardware.
ACD-BASC-ADDL1
Single basic agent license.
One additional basic agent license
ACD-CALL RUTR
OAISYS Call Router License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides advanced call routing capabilities for ACD or CTI applications. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS
Net Server. One Call Router license required per system.
ACD-CHAT SEAT
OAISYS Chat Text Messaging License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net Server. One Chat license required for each user.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-37
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
ACD-CT4-SVR
Strata ACD 4-slot (PCI) system.
Tower system equipped with 4 PCI slots, 512MB RAM, 10/100baseT NIC, keyboard and mouse, Windows 2000
Server. Requires ACD software package (ACD-APPL-SWA) and add optional voice boards as desired for ACD or
IVR voice assistant announcement ports. See Sales Bulletin and System 2 Installation Guide for details
ACD-CT8-SVR
Strata ACD 8-slot (PCI) system.
Rackmount system equipped with 8 full size PCI slots, Intel Pentium 4 2.0GHz CPU, 512MB RAM, 10/100 Base-T
Ethernet connection, keyboard and mouse, Windows 2000 Server. Requires ACD software package (ACD-APPL-
SWA) and add necessary number of voice cards for VA announcement or IVR operation.
ACD-D120JCT
12-port PCI analog voice card.
Dialogic 12 port PCI analog voice card to be used for VA port that requires VA port license. Requires full length PCI slot and is not compatible with PCI-X.
ACD-ENHD-ADDL1
Single enhanced agent license.
One additional enhanced agent license
ACD-IVR
OAISYS IVR Option with Database Assistant & Text Reader.
Provides IVR operation with customer's existing ODBC database. Requires custom development quote from
Computer Telephony Solutions, Inc. to create the IVR application. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net
Server.
ACD-NET PH SEAT
OAISYS Net Phone & Chat License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides desktop call control, PC phone functionality, and Chat text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD
Server or Net Server. One Net Phone/Chat license required for each user.
ACD-NETPH-VO
Voice plug-in for NetPhone.
Voice plug-in license to support VoIP for NetPhone. Requires the NetPhone license (ACD-NET PH SEAT) as well as IP end point license (LIC-CIX-IP-PORT).
ACD-STARTER-TOS
Toshiba USB dongle starter kit.
Spare part use only. This kit is usually included in any of ACD/Net Phone bundle part number. ACD starter kit includes Toshiba USB dongle, CD, and the document.
ACD-UPGR-ENHD1
Upgrade single basic agent to enhanced agent.
Upgrade one basic agent to one enhanced agent. Quantity must match with the number of existing basic agents as all basic agents must be upgraded to enhanced agents.
ACD-VA-PER PORT
Strata CIX/CTX ACD/IVR Voice Assistant Announcement License.
Requires Strata ACD Server or Net Server. One Voice Assistant license required per announcement port.
3-38
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CIX-AG-ACDSYSVC
CIX ACD System Administrator Guide.
Provides the programming information on the Strata ACD system.
CTI-NETPH-ACD
ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and 1 VA port. This is only applicable as an add-on to a Net
Phone system (CTI-NETPH-SWB).
LIC-ACD
ACD Server License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
Required to activate ACD support in a Strata CIX/CTX system (one license is included in ACD turnkey packages and software packages). One license is required for each CIX system in the network ACD system. Also required for
Tracer and Talkument system if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
CTI-NETPH-ACD
ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and 1 VA port. This is only applicable as an add-on to a Net
Phone system (CTI-NETPH-SWB).
CTI-NETPH-ST10
Net Phone 10 client license pack.
Includes Net Phone 10 client license. Requires the Strata ACD system or Net Phone system.
CTI-NETPH-SWB
Net Phone server and 10 client license.
Includes the CIX license (LIC-ACD), Toshiba dongle (ACD-STARTER-TOS) and Net Server and 10 client license
(CTI-NETPH-SW). Requires the customer provided PC to run the server software.
CTI-SUPP-OAI
Maintenance support.
Covers annual ongoing support for Call Router, Net Phone, and Chat per system (server) after the warranty period.
This includes all software upgrades and technical support during the covered period. Specify number of years.
CTI-TAS-ESSBASE
Taske Essential Base system.
Taske Essential Base license to support up to 50 extensions with 1 supervisor client license. Requires ACD or Net
Phone system.
CTI-TAS-ESSCLI
Taske Essential Supervisor client.
Taske Essential supervisor client license for realtime status display and reporting
CTI-TAS-ESSEXTN
Taske Essential Extension.
Adds 50 extension to Taske Essential
CTI-TAS-ESSSUP
Taske Essential annual maintenance.
Taske Essential annual maintenance service allows the software upgrade and the technical support after the initial year
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-39
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TAS-MTUPP
Taske Reporter promo upgrade to Contact.
Taske Reporter promo (CTI-TASKE-MTP) upgrade to Taske Contact Promo package. Valid through October 30,
2008.
CTI-TASKE-AGENT
TASKE Contact agent license.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting.
CTI-TASKE-AGNTP
TASKE Contact agent for promo bundle.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting. Available only when ordered with the Taske promo bundle (CTI-
TASKE-PROMO). Valid through March 31, 2009.
CTI-TASKE-BASEP
TASKE Contact system.
TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor, 1 DisplayCentral, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support. Valid through March 31, 2009.
CTI-TASKE-CONV
TASKE Contact conversion from other PBX.
Used to convert an existing site from one PBX to another. The result will be the equivalent number of licensed seats, Agent Desktops, and Supervisors, an Enterprise Supervisor as the original site.
CTI-TASKE-DC1
Taske Display Central.
Single Display Central license for Taske Contact to show realtime statistics and/or external data on the computer screen such as large LCD/plasm display. May be used as the replacement of wall mount display.
CTI-TASKE-DESUP
Taske Desktop Advance upgrade per Taske Desktop.
Taske Desktop upgrade to Advance for screen pop and other automated tasks. Quantity must be same as the number of Taske Desktop license.
CTI-TASKE-ENTER
TASKE Enterprise software license.
Allows the supervisor to manage multiple contact centers simultaneously. Requires TASKE Contact at each site and a TCP/IP network connection.
CTI-TASKE-LBWF
TASKE Contact Left Bank integration.
Provides an interface between TASKE Contact and Left Bank Solutions Monet. Used to transfer historical data for forecasting and scheduling and real-time data for agent adherence.
CTI-TASKE-LICUP
License for the latest release of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must be under the valid maintenance.
CTI-TASKE-MTP
Taske Reporter promo.
3-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
Taske Reporter, web based reporting promo license includes 20 agents and 1 supervisor. Requires PC based
Strata ACD system. Valid through October 30, 2008.
CTI-TASKE-MTSUP
myTaskeReporter additional supervisor.
Supervisor client license for myTaskeReporter.
CTI-TASKE-MTUPG
myTaskeReporter upgrade to Taske Contact.
Upgrade from myTaskeReporter (CTI-TASKE-MT) to Taske Contact Base (10 agents, 1 supervisor). Additional agents and supervisors will require the separate license. Cannot upgrade myTaske Reporter included in the application package.
CTI-TASKE-NETP
Taske Contact Net Phone/Tracer integration.
Adds Net Phone/Oaisys Tracer integration capability to Taske Contact so that Taske web client can show the ACD silent monitor status and control the playback of OAISYS Tracer.
CTI-TASKE-PROMO
TASKE Contact promotion.
Promo package includes CTI-TASKE-BASEP (TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor,
1 Display Central, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support). Additional agents at the discounted price
(CTI-TASKE-AGNTP) may be purchased when it is ordered with this promotion part number. Valid through March
31, 2009.
CTI-TASKE-SIGN
TASKE Contact Desktop license.
Concurrent user license for an agent to view real-time contact center traffic conditions on the agents computer desktop. It can be customized for each agent and configured to display Queue status information, performance parameters and other key measures. Thresholds can be applied to each parameter alerting agents to make informed decisions and meet service level targets.
CTI-TASKE-SITE
Taske Contact Site license.
TASKE Contact with 360 agents. Also includes 2 supervisor user license, 1 DisplayCentral user license, 5 Desktop user license and 12 Months Total Care maintenance. Software only. Requires a dedicated computer.
CTI-TASKE-SUP1
TASKE Supervisor client license.
Concurrent user license for monitoring, reporting, database searches, database administration, and forecasting.
CTI-TASKE-SUP10
TASKE 10 Supervisor client license.
Supervisor client license package including 10 supervisors.
CTI-TASKE-SUP3
TASKE 3 Supervisor client license pack.
Supervisor client license package including 3 supervisors.
CTI-TASKE-SUP5
TASKE 5 Supervisor client license pack.
Supervisor client license package including 5 supervisors.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-41
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TASSUP-CONA
TASKE Contact Agent support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades per agent. Requires CTI-TASSUP-CONB. The quantity must match with the number of licensed agents. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, CTI-TASSUP-CONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR).
Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
CTI-TASSUP-CONB
TASKE Contact Base support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for smaller sites (guideline: less than 150 agents). If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, CTI-TASSUP-CONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools >
Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
CTI-TASSUP-CONR
TASKE Contact re-enlist site support.
Order 1 if the maintenance for the license on your site has been expired for at least 3 months. Must be activated with CTI-TASSUP-CONA/CONB. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.
CTI-TASSUP-CONS
TASKE Contact Site support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades. Recommended for larger TASKE Site (guideline: more than 150 agents) in lieu of the Base plus agent model. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the
TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a
CSR.
CTI-TASSUP-MT
myTaskeReporter Total Care support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrade for myTaskeReporter after the initial first year warranty.
CTI-TMENT-2003
OAISYS Talkument Win2003 server upgrade.
Upgrade OAISYS Talkument system from Windows XP to Windows 2003 server. Must be purchased with the new system or the refresh program. Cannot upgrade the systems in the field. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TMENT-DEMO
OAISYS Talkument Dealer Demo System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System for dealer demo purpose only and not for resale. Includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 2T1/PRI interfaces or 48 IP end points with unlimited users. Monitor sold separately. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
3-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TMENT-SOA
OAISYS Talkument Small Office Analog System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 8 analog CO interfaces or 20 IP end points with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TMENT-SOF
OAISYS Talkument Small Office System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 20 IP end points with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones.
Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TMENT-SUPG
OAISYS Talkument Small Office Upgrade.
Upgrade for OAISYS Talkument Small Office System to increase from 20 IP end points to 48 IP end points.
Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TMENT-SYS
OAISYS Talkument system.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 2T1/PRI interfaces or 48 IP end points with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-16P
Tracer 16 port voice board. 16 port analog voice board.
CTI-TRACER-16S
Tracer 16 port station board. 16 port digital station board
CTI-TRACER-24A
Tracer 24 port voice board. 24 port analog voice board.
CTI-TRACER-24P
Tracer single T1/PRI voice board. Single T1 or PRI voice board.
CTI-TRACER-24S
Tracer 24 port station board. 24 port digital station board
CTI-TRACER-48P
Tracer dual T1/PRI voice board. Dual T1 or PRI voice board.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-43
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TRACER-4P
Tracer 4 port voice board. 4 port analog voice board.
CTI-TRACER-8P
Tracer 8 port voice board. 8 port analog voice board.
CTI-TRACER-8S
Tracer 8 port station board. 8 port digital station board
CTI-TRACER-8SD
Tracer 8 port add-on board.
8 port add-on digital station card to 8 port station card (CTI-TRACER-8S).
CTI-TRACER-AD
Tracer advanced base package.
Free upgrade is available. Please order CTI-TRACER-ST before December 31, 2008, and it is automatically upgraded to CTI-TRACER-AD.
Tracer Advanced Base Package (max. 96 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
- Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4PCI
- Windows XP Pro
- 160GB/250GB HD, up to 30,000 hours
- DVD+RW for archive storage
- 2 Call Manager client license
CTI-TRACER-ADP
Tracer advanced plus package w/dual power supply.
Advanced Plus Package w/dual PS (max. 192 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4 PCI
-Win 2003/SQL Server w/5 licenses
-160GB/320GB HD, up to 52,000 hours
-DVD+RW
-5 Replay Clients
-3 Call Manager client license
CTI-TRACER-ADPR
Tracer advanced plus pkg w/RAID1/dual power supply.
Advanced Plus Package w/dual PS/RAID1 (max. 192 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4 PCI
-Win 2003/SQL Server w/5 licenses
-160GB/320GB HD, up to 52,000 hours
-DVD+RW
-3 Call Manager client license
3-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TRACER-ADR
Tracer advanced base package w/RAID1.
Free upgrade is available. Please order CTI-TRACER-STR before December 31, 2008, and it is automatically upgraded to CTI-TRACER-ADR.
Tracer Advanced Base Package (max. 96 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
- Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4PCI
- Windows XP Pro
- 160GB/250GB HD, up to 30,000 hours
- DVD+RW for archive storage
- 2 Call Manager client license
CTI-TRACER-CCM
Adds Tracer call center management.
Adds Tracer call center management software to an OAISYS recording appliance (Talkument). The PC platform and voice cards can be retained. Comes with the matching quantity of Tracer voice port license.
CTI-TRACER-CLI
Tracer Management Client License.
One concurrent additional Tracer Management Client License to provide the user with the live recording monitor capability and management tools for the reporting and evaluation of the system. Requires Tracer 5 or later.(The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-DEA
Tracer advanced dealer demo system - No card.
Tracer Advanced Dealer Demo system up to 30,000 hours of storage. Voice cards needs to be purchased.
Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
CTI-TRACER-DES
Tracer standard dealer demo system - No card.
Tracer Standard Dealer Demo system up to 14,000 hours of storage. Voice cards needs to be purchased. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
CTI-TRACER-INT
Tracer 3rd part application integration option.
Provides the interface to the 3rd party application to integrate Tracer for Recording/Playback control from the applications such as Predictive Dialer and/or CRM application. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-OUT
Tracer/Talkument Diamond support.
OAISYS Tracer/Talkument Diamond out-of-plan upgrade makes out-of-warranty system eligible for Diamond support plan. Quantity needs to match with the number of quarters without maintenance, not exceeding 8 quarters.
Per system (server). (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-RAD
Tracer Advanced server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-45
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TRACER-RADP
Tracer Advanced Plus server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced Plus system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-RADR
Tracer Advanced with Raid server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced w/Raid system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-RAPR
Tracer Advanced Plus w/Raid server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced Plus w/Raid system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-RPT
Tracer reporting option (StreetView).
Optional software license to provide the reporting capability. Requires any model of Tracer system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-RSTD
Tracer Standard server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Standard system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-ST
Tracer standard package.
Free upgrade is available. When CTI-TRACER-ST is ordered before December 31, 2008, it is automatically upgraded to CTI-TRACER-AD.
Tracer Standard Base Package (max. 48 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Tower, Celeron, 512MB, 4 PCI
-Windows XP Pro
-160 GBHDD, up to 14,000 hours
-DVD+RW for archive storage
-1 Call Manager client license
3-46
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TRACER-STR
Tracer standard package w/RAID1.
Free upgrade is available. When CTI-TRACER-STR is ordered before December 31, 2008, it is automatically upgraded to CTI-TRACER-ADR.
Tracer Standard Base Package (max. 48 ports) w/RAID1. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Tower, Celeron, 512MB, 4 PCI -Windows XP Pro -120 GBHDD, up to 14,000 hours -DVD+RW for archive storage
-10 Replay Clients (Recommend 5 max)
CTI-TRACER-SUPP
Tracer/Talkument Diamond support.
Tracer/Talkument Diamond Support for annual maintenance for Tracer Software only. This includes the technical support and free upgrades during the covered period after the initial warranty.
HW maintenance is sold separately. Please contact OAISYS. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-VOIP
Tracer VoIP recording engine.
VoIP recording module to record the conversation at VoIP stations. Supports up to 48 ports. Requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks.
CTI-TRACER-VP
Tracer voice port license.
Single voice port license for monitoring. Required for each voice port of trunk, station, or VoIP recording engine.
(The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-W16P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 16 port voice board.
Extend the 16 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).
CTI-TRACER-W16S
Extended 3 year warranty for 16 port station board.
Extend the 16 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W24A
Extended 3 year warranty for 24 port analog voice board.
Extend the 24 port analog voice board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W24P
Extended to 3 year warranty for T1 voice board.
Extend the T1 voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W24S
Extended 3 year warranty for 24 port station board.
Extend the 24 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-47
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-TRACER-W48P
Extended to 3 year warranty for dual T1 voice board.
Extend the dual T1 voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W4P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 4 port voice board.
Extend the 4 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W8P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 8 port voice board.
Extend the 8 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W8S
Extended 3 year warranty for 8 port station board.
Extend the 8 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-W8SD
Extended 3 year warranty for 8 port add on board.
Extend the 8 port add on station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-WADV
Extended to 3 year warranty for Advanced system.
Extend the Tracer hardware (PC) of Advanced system to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-TRACER-WBAS
Extended to 3 year warranty for Standard Base system.
Extend the Tracer hardware (PC) of Standard system warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.
CTI-UNIFIER10
Strata Unifier 10 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 10 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must have a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required.
Requires Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.
CTI-UNIFIER3
Strata Unifier 3 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 3 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must have a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required. Requires
Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.
3-48
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle
CTI-UNIFIER5
Strata Unifier 5 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 5 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must have a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required. Requires
Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.
Table 2: Type and Number of Licenses Required by Feature
Feature
IP ACD (MAS) Announcement ports
IP Attendant Console
IP Voice Mail (MAS)
Strata Net IP
IPT2008-SDL
IPT2010-
SD/2020-SD S
IP5000-Series
SIP Phone
SoftIPT
ACD Announcement ports
Attendant Console
DKT/SLT Interface ports
Trunk Interface Port
Voice Mail ports
* One license per system
IP Interface
Card
Basic Port
License
1
Strata
Net
License
2
SoftIPT
License
3
IP Port
License
4
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Each
Trunk
1*
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Each
Station
5
Each
Station
5
Each
Station
5
Each
Station
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Each
Active
Station
Each
Station
5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Each Port
Each
Console
Each Port
Each Port
Each Port
1. LIC-4 BASIC
2. LIC100 STRATA N
LIC200 STRATA N
LIC670 STRATA N
LIC1200 STRATA N
3. LIC-SOFTIPT
4. LIC-CIX-IP PORT
5. R5 and later software - one license per active station; R4 and earlier software - one license per station
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-49
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen
License Display Screen
In the example screen below, the “Number of Basic Ports” installed on the processor is 112 but only 20 ports are programmed (used). The “used” ports could be a mix of PDN ports, CO line ports, etc. This lets the installer know how much system capacity is available for future growth without installing more licenses. To view this page in Network eManager go to: Maintenance > Licensing > License Information.
License Control
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for Strata Network eManager users.
This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1.
From the Network eManager menu, click Maintenance > Licensing > License Control.
2.
Issue a License by cutting and pasting or manually entering the 60-character string in the License Code text box.
Note If you are not adding the License Code to Network eManager immediately, copy and save the code onto a disk. Save code in Notepad using Fixedsys font.
3.
Click one of the following buttons:
• Issue – to issue the License Code.
•
Cancel Issue – to cancel the License Code issue.
4.
Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.
5.
Click one of the following buttons:
•
Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.
Note Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.
3-50
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen
License Issue
This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for Strata Network eManager users.
Field
Status
License Code
Description
Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing Status.
Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate
Cut and paste the License code text string or manually enter the License Code (six characters per box).
60 characters.
The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website (http:// fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from Toshiba’s FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC Address and the number of ports. The License Code generated for a particular MAC Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.
License Activate (Prerequisite Program - License Issue)
.
This program enables activation of Strata Network eManager licenses issued in Program 913, License Issue.
Field Description
Delay Timer
Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.
0~24 (default = 0)
Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.
After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check that all ports and features have been activated properly.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
3-51
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen
License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for Network eManager users.
1.
From the Network eManager menu, click Maintenance > Licensing > License Information.
2.
View Licensing details for this Strata CIX account.
This view is read-only information.
CIX Release Number
System Type
Field
Maximum Number of
Cabinets
Number of Serial Ports
Number of DTMF Receivers
Number of Basic Ports
Strata Net Channels
Number of CTI Sessions
Number of Attendant
Consoles
Number of Softphones
CIX IP Telephony
Number of IP Endpoints
Description
Basic Release Number of CIX software. To view the Active Software
Version, go to Operations/System Setup.
Identifies the type of CIX system the Network eManager is currently connected to.
Identifies the maximum number of cabinets. The total of base plus expansion cabinets.
Number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.
One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to
BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).
The number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS Subassembly is required on the CIX100 processor, no additional hardware is required for
CIX670 or CIX1200.
The number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels licensed, and the number of licenses in use (or programmed).
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or door phone is assigned to the circuit.
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is assigned to the circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI assignments.
The number of Strata Net channels licensed, and the number of licenses in use (or programmed). This license must be enabled on each CIX in a
Strata Net network.
The number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console, the ACD or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one CTI session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).
The number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license is required for each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also required for each
Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).
The number of Soft IP Phones licenses. Each phone requires one license.
Shows CIX IP Telephony is Enabled or Disabled.
The number of IP Endpoints licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use (or programmed).
3-52
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
4
This chapter provides Strata CIX system programming information for programmers using the Strata
Network eManager programming interface.
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
All PCBs, except the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots using this command. The CIX has a dedicated slot in the Base cabinet for the system processors so they do not require this assignment.
• The CIX100 provides one Base (4) and one Expansion (Exp) cabinet (4) for a total of eight slots.
• The CIX200 Base cabinet has three slots (S101~S103) and the Exp cabinet has four slots
(S201~S204) for a total of seven slots.
• The CIX670 system provides one Base cabinet and up to six Exp cabinets. The Base cabinet has eight slots and each of the six Exp cabinets have 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
• The CIX1200 system can be configured with up to 12 cabinets - one Base cabinet and up to 11
Expansion cabinets for a total of 118 slots.
1. In Network eManager, click System > Card Assignment. The Card Slot Assignment screen displays.
2. Cabinet (01~012) – Select the two-digit cabinet number to be assigned. The cabinet and slot number appear in the cab/slot field.
Select 01 for CIX40.
Select 01 for Base and Exp. cabinet (CIX100).
Select 01 or 02 for CIX200.
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively, for each Exp. cabinet (CIX670).
Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively, for each Exp. cabinet (CIX1200).
3. Slot (01~10) – Select the two-digit card slot number to be assigned.
Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp. slots (CIX100).
Select 01~04 for CIX200 Base and Exp. slots. Slot 04 in the Base Cabinet is the LSLU card slot.
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp. slots (CIX670).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp. slots (CIX1200).
Note The CIX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is installed as default in a virtual equip position: Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2, then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
4. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. The selected PCB type will appear in the PCB Type field.
5. Click Submit to save your data.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-1
System
Dial Number Plan
Dial Number Plan
Prerequisite Program: None
The Dial Number Plan lets you download all current dialing numbers registered in the CIX database.
The Numbering Plan screen gives you details on the different categories of Numbers. The table below contains the information shown on the screen.
Number Type
Digit Groups
DKT Prime DNs
SLT Prime DNs
ISDN DNs
Phantom DNs
IPT_B Prime DNs
IPT_L Prime DNs
SIP Prime DNs
ACD Pilot
Hunt Group Pilot
Access Codes
Description
Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program
200.
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program
200.
Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.
Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-
Modules and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200
Lists all IPT Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200
Lists all SIP Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200
Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.
Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.
Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.
Click Continue to view the next screen. You will be able to view all the DNs, IP DNs and other numbers used.
4-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
102 Flexible Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CIX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features.
This enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CIX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., “Store Code,” see Table 4-1
) to a Flexible Numbering Code assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.
1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the “Programmed Value” column of
.
2. In Network eManager, click System > Flexible Access Code. The Flexible Access Codes screen displays.
3. 00 Access Code – Enter the digits to be dialed (0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an OLG. To delete, select “No Data” in 01 Feature Name. Conflict with an assigned DN will produce an error.
being assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select “Line access code - leading digit(s) to access individual lines.” Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number – Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being assigned. This field is only required if you chose “Line Group Access Code – one access code for each
OLG in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number:
• 0~32 CIX100 and CIX200
• 0~128 CIX670
• 0~220 CIX1200
• Field appears only when 01 Feature Name - Line Group access code – one access code for each OLG, is selected.
6. Click Submit.
To delete an access code assignment
1. Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.
This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-3
System
Dial Number Plan
Creating New Feature Codes
1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click OK. When complete, your screen will change to a gray (edit mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes
• To range program feature/access codes use a “-” between a range of values and a “,” for an additional entry not in a range.
•
System Date and Time Access Codes – The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is different for every system. The defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.
Important!
If you backup a CIX database (default.dat) with software that does not support Time/Date access codes and then restore it to a CIX software version that supports these access codes, you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to allow end users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.
Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
Flexible Numbering Feature
Feature
Index
Default
Access Code
Programmed
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate
ABR - Cancel
Call Park Orbits - Activate
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)
System Orbit Number
DND - Local Activation
DND - Local Cancellation
DND - Remote Activation
DND - Remote Cancellation
Door Lock Control -Unlock
Door Phones - Call
Flash - short
Flash - long
Group Paging - Invoke All Group Paging
Group Paging - Invoke Individual Group Paging
Answer for External Group Paging
Emergency Page - Invoke All Emergency Paging
210
220
230
232
240
183
190
191
200
174
180
181
182
150
151
170
173
#441
#442
#33
#32
7000~7019
#6091
#6092
#6191
#6192
#12
#15
#450
#451
#30
#31
#5#36
#37
4-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature
Emergency Page - Invoke Individual Emergency Paging
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)
Register Speed Dial
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation
Input Account Code
Change DISA Security Code
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)
Enter User Programming Mode
LCR -Outgoing Call
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)
Feature
Index
250
390
400
410
420
371
372
373
380
361
362
363
370
351
352
353
360
560
570
580
591
530
540
550
551
341
342
343
350
267
268
269
340
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
#6053
#6052
#6054
#670
#46
#658
#7
None
#6022
#6032
#6042
#6014
#6024
#6034
#6044
#6051
#494
#9876
9
#63
Default
Access Code
#38
*
4
*
5
*
6
*
7
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
8
*
9
#66
#6011
#6021
#6031
#6041
#6013
#6023
#6033
#6043
#6012
Programmed
Value
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-5
System
Dial Number Plan
Table 4-1
Release Received Message Waiting
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)
Cancel ACB
Start BGM
Stop BGM
Start BGM for External Paging Device
Stop BGM for External Paging Device
Built-in modem
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Night Ring Answer
Flexible Numbering Feature
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number
Change Travelling Class Override Code
Activate System Call Forward
Cancel System Call Forward
Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call
Park Answer
Call Pickup
1
- Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls
(Release 2.0, MF017 or higher)
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve
Transfer to Voice Mail
Repeat Last Number Dialed
Volume Control for BEEP
Change LCD Display Language
Advisory Message - Activation
Advisory Message - Cancellation
Emergency Call
Attendant Console Group Access Code
Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service)
Private Network Access Code
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)
Substitution of Dial *
Substitution of Dial #
Feature
Index
592
630
640
650
651
670
671
593
594
600
610
611
612
613
678
679
720
730
731
740
688
690
700
710
684
685
686
687
680
681
682
683
750
751
760
770
780
781
#5#74
#407
*
0
#6101
#495
#411
#412
#911
0
#5#34
#5#5
#5#32
#5#22
#5#9
#5#73
#5#71
#5#72
Default
Access Code
#409
#64
#408
#431
#490
#491
#492
#493
#19
#5#39
#471
#69
#620
#621
Programmed
Value
#5#29
#5#6
8
None
441
440
4-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Flexible Numbering Feature
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call
Specified caller number access code
Application starting access code
Split (Conference)
Voice Mail Call Monitor Off
UCD Agent Log in (Local Activation)
UCD Agent Log out (Local Activation)
UCD Agent Log in (Remote Activation)
UCD Agent Log out (Remote Activation)
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
Feature
Index
782
783
800
860
870
890
891
892
893
910
911
Default
Access Code
##
#888
#18
860
#963
#6061
#6062
#6161
#6162
#651
#652
Programmed
Value
1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has a feature access code for this call pickup.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-7
System
Dial Number Plan
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.
1. In Network eManager, click System > Public Numbering Plan.
2. Enter the Identifying Digits used for external calls.
3. Select Pattern Digit Length. Total digits beginning with the selected Prefix digit.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Identifying Digits
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the initial identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild cards “X” and “N”.
Possible values:1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Pattern Digit Length
Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is the total number of digits in a number beginning with the
00 Prefix Number entered above.
Possible values:0~64 (default = 0)
Default: 1NXX=11, N11=3, NXX=7
4-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
103 Class Of Service
Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (COS) (1~32) assignments are made for users of telephones, attendant consoles, and incoming calls based upon the line the call arrives or, in some cases, on a call-by-call basis when using
DISA or Tie Line with Q-Sig interfaces. For telephone users, the COS assignments are made for each of the Day/Night Modes to allow different services during different parts of the day.
1. In Network eManager, click System > Class of Service.
2. COS Number – Select the COS Number (1~32).
3. Place a check mark in each of the services you wish to allow.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Auto Busy Redial
02 Call Forward Override
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on
D
ESCRIPTION
Allow Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.
Allow Call Forward Override. If allowed, this station does not forward calls from a calling station with System or Station Call
Forward activated. This includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button located on the telephone or DSS console.
Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.
Allow stations to change the DISA security code.
Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
04 Change DISA Codes
05 DND Override - Calling
Party
06 DND Override - Called
Party
07 Do Not Disturb
08 Remote Set/Reset DND
Allows calling parties with DND Override privileges to override
DND status.
Allows user to place stations on DND mode.
Provides stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other phones.
Allow Executive Override on a call.
Allow Executive Override for incoming callers.
09 Executive Override
10 Executive Override
Allowed
11 Offhook Camp-on
12 Group Pickup
13 Directed Station Pickup
14 Directed Group Call
Pickup
15 Directed DN Call Pickup
16 Ext Call Pickup
Allow Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
Allow stations for Group Call Pickup within one's own group.
Allow stations to pick another specific ringing station.
Allow stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
Allow stations to pick up a specified DN.
Allow stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-9
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
17 Directed CO Call Pickup
18 Remote Retrieve Call
Pickup
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup
20 Handsfree Override
D
ESCRIPTION
Allow stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
Allow stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated station (PDN).
Allow stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
Allow stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.
21 Privacy Override
22 Executive Privacy
Override
23 Invoke Emergency Page
24 Join Feature
25 Through Dialing
Allow user to override a private call when accessing a trunk that is in use.
Allows other stations to use Executive/Privacy Override on this station’s calls.
Allow the Emergency Page feature. (Not used in Release 1.)
Allow the Join feature.
26 Tandem CO Connection
31 Trunk Access Allowed
32 Forced Account Codes
33 Verified Account Codes
34 Allow Short Hook Flash
35 Allow Long Hook Flash
36 Allow Hook Flash
Allow to perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature). Attendant can connect an inbound trunk call to another trunk with permission to use DTMF.
Allow user to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection and exit the conversation. This is required for a tandem between two stations in different nodes.
Allow Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
Allow BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
27 Day/Night Control
28 Ext BGM Control
29 LCR Feature
30 Individual Trunk Access
Allow access to LCR.
Allows user to dial individual trunk access codes, or use direct line appearances, to access specific lines.
Allow access to trunk groups by trunk access codes.
Must use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
Allow a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
Allow a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice mail ports to perform hook flashes.
38 Can Receive OCA
Allow others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
40 Disconnect Outgoing Call
If this parameter is allowed any O/G calls made by Extensions with this COS will be automatically released after a defined time period (defined in Program 104).
41 BGM Enable
Allow Background Music from stations with this COS.
4-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
42 DSS Override Call Fwd
43 DNIS LCD Preference
44 Auto Page Disconnect
45 UCD Local Log-in
46 UCD Remote Log-in
System
Dial Number Plan
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the called station will NOT call forward if Call Forward is set.
When calling stations use the dial pad the called station’s Call
Forward will occur.
Disable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the called station will call forward if Call Forward is set. When calling stations use the dial pad the called station's Call Forward will occur.
Allows the telephone to display either the DNIS Name or ANI
Name on incoming PRI calls.
Enable: DNIS Name displays as programmed in the CIX database.
Disable: ANI Name displays as received from the PRI provider.
This feature is used for preventing Page busy-out if station users forget to hang up after making a Page call.
Enable: Stations having this COS enabled will automatically disconnect from an external Page call after a determined time if the station does not hang up after connecting to the Page call.
The time the auto disconnect will occur is determined by the
Page disconnection timer in Program 104-25.
Disable: Stations having this COS disabled will not disconnect from a Page call until the station is hung up.
Allows this telephone to login to a UCD group locally.
Possible values:Enable (default) - allows local login to UCD group
Disable - does not allow local login
Allows one telephone to login another telephone to a UCD group remotely.
Possible values:Enable - Allow remote login
Disable (default) - Remote login not allowed
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-11
System
Dial Number Plan
104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features for the Strata CIX.
1. In Network eManager, click System > System Timer.
2. Select the desired timer value for each of the fields.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 ACB Callback Timer
02 ACB Cancel Recall
Timer
03 Park Recall Timer
04 Camp-on Timer
05 SMDR Valid Call
Timer
06 Tandem Timer #1
07 Tandem Timer #2
08 CF No Answer Time
D
ESCRIPTION
The Automatic Callback timer sets the time that Automatic Callback will wait for Ring Back Tone being cancelled.
Possible values:5~180 sec. (default = 30)
Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a time limit for the destination telephone number to become available. Once the timer expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values:5~180 min. (default = 30)
Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in
Park.
Possible values:10~600 sec. (default = 120)
Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values:5~15 sec. (default = 10)
The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by
SMDR. The SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be considered to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from the public network. Setting the time too short will include calls that may not be completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are answered and terminated in a short time.
Possible values:0~180 sec. (default = 10)
Select timer for a trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO line has release supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken place.
Possible values:0~3600 sec. (default = 300)
Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the disconnect time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily with DISA.
Possible values:0~180 (default = 30)
The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone will ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 30)
4-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
09 Dial Input Timer
10 Delay 1 Ringing
Timer
11 Delay 2 Ringing
Timer
12 Door Unlock Timer
D
ESCRIPTION
Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values:0~60 sec. (default = 20)
Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated to ring on Delay 1.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 12)
Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated to ring on Delay 2.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 24)
Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 6)
13 9+11 Judgment Timer
The 9+11 inter-digital timer provides a timing value for the system to wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 5)
14 Emergency Call
Timer
Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the call.
Possible values:10~180 sec. (default = 30)
15 ABR Busy Detection
Time
The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 5)
16 Lost Call Timer
19 Auto Disconnect
The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values:1~600 sec. (default = 180)
17 Lost Call Final Timer
The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values:1~600 sec. (default = 30)
18 DTMF Tone Sending
Time
The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO lines.
Possible values:80msec (default) or 160msec
Time after which an unsupervised trunk will be automatically released.
Possible values:0~60 min. (default = 0)
20 Tie Line Delay Timer
This timer inserts a pause before any dialed information is sent to a Tie line.
This pause allows the distant end time to prepare for the receipt of dialed digits.
21 Answer timer before disconnect
If an incoming DISA call routes over a Tie line and the call is not answered by the distant end within a certain period of time the DISA caller will be cut off. The time period before cut off is determined by this setting.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-13
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
22 Outgoing Call Talking
Disconnect Timer
If PGM 103 field 40 is set to enable, after this timer expires the out-going call is cut off.
23 Network DSS Refresh
Timer
Select Network DSS Refresh Timer. The time interval when all network DSS settings are refreshed system-wide.
Note
DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the
DSS button changes - regardless of this timer value.
Possible values:20~180 seconds (default = 30)
24 Outgoing Number
Display Timer
25 Page Auto
Disconnect Timer
26 Caller ID Display
Timer
This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for outgoing line calls.
Possible values: 1~120 seconds (default = 10)
Automatically disconnects the station from a Page call if the station does not hang-up when this timer expires (1~240 seconds in one second intervals).
Default=10 seconds
The station must be enabled for this feature in Prog 103-44 for this timer to apply to the Page call.
This timer determines how long Caller ID information displays on telephone
LCDs after a call is answered (1~300 seconds in one second intervals).
Default=15 second
4-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CIX.
1. In Network eManager, click System > System Data.
2. Enter System Parameter data using the table below.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Executive Override
02 Station MOH Source
Music On Hold selection for private lines, Tie lines and stations.
Refer to PRG109 for equipment MOH assignments.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1 ~ 15, Internal (default)
03 Ring Transfer Tone
Determines whether a call hears RBT or MOH while being transferred and prior to the destination party answering.
Possible values:RBT (default) or MOH
04 Transfer Privacy
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
05 Privacy Override
06 Credit Card Code
Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will only flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line button on other telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will flash and ring on all telephones having the CO line button appearance.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Enables warning tone to members of a call prior to that call’s being subject to Privacy Override or Attendant Monitor.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Credit Card Digits
08 E911 Service
Minimum Dial Digits required for Credit Card Calling. This should be the quantity of digits in a credit card number. If this quantity of digits is not dialed when making credit card calls, the caller will be disconnected. This is to ensure that the call is charged to a credit card. DRL tables in Program
111 and OLGs in Program 306 must be enabled with credit card calling for this feature to be active. Users must be assigned to a DRL table enabled with credit card calling and call out on a credit card calling enabled OLG for this featured to be applied to the call.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 21)
Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-15
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
09 DR Override by SSD
Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
10 Auto Station Release
Enable Automatic Station Release - when the other party disconnects the station is automatically set to idle.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
11 ISDN SPID
Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values:Operable or Not Operable (default)
12 Night Mode Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in the Night Mode.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
CIX100 (ACTU) and CIX200 (LCTU): The built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this operation, in Program 100 the
BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20.
13 BGM External Paging
Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to which BGM will be sent. See Program 503.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100)
0~8 (CIX200)
0~16 (CIX670)
0~24 (CIX1200
(default = 0)
14 Lost Call Destination
Enter Lost Call Destination. Any valid DN such as PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN.
Possible values:Any DN (Up to 5 digits) (default = no value)
15 COS Override Code
Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS override codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)
16 Multi-Conference
17 Caller Number
Display
Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing
Calls.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable Calling Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller
ID, the Caller ID displays if enabled. Otherwise, the soft key function will continue to be displayed.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
4-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
18 Night Bell Relay
19 Display Preference
20 Transit Counter
21 Primary Clock
22 Secondary Clock
23 Call History Prefix 1
24 Emergency Digits
Sent
25 DP Make Ratio
D
ESCRIPTION
Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates when the system is in the Night Mode.
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIOU2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note The CIX100 ACTU and CIX200 LCTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, a virtual
BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment position
- Cabinet 2 slot 5. (Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in prog.
100)
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual
BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot
01~08 in the normal manner.
Select whether to display DNIS or Caller ID.
Possible values:DNIS (default) or Caller ID
Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes through which a Strata Net call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values:0~128 (default = 1)
Enter data as xxyyzz. (xx = cabinet, yy = slot, zz = channel) zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU zz=channel 01, 02, 03, or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be assigned to an RPTU in
Cabinet 5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100 and CIX200: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for Expansion cabinets.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for Expansion cabinets
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01~03 for Base slots and 01~04 for Expansion slots.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values:Add (default) or Do Not Add
Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = 911)
Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values:33% (default) or 40%
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-17
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
26 Call Button Jumping
Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they are answered. After the call is answered the DN button is cleared to receive another call. With this operation the DN acts as an answer button for the telephone. This operation only applies if the line that is answered has a CO, GCO, or Pooled line button appearance on the telephone. If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
27 Set Domestic Code
D
ESCRIPTION
28 Set International
Code
Set to 0 (zero) to enable the CIX to insert the leading zero when receiving a
National CLI (not used in US)
Set to 00 (zero zero). Enables CTX to insert two leading zeros when receiving an International CLI (not used in US)
29 CPN Numbering Plan
Called Party Number numbering plan format.
Possible values: Unknown (default) or ISDN
30 SLT Recall Timer
31 Analog Trunk
Hunting
Hooking = 100ms, On-Off Hook = 500ms
This parameter defines the order in which analog trunks are selected during the outgoing call trunk selection process.
Possible values:Terminal (default) or Cyclical
32 Display Check Sum
Error
33 Analog Tie Line
Disconnect
34 Analog DID Method
35 ALaw/MuLaw
Enable a System Checksum error to be displayed and an error log to be created.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Analog Tie Line Disconnect Timer enables tandem analog Tie lines to automatically disconnect if the timer expires.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Analog DID method: Normal (DTMF)/MFC-R2 3 digits/MFC-R2 4 digits
Possible values:Normal (default), MFC-R2 3, MFC-R2 4
Choose the companding technique appropriate to the local PSTN. Mu Law in North America.
Possible values:A Law or Mu Law (default)
36 Play Melody
37 Select Melody
Whether to play melody or not
Possible values:1 - Start, 2 - Stop
Default: 2 - Stop
Select melody
Possible values:1 - Melody1, 2 - Melody2
Default: 1 - Melody1
4-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
38 Internal Pad
39 Std. Tel. Ringing
Cadence
40 Sys CF Cascade
41 CSTA B-Ch.
Operation
42 ISDN Complete IE
Option
43 Repeat Last No.
Dialed
44 Default Calling
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Whether to insert internal pad or not
Possible values:1 - Enable, 2 - Disable
Default: 2 - Disable
Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits.
Note
This does not apply to Digital or IP telephones.
Ringing Type 1
External Ring: 20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring: 20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
Ringing Type 2
Ringing Type2 is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Enable: A call that forwards to a device that is also System Call Forwarded will be sent to the device’s System Call Forward destination.
Note
If enabled, the SCF alternate destination set in Prog 500-05 will be ignored.
Disable: A call that forwards to a device that is System Call Forwarded will not follow the device’s System Call Forward.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enabled - CSTA shall provide full 'B' Channel path information. Disabled -
CSTA shall provide channel group only.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Whether to append Sending Complete IE into SETUP message and INFO message in ISDN.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Enable - store dialed numbers that are not complete in the last number dialed buffer.
Disable - only store complete telephone numbers in the last number dialed buffer.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Enabled - the system will send the default Calling Number to the PSTN when stations make ISDN calls in the local node.
Disable - the system will not send the default Calling Number to the PSTN on ISDN calls in the local node.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-19
System
Dial Number Plan
F
IELD
45 DSS Ringing/DND
Indication
46 Caller ID Call Types
47 ISDN CPN: Number
Type
48 ISDN CPN:
Numbering Plan
50 LCD Keystrip
Refresh Interval
51 Caller ID Line Access
Code
D
ESCRIPTION
Select whether DSS LEDs should flash red, light steady or not light when their respective Directory Numbers are ringing/DND.
Ringing – DSS LEDs flash red when their respective Directory Numbers are ringing or in DND.
Idle – DSS LEDs are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory Numbers are ringing and flash when in DND.
Idle/DND-On – DSS LEDs are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory
Numbers are ringing and steady lit when in DND.
Possible values:Ringing (default), Idle or Idle/DND On
Enable this feature if CO line Caller ID should display on the LCD of a station that receives a Forwarded, Transferred, or Recall call.
Disable this feature if the originating Station Name\PDN should display on the LCD of a station that receives a Forwarded, Transferred, or Recall call.
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
ISDN Calling Party Number type of number setup message format.
Possible values:System (Default), Unknown, International, National,
Network, Subscriber, Abbreviated Enable call.
ISDN Calling Party Number numbering plan ID Setup message format.
Possible values:System (Default), Unknown, ISDN, Data, Telex, National
Std, Private
The CIX processor can automatically send a refresh signal to all LCD keystrips.
This is the time period, measured in hours, between refresh commands sent to the telephone LCD keystrips.
Possible values:0~24 hours (Default is 1 hour.) 0 = No refresh sent
This is the line or trunk access code the telephones will automatically dial to access an outgoing line when pressing the Call softkey to dial a selected
Caller ID telephone number.
Default is 9 (Maximum of 8 characters)
4-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
System Call Forward
System Call Forward
Program Number(s): 500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs:
1. In Network eManager, click System > System Call Forward.
2. Enter Program 500 data; enter Program 504 data.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.
500 / 504 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone
Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 System Call
Forward Template
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670
& CIX200 Basic), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~10 (CIX200
Basic HCTU only), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or
HEXBU)
(default = no value)
02 Active Telephone
Status
03 Telephone Status
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values:No Forwarding, Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or
DND (default = No Forwarding)
04 Call Type
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values:No Forwarding, Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or
DND (default = No Forwarding)
05 Period
06 Destination 1
Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values:CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)
Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values:Day, Day2 or Night (default = Day)
Enter the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Destination 2
Enter an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-21
System
System Call Forward
Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or all SCF templates. It combines Programs 500 and 504 on the same screen.
1. Select System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32), and then a Telephone Status (example
“Busy No Answer”). The System Call Forward screen displays showing the status of the first available call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone
Status fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected the full page displays for editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.
3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CIX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CIX
… or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy Destinations to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.
Copy Dialog Box
To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment click Copy on the System Call Forward screen. The System Call Forward Range Copy screen displays.
4-22
To select the Destination(s) that should be copied
1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF assignments to which the destination(s) should be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CIX and the destination(s) are copied to all assignments that you selected.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
System Call Forward
Possible Errors
• If you attempt to remove Destination 1 (only) when there is a Destination 2 assigned.
•
If you attempt to assign Destination 2 when Destination 1 is not assigned.
Notes
•
If you check “Prompt on Error,” the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs. You are then given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
• If you do not check “Prompt on Error,” all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
•
You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.
System Call Forward Table View
SCF Table View shows the entire set up of all available system call forward levels.
To access the SCF Table View
Select System > SCF Table View or if you are in Prog 500 or 504, click the SCF Table View button.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a common routine with the number (see
“516 Station Speed Dial” on page 5-40 for more information about
nesting).
1. Select > System > System Speed Dial.
2. Enter Program 501 data.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Speed Dial Index
01 Number
02 Name
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values:000~799 (default = no value)
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the length of the pause.
This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-23
System
System Call Forward
System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.
To access the System Speed Dial Table View
Select System > System Speed Dial Table View or if you are in Prog 501, click the System Speed Dial
Table View button.
4-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Day Night Service
Day Night Service
Program Number(s): 112, 106 and 113
Note Refer to Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change, Program Number “121 Automatic Day Light
Savings Time Change” on page 10-4.
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CIX.
1. Select > System > Day Night Service.
2. Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
3. Enter the Calendar Day (YYYYMMDD) to assign a Working Day Type schedule
… or click on one of the following buttons:
• List – View a summary list of programmed Calendar days.
• Copy Tenant – Copies the currently viewed record to another record(s).
• Get Default - Restores factory default data.
4. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
5. Enter Program 106 data.
6. Enter Program 113 data.
7. Click Submit.
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These settings override the default system schedules in the CIX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique circumstances.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Calendar Day
Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)
02 Working Day Type
Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values:Delete, Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday, (default= no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-25
System
Day Night Service
106 Day/Night Mode Day of Week Mapping Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types of days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.
Possible values:Work Day, Non-Work Day (default) or Holiday
01 Monday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
07 Sunday
4-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Day Night Service
113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule
Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each “type of day” defined in
Mode Day of Week Mapping Assignment” on page 4-26 requires an assigned schedule.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
(This feature is available with R2.2 or higher.)
Possible values:1~8.
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
Work Day
• 01 Day1 Mode/
Work Day
• 02 Day2 Mode/
Work Day
• 03 Night Mode/
Work Day
Non-Work Day
• 04 Day1 Mode/Non-
Work Day
• 05 Day2 Mode/Non-
Work Day
• 06 Night Mode/
Non-Work Day
Holiday
• 07 Day1 Mode/
Holiday
• 08 Day 2 Mode/
Holiday
• 09 Night Mode/
Holiday
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.
Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-27
System
PAD Values
PAD Values
PAD Values Interface
Network eManager displays PAD values as a worksheet (partial example below). To change a value click on the number. The line will expand and up/down arrows (spin arrows) will appear. Click on the arrows to adjust the PAD level. The changes are only in the worksheet until it is submitted. You can change as many
PAD values as you like, then submit once to change the system database.
4-28
Click on a value to change it.
Export
The Worksheet can be exported. The Export button stores the worksheet as a comma delimited file on the local PC. The exported file can be opened and modified using word processing or spreadsheet programs.
Import
A worksheet file can be imported as a worksheet. The worksheet can be compared to the default PAD values or to the system database. The PAD value worksheet can be exported before making changes to the PAD settings. If necessary, the old settings can be restored by importing the worksheet file.
Change Compare
When a worksheet is compared to the system database or the default values, the differences can be seen as highlighted values in the worksheet.
Load Default
Loads the PAD Table default values into the worksheet. Click on the Submit button to restore the default
PAD values in the CIX database.
CAUTION!
Any PAD groups you have created are not part of the default. These groups will be lost when the default values are restored.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
PAD Values
PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD tables and PAD conference tables using these programs.
1. Select System > PAD Table.
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Sender PAD Device
Number
Enter Sender PAD device or group. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Possible values:Analog telephone, DKT, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN station, ISDN trunk, CONF bridge, Music source, EXT. paging, IPT-B, IPT-L/SIP, MIPU/GIPU_IPT2000/IP5000,
MIPU/GIPU-Strata Net, SIP Trunk, PAD group 1~17.
(default = no value.)
02 Receiver PAD
Device Number
03 PAD Loss
CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers
CIX200/670/1200 Basic - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670, CIX1200 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers
Enter Receiver PAD device or group number. See Table 4-2 or use dropdown menu.
Possible values:Same as above
CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers
CIX200/670/1200 Basic - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670, CIX1200 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers)
Enter PAD Value (see Table 4-2 or use the drop-down menu). The value shown represents the net effect.
Note
To PAD is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.
Possible values:1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Loss
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value)
More volume
Less volume
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-29
System
PAD Values
Program 107 PAD Table Example
If the Sender is an analog telephone (PAD device number 1) and the receiver is a T1 trunk (PAD device number 4), then the PAD value is 6. (6 = 9dB Net Loss).
PAD group numbers are assigned in Program 108 PAD Group Assignment.
4-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
PAD Values
108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional device groups to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default table.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 PAD Group Device
Type
01 PAD Group Number
Enter the Device Type.
Possible values:Station, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN trunk, CONF bridge, Music source, EXT. paging
(default = no value.)
Enter the PAD Group Number.
Possible values:0~6 (CIX100)
0~10 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic, CIX1200 Basic)
0~32 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp)
(default = 0)
Table 4-2 Program 108 PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device Type
Station
ISDN Trunk
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk
Conference Bridge
Music Source
External Paging Device
Possible Values
0~99999 (PDN)
Channel Group No. 1~128
Trunk Number 1~264
None (Conference Bridge is only one)
Music Port 1~15
Zone Relay Number 1~8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-31
System
PAD Values
114 PAD Conference Assignment
This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in conference.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 PAD Conference
Trunks
02 PAD Conference
Telephones
03 PAD Conference
Value
Enter the number of analog trunks.
Possible values:0~6 (default = 0)
Enter the number of analog telephones.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)
Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and telephones specified in 01 PAD Conference Trunks and 02 PAD
Conference Telephones above. The value shown shows the net effect.
Note
To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.
Possible values:1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Los
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value).
4-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
Miscellaneous System Commands
110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels. Logging into the system with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password provides restricted program administration.
1. Select System > Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Password Level
01 Password
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:
Possible values:Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are restricted from initializing the CIX and from updating the
CIX software
(default = 0000 (password will not display)).
Enter a 1~16 digit password for the selected level.
Note
Only one password can be set for each level.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-33
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. Select System > Music on Hold.
2. For fields 01~07, click in the adjacent radio button to activate MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the equipment location identifier and check the Connected box to activate.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 MOH/BGM 1
(ACTU or BECU)
02 MOH/BGM 2
(BIOU1-J1)
03 MOH/BGM 3
(BIOU1-J2)
D
ESCRIPTION
For MOH/BGM #2~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the specified BIOU (MOH/BGM #1 enabled by default).
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
04 MOH/BGM 4
(BIOU1-J3)
05 MOH/BGM 5
(BIOU2-J1)
06 MOH/BGM 6
(BIOU2-J2)
07 MOH/BGM 7
(BIOU2-J3)
4-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
F
IELD
08 MOH/BGM 8
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
09 MOH/BGM 9
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
10 MOH/BGM 10
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
11 MOH/BGM 11
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
12 MOH/BGM 12
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
13 MOH/BGM 13
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
14 MOH/BGM 14
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
15 MOH/BGM 15
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.)
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the analog station card equipment number to which MOH/BGM source
#9~1510 is connected.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~07
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=circuit 01~16
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
1. A PDN can not be assigned to an BSTU/BSTCIU/RSTU/BSLU/ASTU/LSLU equipment number if it is to be a MOH circuit.
If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM source, you must first delete it using PRG201.
2. On CIX100, ASTU=010901and 010902.
3. On CIX200, LSLU=010401and 010402.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots; 05~09 for Exp.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots; 01~10 for Exp.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots; 01~10 for Exp.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.
• Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital tel on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH
(CIX40 R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40
R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital tel on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-35
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
I/O Device
Program Number(s): 803, 801 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. Select System > I/O Device.
2. The tab sections are: I/O Logical Device (803), LAN Device (801), and RS232 Serial port (804).
803 Application Port Assignments
This program assigns one of the following:
• SMDR and CIX Proprietary Integration to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
• ACD server, CIX Proprietary Integration and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device
and LAN port numbers. Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-40
.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Logical Device
Number
01 Device Connection
Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or Network application. See
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
200~206 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value) -
Do not use for My Phone Application or Feature Flex.
208 = Feature Flex (do not use for anything else)
300 = SMDI or CIX Proprietary Integration
301 = SMDI or CIX Proprietary Integration
400 = BLF (for CIX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS buttons)
600 = Traffic Report
1. Select RS-232 for serial connection to SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs.
These devices are connected to BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for Strata eManager, ACD Server, SMDR LAN connection,
CIX Proprietary Integration, and Attendant Console PC. These devices are connected to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values:None (default), LAN or RS-232
4-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
Port Index No.
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values:For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Note
•
SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
•
LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
•
For Network SMDR, when the Device Port is LAN, set the Client TCP
Port Number to:
6000 - SMDR Call Accounting device that supports receiving SMDR data from multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port.
600x - SMDR Call Accounting device that does not support receiving
SMDR data from multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port. Set each CIX node to a unique value. The MDR Call Accounting device must be capable of receiving data from each client port simultaneously.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-37
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
Table 4-3 Device Table
Logical Device
SMDR
CTI
JTAPI/Info Manager™/VCS™
Feature Flex
Stratagy or other SMDI
Attendant BLF
Attendant DSS
Traffic Measurement
SMDI
LAN
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
PPP
Physical Device
RS-232C
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OK
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OK
OK
Smart Media or
Secure Digital
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OK
-
-
-
Define I/O
Logical
Device
Number
100
300
400
500
600
300
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
4-38
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on
.
This assigns Strata CIX LAN parameters, enabling PC applications to connect to the BECU network jack.
1. Select > System > I/O Device.
2. Click the LAN Device tab.
3. Enter Program 801 data. Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-40
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 LAN Port Index No.
Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned or select from the
list. Refer to “803 Application Port Assignments” on page 4-36 .
Possible values:1~12 (default = no value)
01 Protocol
Select Communication Protocol.
Possible values:TCP (default) or UDP
Note
Select UDP for Network DSS and TCP for CIX applications.
02 Application Type
03 Data Flow
04 Server Port No.
Select the Operation Type.
•
If Server is selected, make an entry in 04 Server Port Number.
•
If Client is selected, make an entry in 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values:Server (default) or Client
Select the data flow protocol for CIX and PC communications.
Possible values:Synchronous or Asynchronous (default = Asynchronous)
Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this field blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values:0~65535 (default = 0)
05 Client IP
06 Client Port No.
07 Read Retry No.
Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above.
Possible values:0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
Enter the Client Port number
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
For Central LAN SMDR in a Strata Net use the same port number if the
SMDR Application supports receiving data from multiple nodes on one port
(i.e. 6000). Use a unique port number in each node if the SMDR Application does not support receiving data from multiple nodes on a single port (i.e.
Node 1=6000, Node 2=6001). Refer to Figure 4-1 on Page 4-40 .
Set the maximum number of Read Retries.
Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-39
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
F
IELD
08 Write Retry No.
D
ESCRIPTION
Set the maximum number of Write Retries.
Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)
09 Caller Name Set To
CSTA
The Caller Name can be sent to the CSTA application.
Possible values:Yes - Net Phone (Set the Caller Name to CSTA) or
NO - Other CTI device (Do not send Caller Name) (Default)
Table 4-4
Program 803
SMDR SMDI CTI
Port Assignments
Logical Device No.
Device Connection
Device Port No
Program 801
LAN Device
Assignments
Feature Flex
208 CTI #8
LAN
8
Feature Flex
LAN Port No
Protocol
PC Operation Type
Data Flow
Server Port No.
Client Port No.
8
TCP
Server
Asynchronous
1117
0
Client IP
Retry No.
I/O Device Information
Write Retry Counter
0
1
1
SMDI LAN
CIX Proprietary
MAS
300 SMDI #0
LAN
10
SMDI LAN
CIX Proprietary
MAS
10
TCP
Client
Asynchronous
0
1000
IP address of MAS
192.168.254.252
1
1
SMDI LAN
CIX Proprietary
ES/IES32
300 SMDI #0
LAN
10
SMDI LAN
CIX Proprietary
ES/IES32
BLF
Attendant
Console
400 BLF
LAN
11
BLF
Attendant
Console
DSS Buttons
(DSS
Console,
DKT, & ADM
500 DSS
LAN
12
DSS Buttons
(DSS
Console,
DKT, & ADM
10
TCP
11
TCP
12
UPD
Client Server Server
Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
0
5000
IP address of
ES / IES32
192.168.254.252
6000
0
0 0 0 0
3000
0
0 0 0 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
CIX/CTX
CIX/CTX
Strata Net
CIX/CTX
LAN or
WAN
SMDR
Call Accounting
Figure 4-1 SMDR LAN Connection in a Strata Net
4-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
1. Select > System > I/O Device.
2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab.
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 BSIS Port (1~4)
01 Port Speed
02 Port Parity
03 Data Bits
04 Flow Control
05 Wait Timer
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values:1~4 (default = no value)
Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values:300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note
The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed
57,600 bps.
Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values:None, Even or Odd (default)
Select Data Length.
Possible values:7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits
This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the SMDI or SMDR device. To enable the CIX to buffer call records set this field to Flow.
Possible values:None (default) or Flow
Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one through 255 seconds. Select
0
to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values:0~255 (default = 30)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-41
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None
Specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status information when others call their station. When the user sets a message on a telephone, LCD telephones that call this telephone will display the message. When the user sets a message, the message can be customized to include a variable directory number, time or date as part of the message.
1. Select System > Advisory Messages.
2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01 Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
6. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Message Number
01 Message Text
02 User Entered
Variable
D
ESCRIPTION
Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. All messages (0~9) can be edited; the first 5 messages have commonly used default values.
Possible values:0~4 = preprogrammed messages, 5~9 = custom messages (default = 0)
Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed.
The total message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or date; or 1~5 digit DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed.
The total message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or date; or 1~5 digit DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values:None (default), DN, Time or Date
Table 4-5 Advisory Message Default Code Table
5
6
3
4
1
2
#
0
7
8
9
Advisory Message
OUT TO LUNCH
IN A MEETING
CALL
BACK AT
RETURN ON
(No Data)
(No Data)
(No Data)
(No Data)
(No Data)
Type of Additional
None
None
Directory Number
Time
Date
None
None
None
None
None
4-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CIX system.
1. Select System > Data Initialize.
2. Select a Program to initialize from the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
4-43
System
Miscellaneous System Commands
120 Tenant Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select an Attendant or Night Bell to ring when dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day
3 mode for up to eight Tenants. You can also assign the general purpose relay to the Night Bell.
1. Select System > Tenant Data.
2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Tenant Number
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type
03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst
Digits
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst
Digits
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst
Digits
04 Night Mode Relay
D
ESCRIPTION
Select Tenant.
Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)
This determines the destination type for calls dialing the Tenant
Attendant Access Code in each tenant for each time mode (Day 1,
Day 2 and NIght).
Important!
The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prog 102. If it should be 0, the
Attendant Console Group Access Code, which is 0, must be deleted.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell
Enter the PDN of the Attendant to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant
Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected
(default =no data)
05 Night Bell Relay
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously when the system is in the night mode.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or
DID rings when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must be assigned to ring the night bell.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5
4-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
5
This chapter provides Strata CIX station programming information.
Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 201, 203, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216, 260, and 502
The following programs assign station data.
200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program:
This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Select Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the Basic tab.
3. To modify an existing station enter its DN number in the Primary DN field or select a DN from the list on the right side of the screen.
4. To create a new DN with custom settings click Create. A dialog box will appear.
•
Select PRG 200: DKT/SLT/IPT_B/SL_VMU if you are creating a Digital Key Telephone, Single Line
Telephone or IPT-1020SD
•
Select PRG 260: IPT_L/SIP/IP_VA/IP_ATT/IP_VM if you are creating an IPT2000-, IP5000-series or a SIP telephone.
•
Enter the desired values.
•
Click Submit.
5. Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
6. Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment and click OK.
•
Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
•
Get Default sets all values to factory default.
•
Click Submit.
The following table takes you through the parameters for IP station assignment (PRG 260).
5-1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
00 Prime DN
Prime DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create for a new station).
02 PDN Equipment Number
01 Type
Enter the PDN equipment number (0000 means auto assignment).
•
IPT1020-SD must be installed on BIPU-M; IPT1020 cannot be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx.
•
SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; SIP phones cannot be installed on BIPU-M
•
IPT2000 series and IP Softphones can be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU,
GIPx or BIPU-M (see Prog 260 for LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx PDN assignments). MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment= Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
Assign device types to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS ports:
IPT2000-series telephones and IP Softphones are IPT (require End Point licenses).
SIP telephones are SIP (require End Point license).
IP Attendant Consoles are ATTENDANT (require Basic Port License).
VM Ports are VOICE MAIL (require Basic Port License and MAS HMP resource).
ACD Announcers are ACD ANNOUNCE (require Basic Port License and MAS
HMP resource).
Note
IPT1020-SD telephones cannot be assigned to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/
LIPS; they must be assigned to BIPU-M in Prog 200.
5-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
03 LAN Interface Number
Enter “1” for an LIPU, GIPx or MIPU, enter “2” for an LIPS.
Possible values:1 (Default) or 2
05 COS Day1
•
•
Day2
Night
Class of Service for Day1 mode.
Possible values:1~ 32 (default = 1)
Class of Service for Day 2 mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 32
Class of Service for Night mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 32 (default = 1)
06 DRL Day1
•
•
Day 2
Night
07 FRL Day1
Destination Restriction Level for Day1 Mode (used for credit card calling).
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Destination Restriction Level for Day2 Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Destination Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 1 Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
• Day 2
•
08 LCR Group
09 QPL Day1
•
•
Night
Day 2
Night
10 Name to Display
11 Dialing Progress Tone
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Facilities Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Least Cost Routing Group Number.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Queuing Priority Level for Day 1 Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Queuing Priority Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Queuing Priority Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN.
Possible values:16 ASCII Characters (default = no data)
Type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
Possible values:Dial Tone (Default), Entry Tone or Silence
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-3
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
12 System Call Forward
System Call Forward group number.
0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670/1200 Basic &
CIX200), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 with expansion processor), 0~48 (CIX1200 with
A or B expansion processor).
Default = 0.
13 Call Pickup
14 Bearer Capability
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values:Permitted (Default), Group Only, Not Permitted
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations:
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Important!
Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech). All standard telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over
Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Audio (Default) or Speech
15 Display DN
16 CESID
17 Emergency Call Group
18 Remote CF/DND
Password
If this station is a member of a Hunt Group that has a Pilot Number and Pilot
Display Number set in Prog 209-02 and Prog. 209-04 respectively, enter the
HG Pilot Display Number in this field. This number will display on the LCD of telephones when calling or when called by this station or VM port.
This is necessary for proper operation of Hunt Groups, including centralized
Voice Mail, over Strata Net.
Possible values:Dial String of 1~ 5 digits
E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID). Should be a valid NANP telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no data)
The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values:1 (default) ~ 8
Password to remotely set or cancel DND or Station Call Forward from another
CIX station or, for Call Forward only, from an external DISA line.
Note: DND cannot be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Possible values:1 ~ 4 digits (default = no data)
5-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
19 VMID Code
Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to the PDN that forward to voice mail.
Note: see Prog. 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Possible values:1 ~ 10 digits (default = no data)
20 VM MW Center Port
Message Waiting Center DN.
Enter the VM PDN or Pilot DN number that should display on telephone LCDs when calling Voice Mail or receiving calls from Voice mail.
Possible values:Valid DN (default = no data)
21 Travel COS Change
22 TGAC Override
23 Service Tones
24 Call Waiting Tone
25 Dial Directory
Privilege Change the Traveling Class of Service Override Code.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
Trunk Group Access Code Override for Attendant console.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call Waiting
Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAX machines, and similar devices.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
Enable/Disable the station to receive call waiting (camp-on) and ring over busy
(rob) tone.
CW tone is always two beeps.
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
Privilege to put the user name in the list display of large LCD (Directory
Assistance)
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
26 Door Over DND
27 Set System Speed Dial
28 Network COS
29 Auto OCA
Enable DND to be overridden by a door phone.
Possible values:Override or Not Override (default = Not Override)
Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
Network Class Of Service number.
Possible values:1~ 32 (default = 1)
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows
OCA calls to be received.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-5
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
30 Originate OCA
The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Important!: This privilege must be disabled for all Voice Mail and Auto
Attendant ports.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
31 RSTU Supervision
Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision, should be set with Not Received. This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in PROG
104, PB06 for these types of connections.
Possible Values: Received or Not Received (default = Received)
32 Station SpDial Bins
33 Call Forward Dial Tone
34 Dialing Digit Restriction
35 CO Park & Hold
36 MW & DND Dial Tone
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Possible values:0 ~ 100 (maximum=100 per station).
When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if Station Call
Forward is set on the telephone.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any subsequent digits.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
Enable: When this station goes off hook it will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a message waiting indication. The station will receive a busy tone burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
37 Activate Message Waiting
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8, or 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station can not activate station-to-station message waiting on other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8, 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports; they use the special
Message Waiting access codes.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
5-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
38 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1~ 8 (default = 1)
39 Hook-Switch Recall
40 Auto-Campon to PDN
Enable Recall for Digital Telephones for normal operation.
Disable Recall on Standard Telephones that produce hook-switch bounce when they are hung-up. This prevents annoying ring recalls when the user hangs up on a call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
Enable - to allow auto-campon to this PDN when busy and called by a CO line even if the CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Disable - to not allow auto-campon to this PDN when called by a CO line if the
CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Note
Auto-campon will always occur on the PDN if the calling CO line group has auto-campon enabled in Program 304-17 regardless of how this option is set.
Auto-campon will be applied or not to PhDNs according to the PhDN owner
PDN setting for this option.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
41 LCR PDN Code
42 Network Calling Number
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code.
The PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits Table.
Possible values:G711, G729A or None (default = G729A)
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.).
When this station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network this number will be sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end node (providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the Caller ID number at the terminating external telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is originated, nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:32 Digits Max.
43 Security Code
44 My Phone Manager Level
Enter the My Phone Manager user privilege level for this station.
Possible values:Normal, Super 1 or Super2 (default = Normal)
45 Speaker OCA
Enter the My Phone Manager password for this station. This security code is also the IP Mobility Login password (refer to field 49).
Possible values:16 Characters Max
Enable or disable Speaker OCA on an IP telephone. When speaker OCA is assigned to an IP set an additional IP port is assigned to the IP. If there is no available IP port S-OCA cannot be assigned and an eManager error will occur.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-7
Station
Assignment
Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)
49 IP Phone Login Password
Whether or not to apply the Login Password Authentication - Uses the
Personal Password (43)
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
50 Transfer Registration
Whether or not to apply Transfer Registration - Set to Enable to allow IP
Mobility for this DN.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Note
Assign a “Phone Logout” feature key on this DN.
51 Station Connecting
Equipment
Enter the PDN equipment number (0000 means auto assignment).
•
IPT1020-SD must be installed on BIPU-M; IPT1020 cannot be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx.
•
SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; SIP phones cannot be installed on BIPU-M
•
IPT2000 series and IP Softphones can be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU,
GIPx or BIPU-M (see Prog 260 for LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx PDN assignments). MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment= Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
52 Simple System SpeedDial
Whether or not to system speed dial supplement is allowed.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
53 Analog Station
Disconnect Signal
Whether or not Analog Station Disconnect Signal is sent. Refer to on page 5-25 .
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
5-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Station PDN Selective Copy
This screen gives you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the destination PDNs.
Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:
•
Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
• Check All to select all the parameters, or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.
1. Select Station > Station Assignments. Enter the Primary DN.
2. Click Selective Copy. The Selective Copy screen displays.
3. Check Highlight All to select all the parameters or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items and leave out a few, you can check Highlight All and then click on the items that you don’t want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Select ‘Copy To’ PDN(s) to start the copying process. End of Copy is displayed when copy is complete.
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.
PDN Table View
The PDN Table View displays the following parameters set in Program 200/260—Station Equipment
Number, Type, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL, FRL, LCR Group,
System Call Forward Template, Network COS, the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins and Tenant.
To access the extended list
Select Station > Station Assignments and click the PDN Table View button. The Extended List spreadsheet displays after it downloads from the CIX. This takes some time depending on the CIX connection speed and database size.
The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 20 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-9
Station
Assignment
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program:
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephone station parameters.
1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the DKT tab.
3. To modify an existing station, enter its DN number in the Primary DN field or select a DN from the list on the right side of the screen.
4. To create a new DN with custom settings click Create in the Basic tab. A dialog box will appear.
• Select DKT/SLT/IPT_B/SL_VMU if you are creating a Digital Key Telephone, Single-line Telephone or IPT-1020SD.
• Enter the desired values.
• Click OK.
5. Delete (Basic tab) – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
6. Change DN (Basic tab) – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment and click OK.
• Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
• Get Default sets all values to factory default.
• Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Station Type
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant the system can support four circuits.
Possible values:Extension (default) or Attendant
02 Key Strip Pattern
This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to the digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any) has been assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.
CAUTION!
Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys programmed on a telephone.
Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected pattern is applied to the 'Key Strip Type' parameter.
None – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons and DND.
Pattern 3 – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
(DKT3014/3214 uses only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values:Pattern 1, 2, 3, or None (default)
5-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
03 Keystrip Button
Quantity
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note
Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from 1~24, valid values are 10, 14, and 20.
Possible values:1, 3, 7, 8, 10, 14, or 20 (default)
Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones:
1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001, DKT3001/3201|, and DP5008
7 button keystrips apply to DKT3007/32307 and SoftIPT
8 button keystrips apply to IPT2008-SDL
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010, DKT3001/3201, DP5018, DP5022,
DP5122, DP5130, IP5122-SD -SDC and IP5131-SDL.
Note
To set as or change from DP5130 or IP5131-SDL, refer to Keystrip
Type.
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014/3210
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020, DKT3020/3220, DP5032, DP5132 and IP5132-SD
04 Add-on Modules
Select the number of DADM or LM Add-on-Modules assigned to this station.
If the Add-on-Module is an LCD Line Module, LM5110, identify it as such in parameter 40 and/or 41 of this program.
Possible values:None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units
05 Tone Ring/Voice
Announce
Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”; if set to Voice First iES32 will not answer.
Possible values:Tone or Voice (default)
06 OCA Type
09 Handsfree MIC
Setting
10 Handsfree Tone
Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA
Originate below.
Possible values:Handset (default) or Speaker
If you call a station configured for Voice First signaling you can use this parameter to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signaling you can use this parameter to send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals.
Disabling this parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on /
3 sec Off).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-11
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
13 Off Hook
Preference
D
ESCRIPTION
Select Off Hook Preference.
Possible values:Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or dials a digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will select an idle PDN or Line button or answer an incoming call according to the preferences set in this command.
This command works in conjunction with the 14 PDN/Line Preference and
15 Ringing Preference programs.
The possible values are described as follows:
•
Idle – The telephone will select an idle DN or Line button depending on the 14 PDN/Line Preference choice. In either case priority is always the lowest numbered button that is idle. The telephone will not answer ringing calls automatically.
•
Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary
DN, PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing button depending on the 15 Ringing Preference choice. The telephone will not automatically select a DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
•
Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button, if idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on the telephone.
•
No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when the user goes off hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable the telephone’s Hot Dial Pad feature.
•
Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select an idle Line button (14 PDN/Line Preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button (14 PDN/Line Preference - PDN Preference).
•
Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select a ringing Line button (14 PDN/Line Preference - Line Preference) or a ringing DN button (14 PDN/Line Preference - PDN Preference).
•
Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing call according to 15 Ringing Preference. If a call is not ringing it will select an idle Line button (14 PDN or Line Preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN or Line Preference - PDN Preference).
5-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
14 PDN/Line
Preference
D
ESCRIPTION
Offhook preference button type.
Possible values:CO Key or DN Key (default)
•
CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line button) have priority over DN buttons with 13 Off Hook Preference choices. The lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority over other line buttons for idle selection.
•
Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or
PhDN button) have priority over Line buttons with 13 Off Hook
Preference choices. The PDN button has first priority for idle selection.
The lowest numbered DN button on the telephone has priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button is busy.
Note
Off hook ringing selections are also based on 15 Ringing
Preference choices.
15 Ringing
Preference
Ringing call answer preference.
Possible values:Longest or Call Type (default)
•
Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the longest ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
•
Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to the longest ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed in software as shown below:
•
Emergency Calls
•
Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller)
•
ACD calls
•
Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
•
External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
•
Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)
16 Text Msg Display
Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message. Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values:Immediate (default) or Not Immediate
17 Call History
Memory
Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Possible values:0~100 (def = 0) Increments of 5 (0, 5, 10, 15, 20, … 100)
Note
Up to the system max: CIX40, 100 = 660, CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200
Basic = 1000, 670 Exp = 2000, CIX1200 Exp = 3000
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-13
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
19 Continuous
DTMF
20 Display
Language
21 Adapter
22 Blind Transfer
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end continuously as long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Note
•
For each iES32 PDN, set to 'Not Continuous' - if set to 'Continuous', outdial notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function properly.
•
DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF.
DKT1000 series telephones must be set to 'Not Continuous' or they will misdial.
Possible values:Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
Select the LCD Display Language.
Possible values:English (default), British English, French, Spanish
Note
The display language must also be set at IPT2008-SDL and
IP5131-SDL stations using access code #495.
Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
•
BPCI – for USB interface
•
BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface
Possible values:None (default), BPCI or BATI
Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values:Leave or Separate (default)
23 Mailbox Selection
Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set to Auto the CIX uses the VMID of the station initiating the record function.
Note
•
The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the
VM port or Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
•
When set to Auto the VMID of the station initiating the record function is sent to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
•
When set to Manual Input the user may enter any valid mailbox followed by the “#” sign. If the user presses “#” without additional data the CIX will send the VMID of the originating station.
Possible values:Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value
25 Microphone
Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speakerphone call.
Note
The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values:On (default) or Off
Enable microphone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
5-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
26 Speaker Mode
Tones
27 Call Waiting
Tones
28 Attd Overflow
Dest.
29 Trunk Test &
Verify
30 Auto Line Hold
31 Call Progress
Dependency
32 Programming
Mode
33 Stop Sending
LCD Data
34 Administrator
Phone
35 Pool Line Flash
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy
(ROB) Tone while on a speakerphone call.
Possible values:Yes (default) or No
Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Possible values:Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note
See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.
Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)
Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
Possible values:Yes or No (default)
Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line hop” from one call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Allows the telephone to be set to ring or not ring when busy on a call. If a telephone has multiple DNs (PDN + PhDNs) set this parameter to the Line
Mode.
Line Mode: Calls will ring the telephone when the user is talking on a line or
DN button if the telephone has multiple DN or line buttons in a hunt configuration. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set, the telephone will
Ring No Answer, and then forward when a call is delivered to the telephone while the user is talking on a DN or CO line button.
Terminal Mode: Callers will receive busy tone when any DN or CO line button on the telephone is in use. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set on the telephone, a call to the telephone will forward immediately when a call is delivered while the user is talking on any DN or CO line button.
Possible values:Line Mode (default) or Terminal Mode
Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode.
Disable: Restricts the telephone from entering the Programming Mode.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Turn this parameter On to stop sending LCD information to this port. This must be turned on for Stratagy iES32 voice assistant ports.
Possible values:On or Off (default = Off)
Enable to allow this telephone to function as an Administrator telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enable this feature if pooled line buttons should only flash when they ring this telephone. If disabled, pooled line buttons will flash on this telephone when the pooled line is ringing any telephone - even if not ringing this telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-15
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
36 Exclusive Hold
37 Dial Directory -
Off Hook
38 Dial Directory -
Make Call
39 LARGE LCD
PHONE
40 ADM1 - LCD
KEYSTRIP
41 ADM2 - LCD
KEYSTRIP
To Remove an
LM5110 Add-on
Module
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable: If the user presses the Hold button twice in succession the telephone places the current call on Exclusive Hold.
Disable: The telephone cannot place calls on Exclusive Hold.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Enable: Allows access to the telephone Dial Directory by going off-hook, pressing the Spkr button or pressing the first softkey on the left side of the
LCD.
Disable: Denies access to the telephone Dial Directory by going off-hook or pressing the Spkr button. User must press the first softkey on the left side of the LCD to access the Directory Dial feature.
Note
This option only applies to 7, 10, and 20 button telephones with small LCDs.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enable: Allows user to originate a call by going off-hook, pressing the Spkr button or pressing the CALL softkey after finding a name using the small
LCD telephone Dial Directory feature.
Disable: User must press the CALL softkey to originate a call using the small LCD telephone Directory Dial feature. After finding a name, nothing will happen when going off-hook or pressing the Spkr button.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Select DP5130/IP5131 if this is a DP5130-SDL/IP5131-SDL or DP5130-
FSDL large LCD telephone with programmable LCD keys.
Note
If this is a DP5130/IP5131 type telephone, 10 buttons must be selected in parameter 03 of this program.
Select NOT DP5130/IP5131 for all other telephone types.
Select LM5110 if Add-on-Module 1 is a LCD Line Module with programmable LCD keys.
Select NOT LM5110 for all other KM or DDADM types
Possible values:1: Not LM5110 (Default)
2: LM5110
Set this value to LM5110 if the add-on module 2 is an LCD line module with programmable LCD keys.
Possible values:1: Not LM5110 (Default)
2: LM5110
To remove an LM module (ADM 1 or ADM2)
1.
Change FK 40 for ADM1, change FK 41 for ADM 2 to Not LM5110 - then click on Submit.
2.
Change FK 4 to One or None as appropriate. - then click on Submit.
5-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
FB09
FB10
FB11
FB12
FB13
FB14
FB15
FB16
FB01
FB02
FB03
FB04
FB05
FB06
FB07
FB08
FB17
FB18
FB19
FB20
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for field 02 above.
Table 5-3 20 Button (when field 03 value is 20)
PATTERN1
Primary DN
CO 1
CO 2
CO 3
CO 4
CO 5
CO 6
CO 7
CO 8
CO 9
CO 10
CO 11
CO 12
CO 13
CO 14
CO 15
CO 16
CO 17
CO 18
Do Not Disturb
PATTERN2
Primary DN
CO 1
CO 2
CO 3
CO 4
CO 5
CO 6
CO 7
CO 8
CO 9
CO 10
CO 11
CO 12
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Do Not Disturb
PATTERN3
Primary DN
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
Table 5-4 10 Button (when field 03 value is 10)
FB01
FB02
FB03
FB04
FB05
FB06
FB07
FB08
FB09
FB10
PATTERN1
Primary DN
CO 1
CO 2
CO 3
CO 4
CO 5
CO 6
CO 7
CO 8
Do Not Disturb
PATTERN2
Primary DN
CO 1
CO 2
CO 3
CO 4
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Single Touch Button
Do Not Disturb
PATTERN3
Primary DN
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
Table 5-5 14 Button (when field 03 value is 14)
FB01
FB02
FB03
PATTERN1
Primary DN
CO 1
CO 2
PATTERN2
Primary DN
No Data
No Data
PATTERN3
Primary DN
No Data
No Data
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
5-17
Station
Assignment
Table 5-5 14 Button (when field 03 value is 14) (continued)
FB04
FB05
FB06
FB07
FB08
FB09
FB10
FB11
FB12
FB13
FB14
PATTERN1
CO 3
CO 4
CO 5
No Data
CO 7
CO 8
CO 9
CO 10
CO 11
Do Not Disturb
No Data
PATTERN2
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
PATTERN3
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
No Data
5-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station.
The assignment is referenced to the stations’s Primary DN.
1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the DSS tab.
3. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or click the list on the right side of the screen
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Prime DN
01~08 DSS Equipment No.
1~8
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).
Enter the DSS equipment number.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment = Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp. 01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp. 01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Note
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number, it must be deleted using PRG201 before attempting to assign the DSS console.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-19
Station
Assignment
205 / 213 / 215 Key
Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
and 204
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the Key tab.
Notes
To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2), field 04 (Add on Modules) in Program 204 must be set to One or Two.
3. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
• Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
• Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
• Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs or click one of the following buttons:
-
PDN Table View – view a detailed list of programmed DNs.
-
Copy – After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK
(range is permitted).
-
Cross Copy – This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station’s keypad to desired keys of other station keypads.
4. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
5. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
•
Directory No – Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting, or DSS key to this FB. See
”Directory Number Sub-parameters’ on page 5-23
for more details.
•
CO Lines – Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See
”CO Lines Sub-parameters’ on page 5-23 for more details.
•
Features – Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting, Split Key, or System Alarm feature to this FB.
•
Call Control – Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
•
Call Forward – Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
•
Park Page – Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
•
Call Pickup – Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-
Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
•
Door Lock – Enable FB to unlock Door Lock.
•
Voice Mail – Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
5-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
•
Attendant – Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
•
ACD – Assign Log In/Out, Available/Unavailable, Work Unit, ACD Help, ACD Pickup, End WrapUp,
Join ACD Call, Monitor ACD Call, Start/End Shift, Display Status, or UCD Agent Login/Out features to this FB.
•
One Touch – Assign FB as a One Touch button. See ”Setting the One Touch Button’ on page 5-21.
•
Split – Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) The Split button should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
•
Blank – Clear FB assignment.
6. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays an abbreviation for the selected feature or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are required. See the tables that follow for more details.
7. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box. To modify an existing feature button double-click the feature button and make the change in the appropriate dialog box that displays.
8. Click Submit.
Cross Copy
Use the following steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another station’s keypad:
1. From the Key Page, enter the Prime DN.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy button. The Source and Target
Copy screen displays (shown right). Enter the “Copy
To” PDNs or click Select to select the target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT, select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button.
6. Click Done. Target DKT with the copied key displays.
7. Verify the key copied.
Setting the One Touch Button
Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following steps:
1. Double-click the key assigned as One Touch.
2. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to Voice Mail.
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF displays in the One Touch Data field. Then type #407 after CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn #407 in the One Touch Data.
Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK as 01 if the PDN is on the first key then add the telephone number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous page.
DP5000 and IP5000 series Large Screen telephones can offer 10 more flexible keys. In addition to the added
10 keys, a dedicated Call History button gives access to the Caller ID history of incoming calls. Also, dial by name directory enables calling by pressing the button associated with the name of the person (R5.2 MT021 software or higher on Release 4.0 processors). On Strata CIX systems running this version of software the
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-21
Station
Assignment
DP5310-SDL, DP5130-FSDL and IP5131-SDL large screen telephones are provided with the following enhancements:
•
Flexible Key capacity - 10 Keys to 20 Keys using the Shift key.
•
Dedicated Call History Button using the History (Hist) key (DP5130-SDL & DP5130-FSDL only).
•
Enhanced Dial-By-Name Directory operation.
Shift Key and History Key
Two unused keys on the telephones, the bottom left and right keys become functional buttons. The “Shift” key toggles the LCD screen between flexible keys 1~10 and flexible keys 11~20; the “Hist” key accesses the Caller
ID history. These buttons have no function when the telephone is connected to a CIX system running on software released prior to R5.2 MT021.
Important!
Important Large Screen Telephone 20-Key Programming restrictions.
1.
All call buttons should be either on keys 1~10 or 11~20. Mixing call buttons on both screens
(keys 1~10 and 11~20) will cause user confusion. Call buttons include Directory Number buttons,
Pilot Number buttons, CO line, Pooled line, GCO line buttons, etc.
2.
DP5000-series Large Screen Telephones requiring Feature Flex and/or ACD application buttons cannot be set up in the 20-key configuration. Application buttons such as ACD Agent, ACD
Supervisor, Call Return, Call Monitor etc. are not currently compatible with Large screen 5000 series telephones in the 20-Key configuration they only function properly on the large screen 10key configuration.
To program the 20 flexible keys using Network eManager:
1.
In Prog 204 set 03 - Keystrip Button Quantity to 20 and 39 - Large LCD Phone to 20
2.
In Stations > Station Assignment > Key set flexible buttons
Shift and Hist Key Operation
Shift Key Operation
At any time, press the Shift key to alternate between the keys 1~10 and keys 11~20.
Shift to Answer calls
If the LCD screen is set to view keys 11~20 and a call comes in on key 1 the phone will ring and Caller ID information will display on the top of the screen - press the Shift key to view keys 1~10 and answer the call.
Hist Key Operation
At any time while your phone is idle press the Hist key to view and dial Caller ID numbers stored in the station history log. Press the Hist key when the phone is idle. Use the soft keys to view and place calls. Note: The phone must have Caller ID history programmed.
5-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Directory Number Sub-parameters
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Secondary/Phantom DN
Phantom DN Message
Warning
1.
Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2.
Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)
1.
Enter DN Number.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
2.
Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3.
Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)
Enter Phantom DN No.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
DSS Key
Enter DSS Primary DN No.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
Station
Assignment
CO Lines Sub-parameters
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
CO
1.
Select CO Line #.
Possible values:1~56 (CIX200), 1~64 (CIX100), 1~96 (CIX670 Basic, CIX1200
Basic), 1~264 (CIX670 Exp, CIX 1200 Exp A), 1~440 (CIX1200 Exp
B), (default = no value)
2.
Enter Owner DN.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
3.
Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4.
Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-23
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
GCO
Pooled Line Key
D
ESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
Select GCO No.
Possible values:1~20 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic, CIX1200 Basic), 1~32 (CIX100),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 1~220 (CIX1200 Exp B),
(default = no value)
Select Index.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~220 (CIX1200)
(default = no value)
Enter Owner DN.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
4.
5.
Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
Select Tone Pitch. 1~4 (default = 1)
1.
Select Pool Line No.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200 Basic), 1~‘28
(CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A) 1~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)
2.
Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3.
Select Tone Pitch. 1~4 (default = 1)
Door Lock Sub-parameters
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Door Unlock
Select Door Lock No.
Possible values:1~10 (default = 1)
5-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
208 Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program:
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
F
IELD
1. Select: Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the Timer tab.
3. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
•
List – select from the list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
4. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults.
6. Click Submit
D
ESCRIPTION
Prime DN
01 Automatic Busy Redial
Retry Count
Enter the Prime DN.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone number.
Possible values:5~20 (default = 15)
02 Automatic Busy Redial
Retry Interval Timer
03 Automatic Busy Redial
Recall Timer
04 Hold Recall Timer
05 First Interdigit Timer
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Possible values:30~180 (default = 60)
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring back tone from the dialed number.
Possible values:5~60 (default = 20)
Select the number of seconds before a held call recalls.
Possible values:0~255 (default = 60)
Enter the First Interdigit Timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 15)
06 Second Interdigit Timer
07 Ring Xfer No Answer
Timer
08 SLT MW Lamp Signal
Timer
09 Analog Station
Disconnect Signal Timer
Enter the Second Interdigit Timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 5)
Enter the Ring Xfer No Answer Timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~600 (default = 32)
The time in seconds to wait before sending the Message Waiting Lamp signal to a standard telephone.
Note
Some SLTs do not support MW lamps
Possible values:1(Default) - 10; 0 = MW signal not sent
The time in seconds, after the the disconnect until the disconnect signal is sent.
Possible values:1~120 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-25
Station
Assignment
216 Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program:
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
F
IELD
1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.
2. Click on the RingDown tab.
3. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
•
List – select from the list on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
4. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults
6. Click Submit
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Emergency
Ringdown
Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
02 Emergency
Ringdown Timer
03 Emergency
Ringdown
Destination
Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency.
Possible values:0~60 (default = 0)
Note
For DKT, IP, and IPT stations, do not set the time to more than 30 seconds.
Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
5-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program:
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
F
IELD
1. Select > Station > Phantom DN.
2. Enter a Phantom DN number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed Phantom DNs.
• Copy – Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to copy the data to. Click OK.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Phantom DN
01 Owner PDN
Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Set Phantom DN's Owner Station.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Tone/Voice First
04 Display DN
05 System Call
Forward
Choose Tone First or Voice First signaling.
Possible values:Tone First (default) or Voice First
Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN number.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, field 04 (if assigned) and if the Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN the number displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, field 04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
… or this number in Program 200, field 15 (if assigned).
… or the calling telephone's PDN.
Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200 Basic), 0~32 (CIX 670
Exp.), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp), (default = 0)
06 VM ID Code
Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice mail; or when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, field 11~field 16).
Possible values:Digits 0~9,
*
and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note
Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, field 06).
The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, field 19) will be sent to voice mail.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-27
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
09 Message Center
10 LCD Name
11 Display Name
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PhDN.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
5-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program:
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
F
IELD
1. Select > Station > Hunt Group.
2. Click on the Group tab.
3. Enter a Group Number for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
•
List - View list of programmed hunt groups.
• Create – Assign a new hunt group with custom settings.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Hunt Group Number
01 Hunt Method
Hunt Group Number
Possible values:1~90 (CTX28, CIX40 CTX100), 1~200 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~640 (CTX670 Exp) 1~200 (CTX1200 Basic HCTU only), 1~1100
(CTX670 Exp HEXAU or HEXBU)
(default = no value)
Select Hunt Method
Possible values:Distributed (for voice mail and UCD hunt groups - MAS Voice Mail
Ports connected to a GIPx, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS interface that should be set as IP Voice Mail, or Circular (for Multiple DN hunt groups)
(default)
02 Pilot Number
Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group can have a pilot number.
Note
Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups must have a pilot number. Voice mail hunt groups should be distributed with a
Pilot Number. Multiple DN hunt groups should be circular with no Pilot
Number.
04 Number to Display
Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the hunt group.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt groups. This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN hunt group, in which case the number would override the number assigned in Program 200, field
15 for PDNs and Program 206, field 04 for Phantom DNs.
05 Pilot No. SCFwd
Allows you to assign a system call forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a hunt group.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670 & CIX200
Basic), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~10 (CIX200 Basic HCTU only),
0~48 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU)
(default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-29
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
06 Muitple DN Hunt
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups should be circular with no pilot number. Set to disable for UCD group.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
07 DHG Auto CampOn
Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the distributed hunt group or not.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Should be applied to VM Distributed hunt groups so callers automatically camp on to voice mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to circular or serial hunt groups.
Set to Enable for UCD group
08 UCD Enable/
Disable
To turn on or off the Universal Call Distribution feature.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
09 UCD MOH Source
Select which MOH interface will be connected to the music source of the Universal
Call Distribution. This source will be played to calls in the UCD Queue.
Possible values:No MOH Source, BIOU-1-J1~J3, processor MOH Jack, BIOU-2-
J1~J3, XSTU-1~8
Note
Maximum 128 calls in queue at one time.
10 UCD Overflow
Timer
11 UCD RBT Timer
The number of calls waiting in the queue times the number of agents in the system must be less than 128. For example, two UCD groups - group #1 has
10 agents and group #2 has 15 agents. Group #1 can have only 3 calls queued (10x3 = 30) when group #2 already has 6 calls in the queue (15x6 =
90). A total of 120.
Select the amount of time that UCD calls should remain in the UCD Queue before they overflow.
Possible values:1 to 3600 seconds in 1 second intervals (default = 300 seconds)
Note
The overflow destination is the destination assigned to the UCD Pilot System
Call Forward-No Answer Timer.
If no UCD agents are available when a call is routed to the UCD group the caller will hear Ring Back Tone (RBT) for the length of time set for this timer. After this time expires the caller will be routed from RBT to the UCD MOH interface.
Possible values:0~30
Default = 10
5-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program:
This program assigns station DNs to hunt groups using Program 209 and assigns the rotation order in which DNs are hunted.
F
IELD
1. Select Station > Hunt Group.
2. Click on the Member tab.
3. Enter a Member Number for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List –Select from the list of programmed hunt groups on the right side of the screen.
• Insert – Assign a new station DN to the hunt group number entered above.
• Append – Assign a new DN as the last DN in a hunt group’s hunt order.
• Modify – Highlight an existing DN in the hunt order and change the station DN assignment.
• Delete – Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Hunt Group Number
Enter an existing hunt group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete buttons as described above.
Possible values:0~18 (CTX28), 0~32 (CIX40), 0~90 (CIX/CTX100), 0~200 (CIX/
CTX670 & CIX200 Basic), 0~640 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~200 (CIX1200
Basic HCTU only),
Possible values:0~1100 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU) (default = no value)
Hunt Order
DN
Set Type
This field assigns a station DN position within a hunt group’s hunt order. The hunt order is selected automatically by Strata eManager. Programmers should assign the last station in the hunt order first and assign the first station in the hunt order last.
Possible values:1~72 (CIX100), 1~160 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
1~560 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 1~1100 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)
By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the hunt group’s hunt order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Insert, Append, Modify (replace), Delete an existing assignment.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-31
Station
Assignment
Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View enables you to view all hunt groups and its members.
To access the Hunt Group Table View
Select Station > Hunt Group Table View.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Note This table has more functions in addition to the regular functionality found in other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
• Delete – Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group then click the Delete button.
When the Delete button is active the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active. To unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
• Add – To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the Hunt Group in the table view from the
Navigation drop down in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.
If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the Add button to add members to Hunt Groups.
When you click the Add button the Add dialog box displays.
Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box, then click the Arrow button in the center. This moves the DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add Now to Save the entry or Cancel to cancel.
Clicking Add Now automatically refreshes the table view.
In the dialog box, if you want 6200 to appear before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on the left and then click the arrow in the center.
• Select All and Unselect All – Clicking these buttons selects or unselects all groups in a table.
5-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
502 Paging Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
F
IELD
1. Select Station > Paging Group.
2. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
•
List – select from a summary list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
•
Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Primary DN
Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to paging groups. A station may belong to more than one paging group.
Note
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the CIX200, CIX670 & CIX1200.
Page Group capacity:
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
• CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value))
01~16 Page Group
(CIX40, 100,
670)
19-26 for PG17~24
(CIX1200 only)
Check to assign the DN to this paging group.
Page Group capacity:
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
• CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note Note: You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata
CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/
670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-33
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
17 All Call Page
Group
18 All Call
Emergency Page
Group
19 Page Group
17~24
D
ESCRIPTION
Check to assign the DN to this paging group.
Page Group capacity:
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
• CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note Note: You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata
CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/
670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default))
Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
Page Group capacity:
CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Check to assign the DN to this paging group.
Page Group capacity:
CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
5-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View enables you to view all paging groups and its members.
To access the Paging Group Table View
Select Station > Paging Group Table View, or if you are in Prog 502, click Terminal Paging Group Table
View.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add, Select All and Unselect All, refer to
”Hunt Group Table View’ on page 5-32
Note The Add button works a little different on this table. When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays. Select the entry by clicking on it and then click the Add Now button.
210 Pickup Group
Prerequisite Program:
The Call Pickup Group assignments specify which group numbers this station will participate in when either the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to more than one group.
1. Select Station > Pickup Group.
2. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
•
List – select from a summary list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
•
Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
Click Submit
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01~48
Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this station is to participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values:check = On; or unchecked = Off (default)
Note
01~05 CIX40/100 and CTX28, 01~10 CIX200/670/1200 Basic,
01~32 CIX670 Expanded, 01~48 CIX1200 Expanded.
Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View enables you to view all Pickup groups and members.
To access the Paging Group Table View
Select Station > Pickup Group Table View. If you are in Prog 210, click the Call Pickup Group Table View
button.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
.
Note The Add button works a little different on this table. When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays. Select the entry by clicking on it and then click the Add Now button.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-35
Station
Assignment
Multiple Call Group
To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517. You can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member to be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently adjustable
(1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important!
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs. See Member Requirements below.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Incoming Call to Multiple Call (MC) Group
The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
• If the members of an MC Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all destinations immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call information.
• If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important!
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
• If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming calls ring only idle destinations. However, if the camp-on feature is in effect incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
• Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.
MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to an MC group the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is considered the owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following privileges:
•
The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
• The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
•
The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.
5-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.
Members that can be in a Group
PDNs
PhDNs
Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs
Members that cannot be in a Group
Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP
CO Line Access Codes
Attendant Consoles and BATI or DKTs assigned to the Attendant in programming.
Important!
•
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and PhDNs.
•
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt Group Pilot
Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
•
Attendant Consoles cannot be members of multiple call groups and cannot overflow to MC groups.
Assigning Attendant Consoles to MC groups will cause Attendant Consoles to malfunction. Do not set
Attendant Consoles to overflow to MC groups.
Call Forward Activation
System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each Multiple Calling (MC) Group. The Call Forward
Remote Access Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call
Forward is activated/deactivated using Strata eManager. The MC Group can also be set as the destination of System or Station Call Forward.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-37
Station
Assignment
517, 519 Multiple Call Group Assignment
Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.
1. Select Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the dialog box.The calling group index can be:
1~16 (CIX100), 1~32 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~64 (CIX670 Expanded) 1~32 (CIX1200 Basic), 1-96
(CIX1200 Expanded)
4. Click OK. Parameter - 01 MC Group Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This number should not conflict with an existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number
Select a group number.
Possible values:1~16 CTX28, 1~16 CIX40, 1~16 CTX/CIX/100, 1~32 CIX200,
1~32 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~64 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~32 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~96 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXBU
01 MC Group Pilot Number
Enter the pilot directory number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number, 1~5 digits, that does not conflict with numbers in the current system number plan.
Possible values:1~5 digits (default = no data)
02 Ring Delay 1 Timer
03 Ring Delay 2 Timer
04 System Call Forward
Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 12)
Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 24)
Assign a system call forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Possible values:0~4 CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40, 0~10 CIX/CTX670 &
CIX200 Basic, 0~32 CIX/CTX670 Exp., 0~10 CIX200 Basic
HCTU only, 0~48 CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU
(default = 0)
05 Voice Mail ID
Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the multiple calling group.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no data).
5-38
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
518 Multiple Call Group Members Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
517
Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. Select > Station > Multiple Call Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
3. Select the Index Number, then enter the Member DN.
Important!
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard Telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.
Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty index number the Add button displays. When you select an existing index number the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number
Multiple Call Group Number
CIX100, enter 1~16. CIX200, CIX670 Basic enter 1~32.
CIX670 Exp enter 1~64, CIX1200 Basic, enter 1~32, CIX1200 Exp enter 1~96
03 Member DN
Select an index to a add a new member to this MC Group; or select an existing
Member DN to Modify or Delete the member.
To add a Member DN, enter a PDN, PhDN, or Hunt Group Pilot number that exists in the system, then select which ringing option should be assigned to the member (Member DNs can be in multiple MC Groups).
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = No Data)
04 Ringing Options
Select: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2 ring.
Note
•
Immediate ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 1 & 2 ring assignments ring.
•
Delay 1 ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 2 ring assignments ring.
•
Delay ring PDN and PhDN buttons will flash red and not ring immediately after the MC Group is called; they will ring and flash green when their delay ring timers expire.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-39
Station
Assignment
516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program:
Up to 100 pre-programmed speed dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station. speed dial numbers are stored in “bins” and each station accesses the speed dial numbers by entering the speed dial bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced speed dialing features are available in Strata CIX.
• Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a speed dial number exceeds the 32-digit speed dial bin memory limitation the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent speed dial bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary speed dial bin number.
Note Bin-linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the “adjacent speed dial bin” as described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess digits recorded in the next bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique speed dial record.
• Speed Dial Number Nesting – A speed dial number can be nested into another speed dial number. For example, if an international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any speed dial bin. Then in another speed dial bin program the first bin number + the number to dial. When the second speed dial bin is activated, Strata CIX first retrieves and dials the international dialing prefix from the first bin location, then adds the numbers to dial.
1. Select Station > Speed Dial.
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Prime DN
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
01 Speed Dial Index
Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed dial bins.
Possible values:00~99 (default = no value)
Note
Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of speed dial bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of speed dial bins available to the station can also be assigned and displayed in Prog 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins.
Example: If bin number 50 is entered here, 50 speed dial bins will automatically be assigned to the station and will also be displayed in
Prog 200, 35.
5-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
02 Number
D
ESCRIPTION
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of the pause, 0=10 seconds.
Note
•
If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to create longer numbers.
•
Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing common numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits
1010321, these digits can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using
*100 as the first digits of the other bins. Example: Putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would cause SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number 10132117145563425.
•
If you are programming from the telephone, the digits
* and # have a special meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the end of entry and
*
is an escape character. To dial the digits
*
or # as part of the number; enter
**
or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents the number of seconds for the pause function.
03 Speed Dial Name
Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values:Up to 8 characters (default = no value)
Dialing Code
Dial code that user accesses from the phone.
Station Speed Dial Table View
Station Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.
To access the System Speed Dial Table View
Select System > System Speed Dial Table View or from the program (516), click the Station Speed Dial
Table View button.
See Table Views on page 2-17 for table functionality.
PDN Table View
This screen shows the entire list of available PDNs.
To access the Station Speed PDN Table View
Select Station > PDN Table View.
Note See Table Views on page 2-17 for table functionality.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-41
Station
Assignment
ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217
202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI stations.
1. Select Station > Basic ISDN.
2. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
•
List – view a summary list of programmed DNs.
•
Create – Assign a new Primary DN with custom BRI Station settings.
•
Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
•
Delete – Enter an ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.
•
Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
•
Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Primary DN
01 PDN Equipment No.
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a
new station. The system assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data
.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the
PDN is or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Exp cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Exp cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for each Exp cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for each Exp cabinet
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots
02 ISDN Channel Group
Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic)1~128 (CIX670
Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX1200 Exp A), 1~220
(CIX1200 Exp B) (default = 1)
5-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
03 ISDN Protocol
04 Type Connection
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in the hardware level.
Possible values:Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
Note
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
Select Point to Point or Point to Multi-point connection type.
Possible values:Point to Point (default) or Point to Multi-point
Select the BRI Station Class of Service assignments.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
05 COS
• Day1 COS
• Day2 COS
• Night COS
06 DRL
• Day1 DRL
• Day2 DRL
• Night DRL
07 FRL
• Day1 FRL
• Day2 FRL
• Night FRL
08 LCR Group
Select the BRI Station Destination Restriction Level assignments.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select the BRI Station Facilities Restriction Level assignments.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
09 QPL
• Day1 QPL
• Day2 QPL
• Night QPL
10 Speech Capability
Select the Least Cost Routing Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
11 3.1KHz Audio
12 7KHz Audio
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
15 2x64Kbps
Unrestricted
Bearer Capability Speech See Table 5-6 on page 46 .
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Bearer Capability 3.1kHzAudio See
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Bearer Capability 7kHzAudio. See
.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 64kbps. See Table 5-6 on page
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 56kbps
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 2x64kbps
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-43
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
16 B Channel Selection
17 Idle B Channel
Selection
18 Interdigit Timer 1
19 Interdigit Timer 2
20 CESID
21 Number Voice Calls
Allowed
22 Service Tone
Permission
23 TGAC Override
24 Set System Speed
Dial
25 Network COS
26 DN2~32 DN8
D
ESCRIPTION
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
•
Exclusive – (default) Channel is indicated and no alternative is acceptable.
•
Preferred – Channel is indicated and any alternative is acceptable.
•
Any Channel – Channel is indicated and any channel is acceptable.
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
•
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
•
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
•
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low Bchannel selection).
•
Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High
B-channel selection)
Select the Interdigit timer value to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 15)
Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 5)
Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values:One or Two (default)
Note
If One is selected the other channel is reserved for Data.
Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available fields, default data as defined in
is applied to the DNs. If a selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
5-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
33 Auto OCA
34 Originate OCA
35 Station SpDial Bins
36 Call Forward Dial
Tone
37 Dialing Digit
Restriction
38 MW Stuttered Dial
Tone
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows calls to be received.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Possible values: maximum=100
When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is enabled
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
After the ISDN extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any subsequent digits.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a message waiting indication, and the station will receive a busy tone burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
39 Tenant Number
40 Auto-Campon to PDN
This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN even when it is busy and called by a CO line. If automatic camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can campon even if the CO line group has auto camp-on disabled in Prog 304-17.
Possible values:Enable: Allow auto camp-on to PDN or Disable: No auto camp-on to PDN
41 LCR PDN Code
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1 ~ 8 (default = 1)
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The
PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values:Three Digits or Four Digits (default = Three Digits)
42 Network Calling
Number
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network, this number will be sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end node (providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the
Caller ID number at the terminating external telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is originated, nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no data)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-45
Station
Assignment
Table 5-6 BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Circuit
Mode
Bearer Services
Speech
3.1kHz Audio
7kHz Audio
Unrestricted Digital
Information
64 kbps
Rate adaptation from 56 kbps
2x64
Bellcore Nat’l ISDN
X
X
ETSI
X
X
X
X X
X
X
TTC
X
X
X
X
X
217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program:
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
F
IELD
1. Select Station > ISDN Station Data.
2. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Primary DN
01 Station LCD Name
02 Dial Method
Enter Primary DN.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN. (Max.
8 characters with R1.0~R2.20; Max.16 characters with R2.21 and above.
Possible values:Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values:Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone
03 System Call Forward
04 CF Password
05 Door Phone Override
DND
Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~32 (CIX670 Exp), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp) (default = 0)
Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
5-46
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Assignment
F
IELD
06 Emerg Call Group
07 COS Override Code
08 Display DN
09 VMID Code
12 Name Display
13 CPN Presentation to
SBus
D
ESCRIPTION
Select this station’s emergency call group.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)
Enable Class of Service Override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Possible values:Digits 0~9,
*
and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Prog 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.
Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Determine what is sent to an SBus extension from an incoming ISDN trunk
Possible values:DN, CPN or DN AND CPN (default = DN)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-47
Station
Setup Wizards
Setup Wizards
There are three station setup wizards—PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are described below.
PDN Range Setup Wizard
This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.
1. Select Station > DN Setup > PDN Range.
Review the instructions that display on the Wizard screen.
2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup Wizard screen displays.
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons and enter the data in the other fields.
•
Range of associated PDN equipment.
•
Selection to overwrite the existing PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments displays.
Note The first available equipment number (card slot/circuit) is automatically used to create the first PDN, etc.
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard
Important!
•
To avoid conflicts on new installations you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.
•
The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.
This wizard substantially reduces CIX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on telephones.
Multiple DNs are required in most CIX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone’s PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone—this simulates Strata DK multiple
PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.
Important!
Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple DN assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN assignments in this version of Strata eManager.
5-48
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Station
Setup Wizards
1. Select Station > DN SetUp > Multiple DN.
2. Click Start. Strata eManager automatically assigns the:
•
Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.
CAUTION!
If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.
•
Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons starting with the PhDN you specified.
•
PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
•
PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting with the Hunt group number you specified.
3. Based on your requirements, enter the necessary fields.
4. Click Start to generate the request. The screen will change.
Important!
•
This is a report that provides the Multiple DN assignments that will be sent to the CIX.
•
Ensure that this information is correct before you click Continue. You can change the assignments by clicking Back.
5. Click Continue to generate results into the CIX database.
Note To modify these entries later you will have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how the multiple DNs are assigned in the CIX after the wizard is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results, click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program pane.
VMID Range
This wizard reduces CIX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select the VMID code assignment method.
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
• Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
• Start at a specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
• Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or back of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.
1. Select Station > DN Setup > VMID Range.
2. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range Setup Wizard displays.
3. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the assignment method and the digits, if any, to be added to front and/or end of each VMID. DN range is supported. VMID prefix and/or suffix are supported. Click Start to submit the settings to the CIX database.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
5-49
Station
Setup Wizards
User Setup
The User Setup wizard takes you through the process of creating a customer database. The first of the two screens presents you with the following question: What do you want to do?
•
Create Primary Extensions with Mailbox
•
Created Primary Extensions sharing the same mailbox
•
Create mailboxes and route them to the same extension
•
Create Primary Extensions without mailboxes
•
Create mailboxes without extensions
The second screen is for advanced users:
• Create Primary Extensions
• Assign Mailbox NUmbers to Extensions
• Create mailboxes and assign extensions for Auto Attendant
• Assign User Names to mailboxes and extension LCD screen.
5-50
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
6
This chapter provides trunk programming information for the Strata CIX.
304, 305 Incoming Line Group
Program Number(s): 304
Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for incoming service.
1. Select Trunk > ILG.
2. Enter an ILG number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – select from the summary list of ILGs on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new ILG with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an ILG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new ILG assignment with settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an ILG.
• Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 304 data.
4. Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-1
Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Group Number
01 Group Type
02 Line Type
03 CO Service Type
04 Private Service Type
05 GCO Key Number
06 Pooled Key Number
07 COS
08 DRL
09 FRL
Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, 670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)
Select the ILG Type.
Possible values:Analog (default) or ISDN
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values:CO (default) or Tie
Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values:DID or DIT (default)
Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is
Tie.
Possible values:Standard (default) or StrataNet
Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same
GCO cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If CO keys are assigned in PRG205 to ring lines in this group, GCO assignments will be ignored and will not ring
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)
Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If GCO or CO keys are assigned to ring lines in this group, Pooled key assignments will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp)
(default = no value)
Select Class of Service Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
Select Destination Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select Facilities Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
6-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
10 QPL
11 DID Digits
12 Speech/3.1 KHz
13 Delay1 Ringing Timer
14 Delay2 Ringing Timer
15 Interdigit 1 Timer
16 Interdigit 2 Timer
17 Auto Campon
18 Calling Number ID
19 Intercept
20 Send Dial Tone
21 TGAC Override
22 Network COS
23 LCR Group
D
ESCRIPTION
Select Queuing Priority Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values:0~7 (default = 0)
Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values:Audio (default) or Speech
Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 12)
Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 24)
Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 15)
Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 5)
Enable Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable.
Select whether the Calling Number Identification is provided by the User side or
Network side.
Possible values:User Provided (default) or Network Provided
Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a simplified attendant console, the attendant console is usually specified to terminate the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Whether or not to send dial tone to the originating system (for Tie trunks).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enter the COS to be used in Traveling Classmark for Strata Net.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not entered.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-3
Trunks
F
IELD
24 Change COS Override
Code
25 Register Speed Dial
Codes
26 Originator Invoke OCA
27 Senderized Tone Mode
28 Emergency Call Group
29 Tenant Number
30 Call-By-Call Cause
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a busy station.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values:Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
Used to enable E911 calling across a Strata Net network. The Strata Net ILG is assigned to an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program
200 field 17. Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to one of the trunks in the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call.
See Program 550, Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:1~8.
Enter the condition for which incoming ISDN calls disconnect when programmed for Call-By-Call (min./max.).
User Busy: Cause 17
Circuit/Channel congestion: Cause 34
6-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
F
IELD
1. Select > Trunk > OLG.
2. Enter an OLG number in the Group Number field for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
•
List – choose a summary list of programmed OLGs on the right side of the screen.
•
Create – Assign a new OLG with default settings.
•
Copy – Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
•
Delete – Delete an OLG.
•
Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 306 data.
4. Enter Program 531. See “DR Overview” on page 9-6 for details.
5. Enter Program 514. See “514 SMDR for OLG Assignment” on page 9-45
for details.
6. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Group Number
Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
01 Group Type
02 Trunk Type
03 Service Type
04 GCO Key1 Number
Select the OLG Type.
Possible values:Analog (default), ISDN, SIP
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values:CO (default) or Tie
Service Type.
Possible values:Standard (default) or StrataNet
Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-5
Trunks
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
06 Pooled Key1 Number
Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
07 Pooled Key2 Number
Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
08 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
09 FRL
10 QPL
11 Speech/3.1 KHz
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values:Audio (default) or Speech
12 MOH Source
13 Account Code
14 Destination
Restriction
15 Credit Cart Calling
Select MOH Source.
Possible values:Silence, External1~15, Internal (default)
Whether or not Forced Account Code is applied when using this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Whether or not Destination Restriction is applied when using this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Whether or not to enable Credit Card Calling using this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
16 Send CESID
17 QSIG Sending Type
18 Network COS
19 Recall on AC15
Whether or not E911 CESID information is sent (enabled) on this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Digit sending mode for Strata Net only.
Possible values:Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)
Select Network COS number.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
This enables or disables the sending and detection of a recall signal on AC15 TIE lines. (This applies to the PACU PCBs only.)
Possible values: Enable of Disable (default = Disable)
6-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
300, 301 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate through the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first column displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based on trunks and equipment.
Important!
You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6, or higher, on your PC for the sort to work correctly.
1. Select > Trunk > Trunk Assignments.
2. Enter a Trunk Number or click one of the following buttons:
• List –choose from the summary list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete a trunk.
• Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
4. Click Submit.
5. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see
“308 Trunk Timer” on page 6-12
for details).
Note When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set Release Supervision and Answer Supervision to Enabled.
F
IELD
Line Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Line Number.
Possible values:1-6 CTX28, 1-31 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-7
Trunks
F
IELD
01 Line Equipment No.
02 Incoming Line Group
03 Outgoing Line Group
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the line equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new line to the system.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~32
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit
3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.
Assign the trunk to an Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX
670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU +
BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Assign the trunk to an Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU
(default = 0)
6-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
04 Dial Mode
05 Signaling
06 Start Method
07 Release Supervision
08 Answer Supervision
09 Trunk Name
10 External Ring Repeat
11 DTMF Back Tone
12 Hunt Order
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values:DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
•
DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
•
DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
Enter the signaling type.
Possible values:DID,
Loop
(default)
,
Ground, Tie, LP (Jpn), SR (Jpn) or ACU (UK)
Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between the PSTN and this trunk (for DID/Tie trunks).
Possible values:Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start
Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
Possible values:Received or Not Received (default)
Note
When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or
M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.
Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values:Received or Not Received (default)
Note
When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or
M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.
Enter the trunk name.
Possible values:Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings the telephone. Select Supplied (CO Ring Repeat) to use the ring signal supplied by the CO or Centrex line. Select Not Supplied (CIX Ring) to use the standard ring signal supplied by the CIX.
Important! Ring Not Supplied must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing operation.
Possible values:Supplied (CO Repeat) - (default) or Not Supplied (CIX Ring)
Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values:Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
The order within the trunks OLG in which the trunk will be seized for outgoing calls.
Enter 1 for the first trunk seized, 2=next trunk, etc. Enter 999 for the last trunk to be seized.
Possible values:1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-9
Trunks
F
IELD
13 Immediate Cut-
Through
14 CO Line Guard Time
D
ESCRIPTION
This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values:Enable, Disable (default)
CAUTION!
This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911 digit analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where these functions are required.
This option is available only on Ground and Loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should not be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and StrataNet lines.
The interval between the release of a CO line and its eligibility to be seized again.
6-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for T1 and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, then click the Caller ID tab.
2. Enter a Trunk Number in Line No.for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
•
List – choose from the summary list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter the Trunk Number in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID trunk numbers.
3. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
4. Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Line Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values:1-6 CTX28, 1-30 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)
01 Signaling Method
02 Signaling Contents
Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values:Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)
Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values:ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no value).
03 CLASS Equipment No.
If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit.
Enter the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
04 Caller ID Ring Start
Notes
•
CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to an RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
•
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Assigns when an incoming call on an RCOU/RCOS analog line with RCIU/RCIS
Caller ID should start ringing a station.
Note
Does not apply to BCOCIU/BCOCIS interface cards.
Possible values:Enable - the call will ring the station as soon as the Caller ID data is sent on the line. Disable - the line will ring the station on the second ring signal sent from the PSTN. Default=Disable
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-11
Trunks
308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, Timer tab.
2. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 308 data.
•
List – choose from the summary list of programmed trunks timers on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – to copy to trunk timer ports.
•
Get Default - restores data to factory settings.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Line No.
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08 or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.
6-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
01 Auto Release
02 Short Flash
03 Long Flash
D
ESCRIPTION
The Automatic Release timing: Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release signal on the Loop start line. If the CO does send the auto release signal, also known as Calling Party Control, set the detect duration time to 95ms or 450ms depending how long the CO opens the loop to disconnect the line.
Possible values:Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
Select Short Flash Time
Possible values:0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. – 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most common duration of a hookflash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line (using the short Flash feature button or access code #450). The duration of a short flash is determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hookflash a centrex line. The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.
Select Long Flash Time.
Possible values:0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line (using the Long Flash feature button or access code #451). The duration of a long flash is determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no flash,
5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.
04 Pause after Flash
05 Response Timer
Pause time after flash. After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values:0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5 sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)
The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start method” set for
“Timing” in Prog 300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values:0=immediatly sent, and 50 msec.delay to 500 msec.delay
(default = 500 msec delay before sending digits)
06 Call Abandon Timer
The interval after which the CIX stops sending ring tone to stations when an incoming call is abandoned (caller hangs up before the call is answered).
Possible values: 6 Seconds or 8 Seconds (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-13
Trunks
310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and Loop start trunks.
F
IELD
1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, DIT tab.
2. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 310 data.
•
List – to view a summary list of programmed trunks timers.
•
Copy – to copy to trunk timer ports.
3. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Line No.
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08 or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.
6-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
01 Day1 Destination Type
02 Day2 Destination Type
03 Night Destination Type
Day1 Destination Digits
Day2 Destination Digits
Night Destination Digits
04 MOH Source
D
ESCRIPTION
Select Destination Type for each.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
Bell
•
No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•
Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
•
DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be returned to the caller.
•
Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
•
Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close
/ 3-sec. open)
Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing
Digits is selected as Destination Type.
•
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the line should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external Page group number.
•
If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the leading digits.
•
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Select the Music On Hold source for the line. Quiet Tone means no music on hold for the selected line.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External1~15, Internal (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-15
Trunks
309, 312 Direct Inward Dialing
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Select > Trunk > DID.
2. Select an ILG Group Number.
3. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID Number field or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from the list of programmed DIDs on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
• Copy – Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
• Delete – Delete a DID.
• Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
4. Enter DID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
ILG Group Number
01 DID Number
02 MOH Source
03 GCO Key Group
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the ILG number.
Possible values:1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or
BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU (default = 0)
Enter a DID number.
Possible values:1~7 digits may include wild card “?” where “?” = 0~9 (default = no value).
Set Music On Hold source for the DID number. Quiet tone means no music on hold for the selected DID number.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1~15, or Internal (default)
Enter GCO Key Group Number that should ring for this line group.
Note: If CO Key or Dialing Digits are assigned as a ringing destination this assignment will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
6-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
04 Pooled Key Group
05 Audio Day1 Dst
Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst
Type
07 Audio Night Dst
Type
Audio Day1 Dest
Audio Day2 Dest
Audio Night Dest
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type
D
ESCRIPTION
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO, or a Pooled line key, enter the
Destination type that should ring:
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec.close/3-sec.open).
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO, or a Pooled line key, enter the
Destination type that should ring:
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3sec.open).
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Select the Destination Type for data calls.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-17
Trunks
F
IELD
Data Day1 Destination
Data Day2 Destination
Data Night Destination
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
•
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This code is replaced after voice mail answers by the DTMF code set in Program 309, 15
DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed. Therefore, if using Program 309,
15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mailbox number is sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mailbox.
This Voice Mailbox number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DID/DNIS Name
15 VM Application
Digits
16 Tenant Number
Enter DNIS name. Names are assigned from eManager (not programming phones).
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values:Digits 0~9,
*
and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mailbox.
This voice mailbox number is sent to the VM port as DTMF digits after the VM port answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:1(default)~8.
6-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
F
IELD
1. Select > Trunk > DID Intercept.
2. Enter an ILG Number or choose from the list of programmed ILGs on the right side of the screen.
3. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
4. Enter DID Intercept Assignment data.
5. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
ILG Number
01 Type
Enter ILG number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU
(default = 0)
No DID - set destination that should ring when the received DID number does not match DID numbers in this group's DID table.
Not Determined - set the destination that should ring when the normal programmed ringing destination is disconnected.
Possible values:No DID (default) or Not Determined
02 MOH Source
03 Group CO Destination
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)
04 Pooled Line Group
Select Music On Hold.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1~15, or Internal (default)
POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-19
Trunks
F
IELD
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Audio Day2 Dst DN
Audio Night Dst DN
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
10 Data Night Dst Type
Data Day1 Dst DN
Data Day2 Dst DN
Data Night Dst DN
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
•
No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•
Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
•
DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be returned to the caller.
•
Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
•
Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3sec.open)
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the destination type is Dialing Digits.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Select the data call Day1 destination type.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
•
No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
•
Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
•
DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be returned to the caller.
•
Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
•
Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close /
3-sec. open).
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the destination type is Dialing Digits.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
6-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
F
IELD
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
12 DID/DNIS Name
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
VMID
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This code will be replaced after voice mail answers by the DTMF code set in Program 318,
15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed. Therefore, if using Program
318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number, or the forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting. DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mailbox.
This Voice Mailbox number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from eManager (not from programming phones).
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards to voice mail, the mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's
VMID mailbox.
This voice mailbox number is sent to the VM port as DTMF digits after the VM port answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-21
Trunks
Service
Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. Select > Trunk > Service.
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 DISA Enabled
02 DISA Code
03 Response Timer
04 Idle Timer
05 Tie Line Access
Enable DISA security code.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enter DISA security code. Only required if DISA Security Code is marked as necessary.
Possible values:Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait before answering an incoming DISA call.
Possible values:0~30 (default = 5)
Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait for the first DTMF tones after answering a DISA call.
Possible values:0~60 (default = 10)
Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call into the system.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
6-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Service
319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CIX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are used when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
Copy -Use this button to copy the entries to another tenant.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should be assigned.
Possible values:1~8.
Select Destination Type for each.
Possible values:None (default), Dialing Digits, or Night Bell
01 Day1 Destination
Type
02 Day2 Destination
Type
03 Night Destination
Type
Day1 Destination
Day2 Destination
Night Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
•
To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
•
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
•
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-23
Trunks
Service
315 T1 Trunk Card
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
F
IELD
1. Select > Trunk > T1.
2. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot field (xxyy). The selected slot requires an RDTU Card.
• xx = Cabinet 01~07
• yy = Slot 01~10 or click the following buttons:
•
List – choose from the list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
•
Copy – to T1 trunk equipment.
•
Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter values for Program 315.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
T1 Equipment Location
Enter the RDTU equipment location.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08 or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit
3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
01 Coding Format
02 Frame Format
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
Select the Coding Format.
Possible values:None, PZC, B8ZS (default), or ZCS
Select the Frame Format.
Possible values:SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)
6-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
04 Receive PAD
05 Send PAD
Trunks
Service
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values:None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values:None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
DID/DNIS Table View
This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page or directly from Trunk > DID/
DNIS Table View.
Important!
To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Trunk > ILG.
To access DID/DNIS table view
Click Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View or use Program 309.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this table using the ILG and the DID/DNIS which are the first and second dropdowns between the Previous and Next buttons.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-25
Trunks
ISDN
ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN-related system settings.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI Trunks.
1. Select > Trunk > ISDN BRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from a list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel Group you entered.
• Delete – Delete a trunk.
• Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Channel Group
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)
6-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
01 BRI Equipment
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this channel group.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08 or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RBSU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Base, Exp.01
CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
02 Protocol
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in the hardware level.
Possible values:Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
03 Incoming Line Group
ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being received.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50
CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
04 Outgoing Line Group
OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being originated.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50
CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page 29
.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-27
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Audio
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Audio
09 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 64K
10 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 56K
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
12 Outgoing B Ch
Select
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page
29.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page 29.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page 29.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel group.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
13 B Ch Selection
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
•
Explicit – Channel is indicated and no alternative is acceptable.
•
Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated and any alternative is acceptable.
•
Any Channel – Channel is indicated and any channel is acceptable.
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
•
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
•
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
•
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High Bchannel selection)
14 Initialize Type
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values:User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID or None (default)
15 Initialization Display
Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)
16 SPID #1
17 SPID #2
18 T-Wait Timer
Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered any previously entered information is overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)
Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing
SPID times to prevent BRI interfaces from re-initializing at the same time after a reset or power outage.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
6-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
19 Voice Calls
20 Subscriber 1 No.
21 Subscriber 2 No.
22 Layer 1 Short Break
Tolerant
23 TEI assignment
24 Malicious Call ID
25 BRI Trunk De-active
Mode
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same time on this interface.
Possible values:One or Two (default)
Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be consistent with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
If layer 1 is interrupted for a short period of time the CIX will ignore it.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) assignment for ISDN CO Trunk. Leave in default.
Possible values:TEI FIXED, SINGLE TEI or 3:TWO TEI (default)
Not supported by Strata CIX software.
Table 6-1 Bearer Capability Table
Bearer Services
Speech
3.1 KHz
7 KHz
Circuit Mode
64 Kbps
Rate adaptation from 56 Kbps
Unrestricted
Digital
Information
Bellcore National ISDN
X
X
X
X
2x64 Kbps
ETSI
X
X
X
X
X
TTC
X
X
X
X
X
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-29
Trunks
ISDN
302, 303 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG)
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and Strata Net IP (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments for defining operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of the
D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured; all other parameters should remain at default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using “ISDN Call-by-Call” on page 6-35
. Therefore, ILG and OLG must be set to 0.
F
IELD
1. Select Trunk > ISDN PRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from the list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
•
Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
•
Copy – Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel Group entered.
•
Delete – Delete a trunk
•
Get Default - sets data to factory defaults.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and Strata Net IP speech levels as well as
Quality Of Service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-
128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)
(default = 0)
6-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
01 Equipment No.
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24 or
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~32
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
02 Protocol
03 Incoming Line Group
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-QSIG (Strata Net).
Use IP for BIUP-Q, IP QSIG (Strata Net).
Use QSIG for RPTU/BPTU, PRI QSIG (Strata Net)
Possible values:National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or QSIG
(default = None)
ISDN and Strata Net need to have trunk group assignments to process the calls being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-31
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
04 Outgoing Line Group
05 Trunk ID Type
06 Trunk ID
07 D Ch Position
08~13 Bearer Services:
•
•
•
•
•
Speech
3.1 KHz Audio
7 KHz Audio
Unrestr. 64K
Unrestr. 56K
•
Unrestr. 2x64K
14~18 Bearer Services:
• Unrestr. 384K
• Unrestr. 1536K
• Unrestr. 1920K
• Restr. Digital
• Video
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
Unrestricted
D
ESCRIPTION
ISDN and Strata Net needs to have trunk group assignments to process the calls being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values:1-31 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU +
BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier. Use Implicit for Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Implicit (default) or Explicit
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit” identified is used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN. Use the default for Strata Net.
Possible values:0 ~ 126 (default = 0)
PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note
This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values:0 ~ 24 (default = 24)
Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note
In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel
Number). See
.
Possible values:Channel Number (default) or Slot Number
The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
Note
In North America only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2 .
Possible values:Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H
The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted
Multirate are not used and should remain disabled. See
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
6-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
20 B Ch Selection Method
The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if the PSTN indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CIX.
Possible values:Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended unless PSTN needs other choice.
21 B-Ch Selection
D
ESCRIPTION
The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
24 T-Wait Timer
25 RBT on Incoming Call
26 Network Mode
1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Possible values:Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating
2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values:Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only valid for Nat’l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is only for BRI.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat’l
ISDN.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates. This governs call setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values:Master (default) or Slave
27 Negotiation Priority
28 Layer 1 short break tolerant
29 2-B channel Transfer
30 Q931 Protocol Timer
31 Send Malicious Call ID
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates.
Possible values:Side A (default) or Side B
If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds CIX will keep the current calls open.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows two
PRI channels to be connected in the same Conference or Tandem call.
Note This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to work.
Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-33
Trunks
ISDN
Table 6-2 Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services
Circuit
Mode
Speech
3.1 KHz Audio
7 KHz Audio
Unrestricted digital information 64 kbps
Rate adaptation from 56 kbps
2x64
384kbp (H0)
1536kbps (H11)
1920kbps (H12)
Multirate (n x 64 kbps)
Restricted digital Information
Video
Packet
Mode
Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Nat’l
ISDN
X
X
X
X
ETSI
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TTC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
ISDN Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of different facilities vary at different times and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the
“324 CBC Time Zones” on page 6-37 .
2. Select Trunk > ISDN Call by Call.
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.
323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share the PRI channel group. Since the traffic requirements of each facility may vary at different times, it becomes possible to use fewer ‘B’ channels to perform the equivalent services of the discrete counterpart. This sharing the ‘B’ channels on a call-by-call basis can save the user money. To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related Line
Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service parameters may be set for three different time zones thus allowing fewer or more services of different types at different times of the day.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Channel Group
01 Index
02 Type of Service
Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values:1~32 (CTX100), 1~ 48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670
Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128 (CIX1200
HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)
Enter the CBC Service Index or click one of the following buttons:
•
List – View a summary list of programmed trunks.
•
Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
•
Copy - Copy assignments to another tenant.
Possible values:1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670
Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128 (CIX1200
HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXBU)
(default = 0)
Select the CBC Service Type.
Note
To delete CBC set this field to 1: No Data.
Possible values:No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut through), Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA
Out WATS or INWATS
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-35
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
03 Facility Code
04 Service Parameters
Enter the service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
05 Network ID
Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
Inter LATA Out WATS type of service). If no data is entered in this field any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:3 to 4 digits (default = no value)
06 Incoming Line
Group
07 Outgoing Line
Group
Specify the ILG for this facility.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Specify the OLG for this facility.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
08 Min Calls Zone 1
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this field any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:00~31(default = no value)
09 Max Calls Zone 1
10 Min Calls Zone 2
11 Max Calls Zone 2
12 Min Calls Zone 3
13 Max Calls Zone 3
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)
6-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
324 CBC Time Zones
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Channel Group
01 Start Zone 1
02 Start Zone 2
03 Start Zone 3
Channel Group Number
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)
Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
Possible values:hh = 00~23, 99 (hour); mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes); 9999 = delete time zone, (default = no value)
320 PRI B Channels
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The ‘B’ channel assignments allow for a flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.This command allows you to enable or disable each B channel on selected RPTUs.
1. Select Trunk > PRI B Channels.
2. Enter the Equipment Number or click List to see a summary of progammed circuits.
3. Click the B Channel numbers that you want to activate (see Table 6-3 below for T1 and E1 B Channel default settings).
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Copy - Copy assignments to another tenant.
6. Click Submit.
Table 6-3 B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1)
2.0M (E1)
01~15
ON
ON
16
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
17~23
ON
ON
24
OFF (Dch Pos)
ON
25~31
ON
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-37
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
00 PRI Card Equipment
Number
01~31 B Channel ID
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number:
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=PRI channel 01~24 (USA and Canada)
ZZ=E1/ETSI PRI channel 01~31 (other countries)
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit
3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Assign each ‘B’ channel as enabled or disabled for each channel on the interface.
The assignments must match exactly to the subscription from the PSTN.
Possible values:1 = Enable, 2 = Disable (default = 1)
6-38
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
316 Shared D Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of channels to 47 on a channel group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Select Trunk > D Channel.
2. Enter the channel group number (1~128, default = no value), or click the List button to view a summary list of programmed channel groups.
3. Enter data.
4. Copy - Copy assignment to another tenant.
5. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Channel Group
D
ESCRIPTION
Channel Group Number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-39
Trunks
ISDN
F
IELD
01 PRI Equipment
Number
02 Channel ID
03 D-Ch Provided
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number:
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01
• YY=03, 05, or 07
• ZZ=Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters or
• XX=cabinet 02~10
• YY=01, 03, or 05
• ZZ=Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used on the given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values:1~ 126 (default = 1)
If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used it needs to be enabled.
Possible values:D-channel or No D-channel (default)
6-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
ISDN
Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services the telephone number from which the call originates must be identified to the PSTN.
1. Select Trunk > Calling Number.
2. Enter the OLG Number, or click the List button to view a summary list of programmed OLGs.
3. Enter Program 321 data.
4. Enter Program 322 data.
5. Click Submit.
321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
The calling number ID is what is defined as the user supplied calling number. This number may be optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to originate calls.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
OLG Number
01 Default Number
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50
CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Number Prefix
Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to create a user identified telephone number.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number but is used for Caller ID at the distant end and could be used for returning your call.
03 Number Verification
Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the call is to proceed.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
04 Default Number 2
Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second number is for BRI only.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-41
Trunks
ISDN
322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
When calls are sent to the PSTN with Calling Number Identification Service (CNIS), the CIX can supply special CNIS information as part of the Setup Message. This program may be used for sending a unique number based on the source directing the call to the Strata CIX PRI.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
OLG Number
01 Source Type
02 Source Number
03 Special Number
Assignments
OLG Number.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU +
BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values:Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)
Specify the number of the source type selected: PDN 0~9999
GCO or Pooled Line Possible Values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/
CIX1200 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)
Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max. seven digits).
This number is appended to Program 321 field 02
Possible values:Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note
Destination type and destination must be entered before a DID number can be assigned.
6-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/DNIS) to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.
Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
1. Select Trunk > DID/DNIS Setup
2. After reading the instructions on the screen, click Start. The Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG screen displays.
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line Group (ILG) field, click Create or from the drop-down menu, select a
DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in the drop-down box. See table below for screen fields and field descriptions.
F
IELD
01 ILG Type
D
ESCRIPTION
Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, ISDN for RPTU interface, SIP for SIP trunks.
11 DID/DNIS Digit Length
Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/
DNIS ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/
DNIS. If ANI digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity of DID digits sent.
02 Line Type
03 DID/DIT Service
DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.
DID lines should always be set as DID service.
04 Std/Strata Net Service
DID lines should always be set for “Standard” service.
4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New DID/DNIS ILG screen displays.
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard screen displays with the new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. This table displays
assignments for all DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CIX. For more details, see “DID/DNIS
.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-43
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2
1. From Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2 screen click Create to create a block of DID/DNIS numbers. The numbers are created in consecutive order.
Create DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays.
• Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to
DID/DNIS Digit Length on the previous screen).
• Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS numbers ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
• Specify “overwrite existing” or “add to existing” DID/DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers exist, add or overwrite is OK or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box displays. Specify the first and last DID/DNIS number to delete using the drop-down boxes or check mark Delete all
DID/DNIS numbers. Click Delete Now. The numbers are deleted.
CAUTION!
Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the selected ILG.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25
.
3. When finished click Next.
Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2
1. From Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen set the DID/DNIS
Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. This assignment applies only to voice (audio) calls—not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25
.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments click Submit to register them in the CIX database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes. These
VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to “call forward to” or “ring directly to.”
6-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
GCO Key Group
Pool Key Group
Set for Period
Destination Type
Set the Dialing Digits
Range
D
ESCRIPTION
If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do not apply; GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do not apply; GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CIX time period: Day,
Day2 and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then select the destination type.
Select the type of destination:
DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CIX modem with eManager.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:
•
Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers.
•
Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the dialing digits.
•
Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls
- line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.
Note
When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type you must set the
Dialing Digit Range below.
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in this Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.
Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the
DID/DNIS numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should ring. Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this number, to each consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to end - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-45
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG
1. From Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS Number VMID Codes for ILG 2 screen, assign VMID codes for all DID/
DNIS numbers in the selected ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25
.
3. After selecting VMID code assignments click Submit to register them in the CIX database.
F
IELD
Set for DID/DNIS Number
Range:
Set for:
D
ESCRIPTION
Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.
The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail integration.
DTMF VMID
SMDI VMID
All
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.
Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.
Set the VMID Range
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note
DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on the
CIX.
Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to each consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to end - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.
6-46
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
325 Strata Net Full IP Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
; 304 on
; 306 on
This command assigns Strata Net IP trunks.
1. Select Trunk> Full IP Strata Net.
2. Setup the Channel Group by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Channel Group
01 Equipment
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter a channel group number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only),
1~128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)
Assign the Equipment Number of the LIPU/LIPS MIPU and/or GIPx card.
02 LAN Interface Number
03 SIP IP Channels
CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R1 CHSU40A Cabinet is 01/Slot 06 (0106).
CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R2 CHSU40A2 Cabinet is 01/Slot 05 (0105).
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 or 03 for Base slots and 05 or 07 for Expansion slots
• CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and 05 for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and
05 for Expansion slots.
Select “1” for an LIPU or “2” for an LIPS. Not used for MIPU/GIPU.
Possible values:1 or 2
Enter the number of GIPU, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS channels to be assigned as
Strata Net IP resources
Possible values:(GIPU) 1 ~ 8, (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS) 1 ~ 16, (MIPU24) 1 ~ 32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-47
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
04 ILG
05 OLG
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1KHz
Audio
08 RBT on Incoming Call
09 Q931 Protocol Timer
D
ESCRIPTION
ISDN and Strata Net IP need to have trunk group assignments to process the calls being received.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
ISDN and Strata Net IP needs to have trunk group assignments to process the calls being originated.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/ disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/ disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
Enable Ringback Tone to be returned on terminating the call.
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
Set Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Long
6-48
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
326 SIP Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306
This command assigns SIP trunks.
F
IELD
1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking - Channel Group Setting tab.
2. Setup the SIP Channel Group by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. List - View a list of the programmed SIP Trunk Channel Groups.
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
00 SIP Trunk Channel
Group
01 Equipment
Enter a channel group number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only),
1~128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)
Assign the Equipment Number of the LIPU/LIPS MIPU and/or GIPx card.
02 LAN Interface Number
03SIP Trunk Channels
04 RBT on Incoming Call
CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R1 CHSU40A Cabinet is 01/Slot 06 (0106).
CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R2 CHSU40A2 Cabinet is 01/Slot 05 (0105).
Cabinet numbers:
• CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 or 03 for Base slots and 05 or 07 for Expansion slots
• CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and 05 for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and
05 for Expansion slots.
There is only one LAN interface on an MIPU/GIPU.
Possible values:1
Enter the number of GIPU, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS channels to be assigned as
SIP trunk resources
Possible values:(GIPU) 1 ~ 8, (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS) 1 ~ 16, (MIPU24) 1 ~ 32
Enable ringback tone to be returned to the caller.
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-49
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
327 SIP Trunk Service Kind Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326
This tab is where the SIP trunk provider is defined. There may be several SIP trunk providers per channel
Group.
1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking - Service Definition tab.
2. Setup the SIP trunk service kind table index by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 SIP Trunk Service Kind
Table Index
01 Registration Mode
02 ILG
03 OLG
04 Effective Channel
Number
05 Domain Name
06 SIP Server
07 Primary Voice Packet
Configuration
08 Secondary Voice Packet
Configuration
09 Registration Period
D
ESCRIPTION
Create a SIP Trunk Service Kind Table Index by selecting.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic &
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX200, CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp)
Only Client or None can be assigned.
The incoming line group number for this service. Note that the ILG number can only be assigned to one service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX/CIX/100) 1~50 (CIX200) 1~50 (CTX/
CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 1~128 (CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~50 (CIX1200 HCTU only) 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU)
The outgoing line group number for this service. Note that the OLG number can only be assigned to one service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40) 1~32 (CTX/CIX/100) 1~50 (CIX200) 1~50 (CTX/
CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 1~128 (CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~50 (CIX1200 HCTU only) 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU)
Sets the number of channels that will be used with this service. Setting this value to 0 will delete the SIP Trunk service index.
Possible values:0~96 (CIX40) 0~96 (CTX/CIX/100) 0~176 (CIX200) 0~176
(CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 0~264 (CTX/CIX670
BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~176 (CIX1200 HCTU only)
1~264 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~440 (CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU)
Domain name for the service provider. Maximum of 64 characters.
SIP Server Domain Name or IP address. (Used for registration and outbound proxy).
Primary Voice packet configuration table (Prog 152) index.
Secondary Voice packet configuration table (Prog 152) index.
After successful registration, re-registration will occur after this many seconds.
Possible values:700~99999
6-50
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
10 TimerB
11 Recovery Timer
12 Network Transfer
13 User Agent Header
14 Server Header
D
ESCRIPTION
SIP Timer B value.
This is how many seconds to wait after an invite registration failure before retrying.
Possible values:0~1440
Enable to use REFER to transfer calls on the SIP trunk, if supported. Otherwise, transfer loops through the CIX
Enable to send software version in User Agent Header.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Enable to send software version in Server Header
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
15 Protocol Option
SIP Refer, Notify, and Replaces headers cannot be accepted. (In the future this can be enabled to allow those messages to be accepted).
Not used. Range is 90~99999
16 Session Timer
17 Primary Audio Codec
First choice for Audio Codec.
Possible values:G.711u (Default), G711a, G729a
18 Secondary Audio Codec
Second choice for Audio Codec.
Possible values:G.711u (Default), G711a, G729a
For DTMF digits, you can choose to use INBAND or RFC2833 (Default).
19 DTMF Transmission
Method
20 RTCP Support
Enable to allow RTCP packets to be sent (this helps to detect QoS errors during calls).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
21 T.38 Support
22 SIP Server Caches
23 Diffserv for Media
In the future, this can be enabled to allow FAX by T.38.
The maximum number of DNS entries that will be cached.
Not supported in this release-see Prog 150. Enable Diffserv (Differentiated
Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If
Diffserv is enabled you must set field 24 TOS Field Type for Media as DSCP or
TOS.
Note
Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs. Contact your
ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-51
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
24 TOS Field Type for
Media
25 TOS Precedence Type for Media
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in TB24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select a packet priority level - where Critical/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority. If TOS is selected in field
24, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability
Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, or Critical/
ESP (Default)
TOS Delay Type for Media
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low
TOS Throughput Type for
Media
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
TOS Reliability Type for
Media
26 DSCP for Media
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If DSCP is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select a priority level
Possible values:0 ~ 63 (Default = 0)
27 Diffserv for Signaling
28 TOS Field Type for
Signaling
D
ESCRIPTION
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. MIPU global settings are used. If field 23 Diffserv is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point format) or TOS (Type Of Service format). If TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in field 25 TOS Precedence Type for Media; if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in field 26 DSCP for Media.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. Enable Diffserv (Differentiated
Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If
Diffserv is enabled you must set field 28 TOS Field Type for Signaling as DSCP or TOS.
Note
Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs; contact your
ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If field 27 Diffserv for Signaling is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point Format) or TOS
(Type Of Service format). If TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in field
25 TOS Precedence Type for Media. If DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in field 26 DSCP for Media.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)
6-52
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
29 TOS Precedence for
Signaling
TOS Delay Type for
Signaling
TOS Throughput Type for
Signaling
TOS Reliability Type for
Signaling
30 DSCP for Signaling
31 Call Release On QoS
Failure
32 QoS Failure Notification
Timer
33 SIP Trunk Service
Recovery Time
D
ESCRIPTION
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling select a packet priority level - where Critical/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority. If TOS is selected in field 28, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and TOS
Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, or Critical/
ESP (Default)
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If DSCP is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling, select a priority level
Possible values:0 ~ 63 (Default = 0)
Enable to have calls disconnected when poor QoS is detected.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Interval to log QoS errors
34 SIP Trunk Options
Interval
35 SIP Trunk Message
Option
36 SIP Trunk Message to
Header Option
37 SIP Trunk Register
Message From Header
Option
After registration of a SIP trunk fails (e.g., internet connection is down), registration will be attempted again after this many seconds
Possible values:2~3600 (Default = 60)
This field defines the interval by which option messages are sent for the purpose of verifying that the SIP trunk is still active and available.
Possible values:0~3600
This field determines whether the MIPU's IP address or the Domain name will be set to the host portion of the To: header. Ex. (sip:[email protected]) or
(sip:[email protected]
This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the To: field of the SIP invite message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or the
SIP server IP Address.
This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the From: field of the SIP register message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or the SIP server IP Address or the MIPU IP address.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-53
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
F
IELD
38 SIP Trunk Register
Message to Header
Option
39 Assert Identity
D
ESCRIPTION
This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the To: field of the SIP register message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or the SIP server IP Address.
This field determines whether Assert Identity is used or not. This field is used by the service provider for anonymous caller ID.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
6-54
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
328 SIP Trunk Service Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326, 327
This tab must be completed before entries can be made for the URI tab. If this tab is not completed, entries attempted in the URI tab will not be saved.
1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking, Service Assignment tab.
Important!
After URI entries are made in the next tab (URI), changes to this program (Prog 328), will
DELETE all the URIs programmed. Once this is set, do not change it.
2. Make the required entries for Channel Groups.
3. Click Set.
F
IELD
00 SIP Trunk Channel
Group
02 Service Index
D
ESCRIPTION
Select a Channel Group Number:
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU),
(default = no value)
Assign a SIP Trunk Service by selecting its SIP Trunk Service Kind (PRG327)
Table Index.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX200/CIX/670 Exp/CIX1200 Exp).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
6-55
Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
329 SIP URI Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326, 327, 328
The SIP URI is the telephone number provided by the SIP service provider. When the number is dialed from the outside, the provider sends a SIP INVITE just as if it were a call to a SIP station.
1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking, URI tab.
2. Enter the information required as specified in the table below.
3. Click the action to perform: Add, Modify, or Remove.
F
IELD
00 SIP URI Trunk Service
Index
D
ESCRIPTION
The Prog 327 index for the service kind associated to this SIP URI.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX/670 Exp./CIX1200 Exp)
01 URI Index
02 SIP URI
03 SIP URI User Name
The Index into the table of URIs There are a maximum of 160 per card.
Possible values:1~72 (CIX40), 1~72 (CIX100), 1~160 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~160 (CIX/670 Exp./CIX1200 Exp).
The user portion of the SIP URI. The host portion is assigned by Prog 327 field 5.
The user name used for authentication of this URI.
04 SIP URI Password
05 SIP URI Channel
Group
06 SIP URI Attribution
The password used for authentication of this URI
0 (recommended) means the channel group is picked out from Prog 328.
Otherwise, this SIP URI is registered through the specifically set channel group.
MAIN specifies that this URI will be registered with the service provider. SUB indicates that this URI will not be registered.
6-56
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Attendant
7
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CIX Attendants.
404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Select Station > Attendant Group. The Attendant Group Assignment screen displays.
2. Select the Attendant Group Member or click one of the following buttons:
•
List – to view data list window.
•
Copy – to Attendant group numbers.
3. Enter Program 404 data.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Attendant Group
Member
01 Call Distribution
Method
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
Possible values:1 (CIX100, CIX200, CIX670, CIX1200)
(default = no value)
Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Possible values:Most Idle First (default)
, or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination
Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot
Number). If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
03 Overflow Time
Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values:0~180 (default = 30)
04 Group Overflow
Destination
05 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this field any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
7-1
Attendant
F
IELD
07 ICI1~16 ICI10
•
ILG1
•
ILG2
•
ILG3
•
ILG4
D
ESCRIPTION
For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
•
Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•
Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•
Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
•
Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note
Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
7-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
None
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
1. Select Station > Emergency Call.
2. Enter Program 400 data or click one of the following buttons:
• Insert – assigns the destination for the selected index.
• Modify – assigns a new destination to the selected index.
• Remove – removes the assigned destination from the table.
• Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Day/Night Mode
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the time of day mode (Day1,Day2,Night) from the table below.
Possible values:Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)
02 Called Number Index
Emergency call group number (1~4). The system will hunt through these in numerical order to find an available emergency destination.
Possible values:1~4 (default = no value)
03 Emergency Call
Destination
Enter the DN, pilot number or private number to be associated with the called number index.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Action
Choose whether you are replacing an existing emergency number index or inserting one in the list. if inserting, the new entry will assume the specified index. The remaining indexes will be increased by one and the last one, 4, will be deleted.
Possible values: Modify or Insert (default = Modify)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
7-3
This page is intentionally left blank.
IP Telephone Programming
8
IP Telephone Setup
This chapter contains information on system setup for IP telephones, IP telephone programming, IP interface card and IP software updates.
CIX IP Telephone Programming
The following is an outline of the Basic CIX system IP setup. This process covers the basic IP telephone programming. Each network is unique and may require additional special assignments.
Card Assignments
System > Card Assignment— Assign the xIPU IP card; refer to the program guidelines for appropriate slot assignments.
MIPU, GIPU, and LIPU Configuration
IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration — Assign the xIPU IP Address, subnet mask and gateway.
Cabinet/Slot
field 01 field 02 field 03
Select the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU card from the list
Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU IP Address (default = 192.168.254.200)
Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU Subnet Address
Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU Default Gateway Address
BIPU Configuration
IP-Telephony > BIPU Configuration — Assign the BIPU-M IP Address, subnet mask and gateway.
Station Programming
Assigning PDNs to IP telephones using IP resources — This can be completed by using the Network eManager PDN Range wizard or manually created, IP-Telephony > IPT Data — Program 200 (station basic).
• IP telephones assigned to xIPU-M cards are programmed in the same manner as DKTs. Any programmed (FB) used to program a DKT can be used to program an IP.
• Continue station programming in the same manner as a DKT set, including:
DKT Parameters
Key Strips
8-1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
IP Telephone Data
IP-Telephony > IPT Data (250 IPT Data Assignment)
field 00 field 01 field 02 field 03 field 04 field 05 field 06 field 07 field 08 field 09
Prime DN - Select the station from the list on the right
Station ID (will display automatically) - This will be the same as the PDN assigned in the Station
Data program.
Station IP Address type. Contact the network administrator for the type. ANY = DCHP, FIX = Static
Station IP Address
If FIXED enter the IP address
If ANY make no entry. (After the IP telephone is configured this will populate.)
Auto Assign Station ID - Set preference
Set Station Termination Authentication Mode
See note below
Station MAC Address
See note below
Voice Packet Table - default = 1
Audio Codec - Set to: G.711 or G.729
Note: SoftIPT 2.2 can only support G.711. SoftIPT 3.x supports both G.711 and G.729
Display Software Version Number of the IP telephone - This will display automatically if the IP telephone is connected.
Note When using Station Terminal Authentication Mode it is recommended that the IP telephone be plugged in and configured prior to executing this program. If the IP telephone is not configured and present on the network the MAC Address must be entered manually. If the IP telephone is configured and present on the network the MAC Address will be entered automatically.
8-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
VLAN Setup
VLAN Setup
The following steps setup the VLAN tagging options and parameters.
Using the VLAN Wizard
The wizard sets the VLAN parameters on the selected IP telephones. When complete, the MIPU, GIPU, or
LIPU/LIPS must be configured for VLAN.
In Network eManager select IP-Telephony > IPT VLAN Setup.
VLAN Range Options
The IP telephones to be setup can be selected by Primary Directory Number (PDN) or by the VLAN
Identification (VID) of either the PC Port or Phone Port.
• Enter PDN Range - Click on the Select button. This shows the list of IP PDNs - select one or more IP telephones from the list.
• Enter VID of target IP telephones - enter either the IP telephone PC Port VID or Phone VID. This will select every IP telephone with the specified port VID. If both PC Port and Phone Port VID is set to Any, all IP telephones will be selected.
VLAN Setting Options
These options will set the selected IP telephones the parameters specified below or Resets the IP telephones selected above to the default values.
•
Set VLAN settings of IP telephones - Set the IP telephones selected above to the parameters specified below.
• Reset VLAN setting of IP telephones - Reset the IP telephones selected above to the default value
(VLAN tagging disabled, VID = 1 for the phone port and the PC port).
VLAN Parameters
These options will set the selected IP telephones the parameters specified below or Resets the IP telephones selected above to the default values.
•
VLAN Feature - Enable or disable VLAN tagging for the selected IP telephones.
• PC port type - Set the PC port on the selected IP telephones to:
Trunk - the port is connected to a VLAN enabled device or
Access - the port is connected to a non-compliant device, a device that does not support VLAN tagging.
Enable VLAN on the xIPU
This program sets the VLAN parameters on the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU cards. VLAN is enabled or disabled on a per card basis. Refer to
“161 LIPU/MIPU/GIPU Configuration” on Page 8-13
.
Setup the Packet Prioritization (IEEE802.1P) and VLAN ID (IEEE802.1Q).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-3
IP Telephone Programming
CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to program your CIX IP Telephone.
Basic CIX IP Setup
1. Select System > Card Assignment (Program 100) to set the xIPU cards in the appropriate slots.
CIX100 slots 1~8; CIX670/CIX1200 Base slots 1~8; and CIX670/CIX1200 Expansion slots 1~6
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-M to the appropriate card slots automatically.
2. Select IP Telephony > BIPU Configuration (Program 151) to set BIPU-M IP address (check with the network administrator for IP address, subnet mask, etc.). The BIPU version number will be displayed when the BIPU is operating and is connected on the same network as the Network eManager PC.
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-M default parameters as shown in
.
3. Select Station > Station Assignments, Basic tab, to assign PDNs to IP telephones (BIPU equipment numbers) if this was not done during CIX system initialization. The PDN Range wizard can also be used to assign PDNs to the BIPU channels.
4. Select IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250). Set field 05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode to apply if the PDN assigned to a particular IP Telephone should be linked (reserved for) to that telephone’s MAC address. Each telephone has a unique hard-coded MAC address. This prevents other
IP telephones from using the reserved PDN when an IP telephone is moved.
Note If IP telephone Authentication is applied/not applied in Program 250-05 it will override the IP telephone Authentication setting in Program 150-02.
5. If multiple CIX systems with BIPU-Ms are connected to the IP network Select IP-Telephony > System IP
Data (Program 150), and set 09 IP CTX Identifier.
Enter a CIX Node identifier if more than one CIX Node is on the IP Network. This can be the same as the Strata Net Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a CIX Strata Net Network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the node number programmed in the IP telephone using 369Hold-2, FB06.
6. Run all other CIX programs necessary to customize the features required for each IP telephone. All programs used to program digital telephones also apply to IP telephones (Program 205 keystrips, 213
Add-on-Modules, Program 204 DKT Parameters, etc.).
8-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection
Setup
1. Install the IP telephones using instructions in the IP telephone chapter of the CIX and MAS Installation and Maintenance Manual.
2. From each IP Telephone, set its network connection parameters using the 369Hold program mode
(refer to the instructions that follow).
Notes
• Some IP telephones parameters must be set from each individual IP telephone using 369Hold programming. These parameters remain stored in the IP telephone even if the telephone is unplugged.
This allows the telephone to be moved to different locations without reprogramming.
•
Other IP telephone parameters must be set in IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250). Initially, the parameters are normally kept at defaults.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-5
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
150 System IP Data
Prerequisite Program: Assign the MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU cards in Program 100. Create Stations using Programs 200 and 260. Set IP telephone data assignments with Program
250.
This command assigns system-wide IP parameters.
1. Select IP-Telephony > System IP Data.
2. Enter values in the appropriate fields.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Automatic
Assignment of Station
ID
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IP telephone has no station
ID. In program 250, field 04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
When IP telephone searches to connect a CIX with no station ID, the CIX looks for a PDN which is set with this parameter as “automatic,” and sends the PDN to the
IP telephone and sets it in the setting of IP telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
02 Terminal
Authentication
Enable this parameter if you want to set the PDN of an IP telephone.
When enable is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IP telephone is valid. If another IP telephone which has the same PDN is connected to the network, the CIX rejects the registration of this IP telephone because the MAC address of IP telephone is different.
When disable is set, you can move the PDN from an IP telephone to another IP telephone and another IP telephone can be connected to the CIX.
In program 250, field 05 is the same parameter for the terminal.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
03 Diffserv
04 TOS Field Type
Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP
(internal) network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, timecritical BIPU/IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If Diffserv is enabled you must set the 04 TOS Field Type as
DSCP or TOS. Note: Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs.
Contact your ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
If 03 Diffserv is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point format) or TOS (Type Of Service format).
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in 05 TOS Precedence Type.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in 06 DSCP.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)
8-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
05 TOS Precedence Type
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select a packet priority level - where
Critical/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Override, or Critical/
ESP (Default)
TOS Delay Type
D
ESCRIPTION
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low
TOS Throughput Type
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
TOS Reliability Type
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
06 DSCP
07 IEEE802.1p
If DSCP is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select a priority level from 0~63.
Possible values:0~63 (Default = 0)
Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If you enable IEEE802.1p, select which priority level to use (Voice or Best Effort) in 08
IEEE802.1p Configuration on this screen. All Ethernet devices on the LAN
(routers, switches, etc., must support IEEE802.1p for this feature to work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
08 IEEE802.1p
Configuration
09 IP-CTX Identifier
10 Tail Length of Echo
Canceller
11 Gain Control of IPT and BIPU
If 07 IEEE802.1p is enabled, select Voice priority for BIUP\IPT voice packets to be tagged with the highest priority level.
Possible values:Best Effort or Voice (Default)
Enter a CIX node ID if more than one CIX node is on the IP network. This can be the same as the Strata Net node ID used for this system if it is in a Strata Net network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic. This ID must match the node 'number' programmed in the IP telephone.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters
Enter 16ms if any IP telephone is set for a G729A codec (Prog 250-08) or if the
Strata Net IP network is set for G729A codecs (Prog 672-06). If all codecs are
G711, then 16ms or 32ms can be used - 32ms may reduce echo on a network that only utilizes G711 codecs. Never set this parameter to 64ms.
Note
Setting G729A codec and 32 msec will reduce the number of channels available from 16 to 12 or 32 to 24.
Possible values:16 (Default), 32 or 64MS
Set the Voice Quality Mode to control gain of IPTs and BIPUs.
Possible values:High (Default), Middle or Low
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-7
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
12 System IP CED
Control
13 System IP RAS Start
Port
14 System IP RAS
Register Port
D
ESCRIPTION
Whether the echo canceller is stopped by the detection of Cancel Error Detection
(CED) tone (2100Hz).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable
RAS (Registration Admission Status) start port number for IP telephone.
Possible values:1 ~ 65535 (Default = 1718)
RAS (Registration Admission Status) register port number for IP telephone.
Possible values:1 ~ 65535 (Default = 1719)
15 System IP Paging Max
IP telephone
Limit the number of simultaneous pages to IP telephones.
Possible values:0 ~ 160 (Default = 4)
16 System IP BGM Max
IP telephone
17 LIPU/GIPx BIPU-Q
Mode
Limit the number of IP phones to simultaneously receive background music.
Possible values:0 ~ 160 (Default = 0)
Sets BIPU-Q mode to allow the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU to communicate with BIPU-Q in a Strata Net IP network.
Enable - MIPU/GIPU/LIPU is in BIPU-Q mode. Strata Net IP operation in a network with one or more BIPU-Q is allowed.
Disable - MIPU/GIPU/LIPU is in MIPU/GIPU/LIPU mode. Strata Net IP operation in networks with LIPUs only, no BIPU-Q, is possible.
This applies only to Strata Net IP operation. This parameter has no effect on BIPU-
M cards used for IP Telephones.
Possible values:Disable (Default), Enable
19 Tail Length of Echo
Canceller for MIPU
20 SIP Trunk Diffserv
21 SIP Trunk TOS Field
Type
22 SIP Trunk TOS
Precedence Type
SIP Trunk TOS Delay
Type
This applies only to the MIPU and the GIPU (BIPU, GIPH, LIPU use FK10).
Possible values:1 - 16 ms echo cancel
2 - 32 ms echo cancel
3 - 64 ms echo cancel
Enable to use Diffserv for SIP signalling on SIP trunk.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
If field 20 above is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) format or TOS (Type Of Service) format. If TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in 22 SIP Trunk TOS Precedence Type; if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in field 23 SIP Trunk DSCP
Possible values:DSCP or TOS (Default)
If TOS is selected in field 21 above, select a packet priority level where Critical/
ESP provides the highest, and Routine provides the lowest, priority. If TOS is selected in field 21, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and
TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, Critical/ESP
(Default)
If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low
8-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
SIP Trunk TOS
Throughput Type
SIP Trunk TOS
Reliability Type
23 SIP Trunk DSCP
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
D
ESCRIPTION
If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases.
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases.
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High
If DSCP is selected in field 21 above, select a priority level.
Possible values:0~63 (Default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-9
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
151 BIPU Configuration
This program is used to set up the IP address of the specific BIPU card to support the IP-Telephone. BIPU card must be assigned before configuring the specific BIPU card.
1. Select IP-Telephony > BIPU Configuration.
2. Enter Program 151 data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Note Refer to Program 161 - IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration.
D
ESCRIPTION
Cabinet & Slot Number
Enter the cabinet and slot number of the BIPU to be configured.
Note: BIPU cards must first be installed using PRG100 - System\Card
Assignment.
BIPU cards can be installed in the slots listed:
Cabinet
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•
•
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
•
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~09 for Expansion slots.
•
•
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
01 IP Address
02 Subnet Address
Enter the BIPU IP Address.
Enter the Subnet Address of the BIPU.
03 Default Gateway
Address
04 Version Number of
BIPU
05 IP Strata Net RTP Base
Port (BIPU)
Enter the Default Gateway Address of the BIPU card.
This is a read-only field. The version number will automatically appear when the card is configured correctly.
The base of the 32-port range which can be used by BIPU card to assign port numbers for the IP Strata Net RTP protocol.
Possible values:16384~65504 (default = 20992). Only even numbers can be assigned.
8-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
This program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.
1. Select IP-Telephony > Voice Packet Configuration. The Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment screen displays.
2. Enter Program 152 data.
3. Click Submit.
Note When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an Strata Net IP network, the packet table settings for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
Note Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on Strata Net IP nodes, Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the LIPU/BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
F
IELD
Voice Packet Table
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Voice Packet Configuration Table Number (1-256).
Important!
The default values in Voice Packet Table 1 are the recommended values for G.711 codecs. The default values in Voice Packet Table
2 are the recommended values for G.729A codecs. If the codec selected for an IP telephone in Program 250-08 is switched from the default G.711 to G.729A, the table used for the IP telephone is automatically switched from Table 1 to Table 2 in Program 250-07.
However switching back to G.711 requires that you manually switch back to the Table 1 default parameter settings.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200 Basic); 1~256 (CIX670 and CIX1200 Exp.)
01 Voice Packet Trans. Int.
Voice Packet Transmission Interval – This depends on the encoding method
G711 or G729A. The default setting are G711: 20msec., G729A: 40msec. Note that 10msec. is only used to test - do not use 10ms. Normally, the default settings provide the best quality.
If LAN bandwidth is not enough for these parameters and the problem is resolved to extend the interval according to the LAN requirement, you can change to
G711:40msec. and G729a: 80msec.
Note
30msec. need not be used.
Possible values:10 msec (available for testing only up to release 200MF008), 20 msec (default), 30 msec, 40 msec or 80 msec
02 Jitter Buffer Type
03 Jitter Buffer Length
The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not as expected you can change the jitter buffer type of DSP on LIPU/BIPU.
Possible values:Fixed, Sequential, or Adaptive
The default values are: G.711 = Adaptive, G.729A = Sequential (recommended).
The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is not as expected you can change the jitter buffer length.
Possible values: 0~250
The default values are: G.711= 100msec., G.729A=40msec.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-11
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
07 Packet Loss Threshold
If packet loss is more than 10, an error is recorded in the CIX error log and you cannot talk by IP telephone. The default value 5 is recommended.
Possible values:0, 5, 10
08 Transmission Interval for MIPU/GIPU
09 Jitter Buffer Type for
MIPU/GIPU
10 ms
20 ms (default)
30 ms
40 ms
80 ms (only when G.729A is assigned; 40ms when G.711 assigned)
Fixed
Adaptive (default)
Relative to FK02.
10 Jitter Buffer Length for
MIPU/GIPU
11 Maximum Acceptable
Jitter Buffer for MIPU/
GIPU
12 Packet Loss Ratio for
MIPU/GIPU
13 Packet Loss Threshold for MIPU/GIPU
0 to 200 ms (default = 100 ms)
Corresponding to FK03
10 to 400 ms (default = 200 ms)
Corresponding to FK04
0 to 10% (default = 5%)
Corresponding to FK06
0 to 10% (default = 1%)
Corresponding to FK07
8-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
161 LIPU/MIPU/GIPU Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None
This command defines the network configuration of an MIPU/LIPU/GIPU.
F
IELD
1. Select IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration.
2. Select Cabinet and Card slot from list on right side, or enter a location and setup the MIPU/LIPU/GIPU by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Cabinet & Slot
Number
Enter the cabinet and slot number of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx to be configured.
Cabinet numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•
•
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
•
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~09 for Expansion slots.
•
•
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
•
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.
•
Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40
R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-13
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
01 IPU IP Address
02 IPU Subnet Address
Enter the Subnet Mask of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
03 IPU Default Gateway
Address
Enter the Default Gateway Address of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx card.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
04 LIPS IP Address
05 LIPS Subnet
Address
06 LIPS Default
Gateway Address
Enter the second LIPU IP Address. The second LIPU IP address must be within the subnet address. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
Enter the Subnet Mask of the second LIPU. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
Enter the Default Gateway Address of the second LIPU. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
07 Version of IPU/IPH
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx IP Address.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
08 Version of LIPS
09 Available IPU/IPH IP
Ports
10 Available LIPS IP
Ports
11 IPU/IPH Packet
Prioritization
Firmware version of MIPU/GIPx/LIPU is displayed.
Possible values:Max 16 characters
Possible values:For IPU 15 digits:
IPUXX_XXY_AZXX
IPUXX_XX: firmware version
Y: Boot loader version
AZXX: DSP Configuration File
A= Country
Z=Major version 0~ 9
XX=Minor version 00 ~ 99
Firmware version of LIPS-X is shown.
Possible values:Max 16 characters
Number of available IP ports in MIPU/GIPU/LIPU-X is shown. When speaker OCA is assigned to an IP telephone an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone.
If there is no available IP port in the LIPU-X, no more IP telephone/SIP/Strata Net
IPs can be assigned.
Possible values:0~24 (MIPU24), 0~16 (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS), 0~8 (GIPx)
Number of available IP ports in LIPS is shown. When speaker OCA is assigned to an IP telephone an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone. If there is no available IP port in the LIPS, no more IP telephone/SIP/Strata Net IPs can be assigned.
Possible values:0 ~ 16
Enable or Disable Packet Prioritization
Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable
8-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
12 IPU/IPH Packet
Prioritization Type
13 IPU/IPH VLAN
14 IPU/IPH VLAN ID
15 LIPS Packet
Prioritization
16 LIPS Packet
Prioritization Type
17 LIPS VLAN
18 LIPS VLAN ID
19 IP Strata Net RTP
Base Port (IPU/IPH)
D
ESCRIPTION
When Packet Prioritization is enabled select the type of prioritization.
Possible values:Best Effort, Voice
The default value is: Voice
Enable or Disable VLAN tagging
Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable
Set the VLAN ID
Possible values:1 ~ 4094
The default value is: 1
Enable or Disable Packet Prioritization
Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable
When Packet Prioritization is enabled, select the type of prioritization.
Possible values:Best Effort, Voice
The default value is: Voice
Enable or Disable VLAN tagging
Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable
Set the VLAN ID
Possible values:1 ~ 4094
The default value is: 1
The base port number of the 32 port range for IP Strata Net RTP protocol can be set for individual MIPU, LIPU, or GIPx cards.
Possible values:16384 ~ 16511
Note
Only even port numbers can be assigned.
20 Strata Net RTP Base
Port (LIPS)
The base port number of the 32 port range for IP Strata Net RTP protocol can be set for individual MIPU, LIPU, or GIPx cards.
Possible values:16384 ~ 16511
Note
Only even port numbers can be assigned.
21 DHCP for MIPU/GIPU
Enable: MIPU/GIPx can get an IP Address via DHCP.
Disable: IP Address must be assigned.
Note
MIPU/GIPU only. LIPU, LIPS, and BIPU do not support DHCP.
22 MIPU Primary DNS
Domain Name System (DNS) server that translates IP address to the corresponding computer or domain name. The IP address consists of four octets.
Enter the first octet address from 0-255. This feature only pertains to the IP card.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-15
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
23 MIPU Secondary
DNS Server
24 MIPU Hostname
25 MIPU Primary DNS
Suffix
D
ESCRIPTION
In the event that the primary DNS is not available, the MIU will attempt to reach the secondary DNS server. The IP address consists of four octets. Enter the first octet address from 0-255 for the MIPU. This feature only pertains to the MIPU card.
A hostname is a unique network name by which a host device on the network can be identified. Enter a hostname for the IP card with a max. 32 characters.
A DNS suffix is a name appended after the computer name to form a fully qualified domain name. For example, in mipu1.toshiba.com, toshiba.com would be the DNS suffix. Enter a DNS suffix for the MIPU - 32 char. max.
8-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
250 IP Telephone (Station) Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command configures IP stations in the system.
1. Select IP-Telephony > IPT Data.
2. Enter a DN number in the Prime DN field or select a DN from the list displayed on the right.
3. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Prime DN
01 Station ID
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the IP telephone Prime Directory Number (PDN)
Station ID is set from the IP telephone to match its PDN in station programming.
The station ID is the same as the station PDN unless there is more than one
CTX/CIX system with BIPU-M, GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS on the same network. In this case the station ID for each IP telephone must contain the CTX/CIX Node
ID+PDN.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters
02 Station IP Address Type
Select the Station IP Address to be static 'fixed' or dynamic in which case it obtains an IP address from a DHCP server.
Possible values:Fixed or Any (Default)
03 Station IP Address
Enter the Station static IP Address if a static address is needed per Station IP
Address Type set in 02 above.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255
04 Auto Assign Station ID
Use Automatic when the IP telephone has no Station ID. Use Not Automatic when IP telephone has station ID in the IP telephone setting. In Program 150, field 01 is the same parameter for system.
When Don't Care is set, program 150-01 precedes in Program 250-04.
Enabling Program 150-01 is equal to using automatic in Program 250-04.
Disabling in Program 150-01 is equal to not automatic in Program 250-04. When the IP telephone requests to connect to a Strata CIX with no station ID, the CIX searches for a PDN that is set in this parameter as automatic and sends the
PDN to the IP telephone. The IP telephone records it in the IP telephone setting.
Possible values:Permitted, Not Permitted or Don’t Care (Default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-17
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
05 Station Terminal
Authentication Mode
06 Station MAC Address
07 Voice Packet Table
08 Audio Codec
D
ESCRIPTION
Apply this parameter if you want to reserve a PDN for the IP telephone connected at the present time. When apply is set, terminal authentication by
MAC address of the IP telephone is valid. So if another IP telephone which has the same PDN is connected to the network, the CIX rejects the registration of this IP telephone because the MAC address of the IP telephone is different.
When not apply is set, you can move the PDN from an IP telephone to another
IP telephone and another IP telephone can be connected to the CIX. When don't care is set, terminal authentication for this telephone is determined by Program
150-02.
The Terminal Authentication setting Apply or Not Apply in this program overrides the Terminal Authentication setting in Program 150-02
Possible values:Apply, Not Apply or Don’t Care (Default)
Station Media Access Control (MAC) Address. This address is hard coded uniquely in each IP telephone. The MAC will only display if the IP telephone is connected to the BIPU-M and is operating properly.
Possible values:Max 12 ASCII characters
Select the Voice Packet configuration table that should be assigned to this IP telephone (voice tables are configured in Program 152). When the G711 Audio
Codec is selected in 08 codec below, the default values in Program 152-01,
Table 1 should be used. When the G.729A codec is selected in 08 Audio Codec below, the default values in Program 152-01 Table 2 should be used.
Important: When switching the IP telephone from the G.711 to the G.729 codec
(the first time), the CIX will automatically switch the Voice Packet table from
Table 1 to Table 2.
Possible values:1 ~ 128
IP telephones have two built-in codecs. Select the audio codec that should be used in this IP telephone.
The G.711codec - provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network bandwidth (about 115kbps per IP telephone when in use).
The G.729A codec - provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IP telephone when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example:
Installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a codec would probable be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table 'Prog 250-07' and the VP Table's voice packet parameters Prog 152 must be set properly for the codec assigned.
Possible values:G711 (Default) or G729A
Note
IP Attendant Console supports G.711 only.
8-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
09 Display Software
Version Number of IP
Telephone
10 SIP Terminal URI
11 SIP Terminal Password
12 IP Sta KeepAlive Timer
13 Station IP DTMF
Translation Mode
14 Secondary Audio Codec for Full IP station
15 Secondary Voice Packet
Index
D
ESCRIPTION
This is read-only. If any problem occurs it is useful to analyze the problem with this version. A sample software version is DIP11NA. DIP1 represents the IP telephone model; 1NA represents software version of the IP telephone; 1N represents the version of updatable software and A means the version of notupdatable software (BootROM).
Possible values:Max. 16 ASCII characters
Set the Uniform Resource Identifier of the SIP terminal. URI is to identify the IP telephone in the system. You can use A-Z, a-z and 0-9 up to 32 characters as the URI. It has to be unique in the system.
Possible values:Max 32 ASCII characters
Set password for terminal authentication of the SIP terminal. This password is checked for terminal authentication when registration is performed from the SIP terminal. You can use A-Z, a-z and 0-9 up to 64 characters. It doesn't have to be unique in the system, and same password can be assigned to plural SIP terminals.
Keep-alive timer for station for full IP station.
Possible values:0 ~ 60 seconds
DTMF translation mode for full IP station.
Possible values:Tone (Default), Outband or Inband
Note
This parameter is not supported in CIX.
IP telephones have two built-in codecs. Select the audio codec that should be used in this IP telephone.
The G.711codec - provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network bandwidth (about 115kbps per IP telephone when in use).
The G.729A codec - provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IP telephone when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example:
If installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a codec would probable be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table Prog 250-07 and the VP Table's voice packet parameters Prog 152 must be set properly for the codec assigned.
Possible values:G711, G729A (Default), None
CIX provides peer to peer connection when an IP telephone directly communicates with another IP telephone. A negotiation method is required to resolve differing audio codec settings on the IP telephones. When a call is established between IP telephones, the CIX will check the assignment of secondary audio codecs. If there is matching assignment, it will be applied. If there is not, the user will hear reorder tone.
Possible values:1 ~ 128
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-19
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
16 IP NAT/No Peer to Peer
17 Base UDP Port for IP
Telephone Media
Channel
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable if the IP telephone is in a NAT (Network Address Translation) environment.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Refer to Figure 8-1.
The base UDP port for the IP telephone media channel can be set to accommodate a particular network configuration.
Possible values:1026 ~ 65532 (Default = 49154)
Note
Only even port numbers can be assigned.
Prog 250-FK16 = Enabled for IPTs on this LIPU (no peer-to-peer)
Public IP Address
LIPU (2) Gateway
Global Network
NAT
Router
CIX
LIPU (1)
Private
IP Address
NAT
Router
IPT (1)
Private IP
Address
Prog 250-FK16 = Disabled for IPTs on this LIPU (Peer-to-peer mode)
NOTE: If the NAT router is a inconsistent/symmetric type, the IPTs on LIPU (1) should have Prog 250-FK16 set to Enabled.
When a system has LIPUs with private IP addresses and LIPUs with public IP addresses set
Prog. 250 - FK16 as shown here to prevent one way speech path between IPT (1) and IPT (2).
IPT (2)
Private IP
Address
Figure 8-1 Station IP NAT Example
8-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
260 Full IP Station Assignment
Prerequisite Program: CABINET SLOT PCB ASSIGNMENTS
This command assigns IP station and MAS HMP resources to the GIPx, MIPU and LIPU/LIPS interfaces.
1. Select Station > Station Assignments, and click on the Basic tab.
2. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed DNs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DNs.
• Create – Assign a new DN with custom settings by entering a DN value. Press OK, assign the PDN
Equipment No. and click Submit.
• Selective Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Selective Copy to make a new DN assignment with settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment and click OK.
3. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
Note The max. number of IP telephones programmed on one MIPU (MIPU24) is 24; the GIPU8 is 8.
F
IELD
00 Prime DN
01 Type
D
ESCRIPTION
Prime DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create for a new station).
Assign device types to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS ports.
•
•
•
•
•
IPT2000 series, IP5000 series telephones, and IP Softphones are IPT
(require End Point License).
SIP telephones are SIP (require End Point license).
IP Attendant Consoles are ATTENDANT (require Basic Port License).
VM Ports are VOICE MAIL (require Basic Port License and MAS HMP resource).
ACD Announcers are ACD ANNOUNCE (require Basic Port License and
MAS HMP resource).
Note IPT1020 telephones cannot be assigned to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS - they must be assigned to a BIPU-M using Prog 200.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-21
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
02 PDN Equipment
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the PDN equipment number. This is the cabinet and slot number of the GIPx,
MIPU, LIPU/LIPS card (0000 means auto assignment).
Notes:
•
IPT1020s must be installed on BIPU-M; cannot be installed on LIPU/LIPS,
MIPU or GIPx.
•
•
•
SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; cannot be installed on BIPU-M
IPT2000 series, IP5000-series, and IP Softphones can be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU, GIPx or BIPU-M (in BIPU-M the IP5000-series telephone acts as an IPT2000-series telephone).
MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•
•
•
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
•
•
•
CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.
03 LAN Interface
Number
Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
Enter 1 for a GIPx, MIPU and LIPU, 2 for an LIPS
Possible values:1 (Default) or 2.
8-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
04
05 COS Day1
•
•
•
•
•
•
08 LCR Group
09 QPL Day1
•
•
Day2
Night
06 DRL Day1
Day 2
Night
07 FRL Day1
Day 2
Night
QPL Day 2
QPL Night
10 Name to Display
11 Dialing Progress
Tone
12 System Call
Forward
D
ESCRIPTION
Not Used
Class of Service for Day1 mode
Possible values:1~32
Class of Service for Day 2 mode.
Possible values:1~32
Class of Service for Night mode.
Possible values:1~32.
Destination Restriction Level for Day1 Mode (used for credit card calling)
Possible values:1~16
Destination Restriction Level for Day2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Destination Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 1 Mode.
Possible values:1~16s
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16s
Facilities Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Least Cost Routing Group Number
Possible values:1~16
Queuing Priority Level for Day 1 Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Queuing Priority Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Queuing Priority Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1~16
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN.
Possible values:16 ASCII characters
Type of tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
Possible values:Dial Tone (Default), Entry Tone, or Silence
System Call Forward group number.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~32 (CIX670 Exp), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-23
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
13 Call Pickup
14 Bearer Capability
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non-ISDN stations. 3.1kHzAudio
(data and speech) or Speech.
Important Notes:
Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set for
3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech). All standard telephone equipment must be set to Speech if making calls over Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Audio (Default) or Speech
15 Display DN
If this station is a member of a hunt group that has a pilot number and Pilot Display
Number set in Prog 209-02 and Prog 209-04 respectively, enter the HG Pilot Display
Number in this field. This number will display on the LCD of telephones when calling, or when called by, this station or VM port.
This is necessary for proper operation of hunt groups, including centralized voice mail, over Strata Net.
Possible values:Dial string of 1~ 5 digits
16 CESID
17 Emergency Call
Group
D
ESCRIPTION
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values:Permitted (Default), Group Only, or Not Permitted
E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID). Should be a valid
NANP telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 16 digits
The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values:1~8 (Default ~ 1)
18 Remote CF/DND
Password
19 VMID Code
20 VM MW Center
Port
Password to remotely set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CIX station, or for Call Forward only from an external DISA line.
Note: DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Possible values:1 ~ 4 digits
Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice mail or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to the PDN that forward to voice mail.
Note: See Prog 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Possible values:1 ~ 10 digits
Message Waiting Center DN.
Enter the VM PDN or Pilot DN number that should display on telephone LCDs when calling voice mail or receiving calls from voice mail.
Possible values:Valid DN
8-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
21 Travel COS
Change
22 TGAC Override
23 Service Tones
24 Call Waiting Tone
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy
(ROB) Tone.
CW tone is always two beeps.
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
25 Dial Directory
Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such as Call Waiting Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar devices.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
The telephone User Name will appear in the display of large LCD (Directory
Assistance).
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
26 Door Over DND
27 Set System Speed
Dial
28 Network COS
D
ESCRIPTION
Privilege Change the Travelling Class of Service Override Code.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Trunk Group Access Code Override for attendant console.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Enable DND to be overridden by a door phone.
Possible values:Override or Not Override (Default)
Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Network Class Of Service number.
Possible values:1 (Default) ~ 32
29 Auto OCA
30 Originate OCA
31 RSTU
Supervision
32 Station SpDial
Bins
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA calls to be received.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Important Note: This privilege must be disabled for all voice mail and auto attendant ports.
Possible Values: Enabled (Default) or Disabled
Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and connect to
CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision should be set with Not Received.
This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in PRG 104, PB06 for these types of connections.
Possible Values: Received (Default) or Not Received
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Possible values:0 ~ 100 (maximum=100 per station).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-25
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
33 Call Forward Dial
Tone
34 Dialing Digit
Restriction
35 CO Park & Hold
36 MW & DND Dial
Tone
37 Activate Message
Waiting
38 Tenant Number
39 Hook-Switch
Recall
D
ESCRIPTION
When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if Station Call Forward is set on the telephone.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
After the extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any subsequent digits.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to press the
CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when it has a message waiting indication and the station will receive a busy tone burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8, or 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8, 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
Note: This parameter does not apply to voice mail ports, they use the special message waiting access codes.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1(default) ~ 8
1: Enable Recall for Digital Telephones for normal operation.
2: Disable Recall on Standard Telephones that produce hook-switch bounce when they are hung-up. This prevents annoying ring recalls when the user hangs up on a call.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
8-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
40 Auto-Campon to
PDN
41 LCR PDN Code
42 Network Calling
Number
43 Security Code
44 My Phone
Manager Level
45 Speaker OCA
49 IP Phone Login
Password
50 Use Transfer
Registration
D
ESCRIPTION
Enable - to allow auto-campon to this PDN when busy and called by a CO line even if the CO line group has auto camp-on disabled in Program 304-17.
Disable - to not allow auto camp-on to this PDN when called by a CO line if the CO line group has auto camp-on disabled in Program 304-17.
Notes
1. Auto camp-on will always occur on the PDN if the calling CO line group has auto camp-on enabled in Program 304-17 regardless of how this option is set.
2. Auto camp-on will be applied or not to PhDNs according to the PhDN owner PDN setting for this option.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits Table.
Possible values:G711, G729A (Default), None
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network this number will be sent over the
Strata Net to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end node (providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the Caller ID number. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is originated, nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a
PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:32 Digits max.
Used for log in to My Phone manger when Voice Mail does not exist. This Security
Code is also used for IP User Mobility. If #49 is set to Enable, this field must be given a value.
Possible values:16 Characters Max
Enter the Personal Admin user privilege level for this station.
Possible values:Normal (Default), Super1 or Super2.
Enable or disable Speaker OCA on an IP telephone. When speaker OCA is assigned to an IP telephone, an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone. If there is no available IP port, S-OCA cannot be assigned and an eManager error will occur.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Determines whether a password is required for phone login. Used for both MyPhyone
Manger and for IP User Mobility, as well. If set to Enable, a password is required in #43.
Possible values:Enable (applies a phone login password) or Disabled (Default)
Whether or not apply Transfer Reg. - Set to Enable to allow IP Mobility for this DN.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Note
Assign a Phone Logout feature key on this DN.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-27
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
51 Connecting
Equipment
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
This field shows which LIPU/MIPU/GIPx (Cabinet #/ Slot#/ Port#) the IP station is connected to. This value enables the Admin to determine which LIPU/MIPU/GIPx was used to host the IP station if the IP station was created using dynamic (0000) port creation.
MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
52 Station Calling
Name Type
53 Station Specified
Caller ID
Cabinet numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
•
•
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
•
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
•
•
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
•
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.
Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
Enter the type of Calling Name for Outgoing Name Delivery. This field is only valid for
Outgoing Call for “National” or “Nortel” ISDN-PRI Trunks.
1:None - Not send the Calling Name to ISDN-PRI Trunk
2:LCD - Send the station name assigned by PRG200 FK10 to ISDN-PRI Trunk.
3.SPECIAL - Send the Special Name assigned by PRG322 FK4 to ISDN-PRI Trunk.
4.DEFAULT - Send the Default Calling Name assigned by PRG321 FK5 to ISDN-PRI
Trunk.
Enabled - Station Name is displayed after the call is answered on an internal call.
Disabled - Station Name is changed to DN after the call is answered on an internal call.
8-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup
F
IELD
54 Simple System
SpeedDial
D
ESCRIPTION
Whether or not to system speed dial supplement is allowed.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
55 SIP Inband Mode
Whether or not SIP extensions can transmit DTMF to a trunk while ringing the called party.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
674 Remote Node IPU IP Address Assignment
Note Release 5.00 MR14 and later only.
Prerequisite Program: none
This command assigns a node ID to an MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address. This is used by the IP Mobility feature to identify the home MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address of a DN.
1. Select Strata Net > Remote Node IPU Address.
2. Enter the Remote Node ID.
3. Enter the IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU in that remote node.
4. Click Add.
5. To Remove or Modify a node, double-click the Node ID.
F
IELD
00 Remote Node ID
D
ESCRIPTION
The Node ID of the CIX system to connect to over Strata Net.
01 Remote Node IPU IP Address
IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU in the remote node.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-29
IP Telephone Programming
IP Mobility Programming
IP Mobility Programming
Requirements
•
•
CIX Software: R5.10 or higher
SoftIPT: 02.00.0000 or higher
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MIPU: MIPU_01_01 or higher
GIPH: GIPH_02_03 or higher
GIPU8
LIPU: LIPU_02_03 or higher
Network eManager
IPT20X0-SD: DIP2T2K
IPT2008: DIP2M2K
IPT2010: DIP2T2KX-A06
IP5000
Note IP User Mobility will run on an MIPU/GIPU and an LIPU version LIPU_02_03 or higher. IP Mobility is not supported on the BIPU.
More IP Telephone DNs than xIPU ports
In R5 and later, software administrators are able to create more IP telephones in Program 260 than the number of xIPU ports.
When an IP telephone DN is programmed (Prog. 260) as Fixed Assignment it is registered to an available xIPU resource. The xIPU resource must be available when the DN is programmed. When the IP telephone
DN is in use it will use that xIPU port. When logged out the xIPU port is held for that IP telephone DN. If an xIPU resource is not available the IP telephone DN cannot be programmed. IP licenses are not checked when the DN is programmed.
When an IP telephone DN is registered by Program 260, field 02 as Auto Assignment there is no specific xIPU resource assigned and the number of licenses is not checked. This means there can be more IP telephone DNs programmed into the CIX data base than there are xIPU resources. Also, there can be more IP telephone DNs than IP port licenses.
8-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
Feature Administration/Programming
Feature Administration/Programming
New programming is as follows.
Table 8-1 CIX Programming Notes
Program
Number
102
205
213
215
260
260
260
674
FK/Feature
Code
545
Parameter Name/ Programming
Name
Logout Feature Access Code
545
545
545 field 49 field 50 field 51
—
Range Default
Used
Function
Logout
Logout Feature Key
5 Digits Max
Feature Key
Number
No Data
No Data Logout
Logout Feature Key
Logout Feature Key
Feature Key
Number
Feature Key
Number
No Data
No Data
Logout
Logout
Whether or not apply the Login
Password Authentication
Enabled/Disabled Disabled Login
Whether or not apply Transfer Reg Enabled/Disabled Disabled Transfer Reg
Displays the PDN Equipment
Number of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU the IP telephone is connecting with
Other Node MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP
Address Assignment
XXYYZZ
XX=Cab, YY=Slot,
ZZ=LAN IF No.
—
—
—
Login
Login to
Multi-Node
Table 8-2 IP Telephone Feature And Programming Notes
Upper: IPT2010, 2020, IP5122-
SD, 5122-SDC, 5132-SD
Lower: IPT2008, IP5131-SDL
Network Setting Mode
SELECT=2, field 25
Network Setting (Basic) Network
Network Setting Mode
SELECT = 2, field 26
Network Setting (Basic) Network
Network Setting Mode
SELECT = 2, field 13
Network Setting (Basic) Network
Terminal Information
SELECT=1, field 04
Terminal Information
Parameter Name
Whether or not to apply
Auto-Login on power up
The password for authentication when Auto-
Login on power up is set
Secondary IPU address
The display of MIPU/
GIPU/LIPU IP address the
IP telephone is connecting with
Range
Auto/Manual
16 digits Max
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
XXX = 0 - 255
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
XXX = 0 - 255
Default
Auto
No Data
Auto-Login on power up
0.0.0.0
—
Used
Function
Auto-Login on power up
Secondary
IPU address
Primary IPU address
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-31
IP Telephone Programming
Feature Administration/Programming
Upper: IPT2010, 2020, IP5122-
SD, 5122-SDC, 5132-SD
Lower: IPT2008, IP5131-SDL
Terminal Information
SELECT=2, field 27
The IPT2008-SDL and IP5131-
SDL have language change capability
Parameter Name
Language Mode
Range
US English, UK
English, French/
Spanish
Default
Used
Function
US
English
IP Mobility Programming Steps
The basics of IP Mobility setup are done in the station assignment programming. The IP Mobility features are assigned to directory numbers (DN). The steps below outline the process.
1. Assign the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card.
2.
Assign the DN that will use IP Mobility as an IPT. In program 260:
• field 01 –set to IPT
• field 49 – is a password required?
Disable (default) - no password required
Enable - a password is required to login. Set the password in field 43
• field 43 – The security code entered here is the IP Mobility login password when field 49 = Enable
• field 50 – Use Transfer Registration
Enable = IP Mobility
Disable = This DN does not have IP Mobility
• field 51–Read-Only field. Displays the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU equipment number for this DN.
3.
For multi-node systems, assign the IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card in each node. Use
Network eManager Strata Net > Remote Node IPU Address. These assignments must be made in all nodes.
Compatibility
IP User Mobility is compatible with the following:
•
LIPU/LIPS (LIPU_02_03 and later)
•
GIPH
•
GIPU8
•
MIPU16
•
MIPU24
IP Mobility is not supported on the BIPU.
8-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update
xIPU and IPT Program Update
To start updating the xIPU or IPT firmware, the update firmware files must be stored on FTP Server (see
Appendix B – Software and Firmware Updates on page B-1 ). You can update the xIPU using Network
eManager. You cannot update a BIPU-Q. If you need to update a BIPU-Q, return it to Toshiba.
Network eManager automatically disables the xIPU before any xIPU/IPT program update and preserves the initial state of the xIPU (idle or disable) after program update is done.
The xIPU program update has two processing options: sequential and simultaneous. If the FTP server is a
CIX (SmartMedia) sequential processing must be used.
•
•
•
The IPT program update is performed sequentially only. A table sorted by xIPU shows a summary of the
IPT selection. You can select multiple IPTs. You can change the selection at any time before the update process starts. The process flow is as follows:
The xIPU corresponding to the first group of IPTs is automatically disabled (if its current status is idle)
IPTs are updated one by one. Up to maximum 128 IPTs can be selected for one updating process.
xIPU is re-enabled (if its initial state was idle)
These steps are repeated automatically until the entire user selection is processed.
Both the xIPU and IPT update pages have an Abort and Abort All button. The Abort button is available per item (xIPU, IPT), only when the current processing status allows the abort operation. Aborting the update process is allowed only in two phases “Getting the update file” and “Resetting.”
The Abort All button is available when an update is in progress. You can click on Abort All to abort all updates starting with the one currently processing. If abort operation is not allowed at the time, the message “Please wait while system has a chance to abort…” appears. All program update processes will be aborted when this is allowed by the CIX.
The synchronization between Network eManager and the CIX is not perfect during this process. Network eManager sends a command, then checks for the completion of the command. If you click on Abort at the end of the “Getting the update file” phase, Network eManager will abort in the next phase that abort is allowed, which is resetting.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-33
IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update
FTP Server Information
CIX SmartMedia
When FTP server is CIX-SmartMedia, the files for xIPU/IPT program update must be stored in the
PROGRAM folder on SmartMedia. xIPU/IPT screens will automatically fill the Directory field in the FTP information group using the name PROGRAM, and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this directory on Smart Media.
Network eManager Machine
When the FTP server is a Network eManager machine, the installation will create a physical directory under \Strata eManager named CTXIPUPDATE. This is the physical path you should indicate when creating CTXIPUPDATE virtual directory on the default FTP Site. The files for xIPU/IPT program update will be stored in CTXIPUPDATE directory on the Network eManager machine. xIPU/IPT pages will automatically fill the directory field in the FTP Server information group using the name CTXIPUPDATE and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this directory on the Network eManager machine.
External FTP
When FTP server is External FTP, not CIX - Smart Media, nor the Network eManager machine, users will have to provide all the information in the FTP information group.
Important!
The External FTP Server must be used if IPT, BIPUs and/or Network eManager do not have the same subnet address.
Network eManager provides an External FTP list page to manage FTP information for External FTP servers. This page can be used to add, modify and remove FTP server information (user, password, IP address, directory and file) for External FTP servers or the Network eManager local machine. The information will be stored in a file on the Network eManager machine and will be provided in a selection window when the user clicks on External FTP on the xIPU/IPT pages. This eliminates the need to enter the same FTP information for External FTP servers each time the xIPU/IPT program update is run.
xIPU Program Update
Prerequisites
1. Make sure that the networking devices between xIPU and the FTP server meet the requirements for
IP-CIX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create an FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that it is visible by the IPT IP address.
CAUTION!
Do not run other updates simultaneously.
Programming
1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > L/M/B IPU Update.
2. Select card slot to be updated
3. Enter the FTP information.
4. Select xIPU Update option.
5. Click Start to begin the xIPU update.
8-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
User Name
Password
IP Address
Data Directory
File Name
IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the name of a valid user account on the FTP server you select: Smart
Media (CIX), Local eManager or external FTP server.
Enter the password of a valid user account on the FTP server you select:
Smart Media (CIX), Local eManager or external FTP server.
Enter the IP address of a valid user account on the FTP server you select.
For Smart Media, this is the IP address of the CIX. For Local eManager, this is the IP address of the Network eManager computer. For external FTP, this is the IP address of the computer used as the external FTP server.
This is the folder on the Smart Media card where the update file is stored. If the FTP Server is Local eManager or External Server this is a virtual FTP directory. The virtual directory path property indicates the physical location where the update file is stored.
Enter the name of the updated file (vmlinus).
External FTP List – Clicking the External FTP List button enables users to store external FTP server information.
F
IELD
FTP Account
User Name
Password
Update File Location
IP Address
Data Directory
File Name
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the name of a valid user account on the external FTP server.
Enter the name of a valid user account on the external FTP server.
Enter the IP address of the computer used as the external FTP server.
This is the folder on the Smart Media card where the update file is stored. If the FTP Server is Local eManager or External Server, this is a virtual FTP directory. The virtual directory path property indicates the physical location where the update file is stored.
Enter the name of the updated file.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
8-35
IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update
IPT Program Update
The IPT program update function consists of retrieving the updated file from an FTP server, updating and rebooting the selected IPT.
CAUTION!
Do not run other updates simultaneously.
Prerequisites
1. Make sure that the networking devices between xIPU, IPT and the FTP server meet the requirements for IP-CIX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s)).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create an FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that it is visible by the xIPU IP address.
Note Use the IP-B Prog. to update IP telephone sets connected to BIPU cards.
Use the IP-L Prog. to update the later IP telephone sets connected to MIPU/GIPU/LIPU cards.
Programming
1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT B Update. Then select the BIPU card slot.
— OR —
Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT_L/M/G Update. Then select xIPU card slot
2. Select IPTs to be updated.
3. Repeat step 2 and 3 for multiple updates.
4. Enter the FTP information.
5. Click Start to begin the IPT Program update.
Notes
•
All selected IPTs are updated sequentially.
•
Maximum of 128 IPTs can be selected in one IPT update process.
F
IELD
User Name
Password
IP Address
Data Directory
File Name
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.
Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.
Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.
Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.
Enter the name of the updated file (apph248.out).
8-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
9
This chapter covers a variety of services offered by Strata CIX. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Voice
Mail, Destination Restriction (DR), Least Cost Routing (LCR), Networking, Station Message Detail
Reporting (SMDR), External Devices, System Parameters and other miscellaneous services are discussed.
Important!
•
Advanced Strata CIX programming topics are covered in this chapter. Programmers should make sure each section is thoroughly understood before proceeding to programming.
•
Networking programs found in this chapter are not available with the Strata CTX28.
540, 541 Pilot DN Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance, they are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications, Pilot DNs are used to call directly, or transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes – this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to a specific VM box.
On Multi-Node, CIX Strata Net Networks, Pilot DNs must be unique throughout the entire network. A Pilot
DN of a CIX Node must not be a duplicate of any other type of DN in any other CIX Node - DN types include PDN, PhDN, Hunt Group Pilot DN or other Pilot DN.
Maximum Pilot DNs
CIX40 = 90
CIX100, CIX200 and CIX670 Basic = 100; CIX 200 and CIX670 Expanded = 256.
CIX1200 Basic = 100; CIX1200 Expanded = 256
1. Select Station > Pilot DN.
2. Enter a Pilot DN Number or click one of the following buttons:
List – view a summary list of programmed Pilot DNs.
Create – Assign a new Pilot DN with default settings.
-
Copy – Enter a Pilot DN number and click Copy to make a new Pilot DN assignment with settings copied from the Pilot DN entered.
-
Delete – Enter a Pilot DN and click OK.
-
Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 540 data.
4. Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-1
Services
.
Field
Pilot DN
D
ESCRIPTION
Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance - they are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications, Pilot DNs are used to call directly, or transfer calls directly to specific voice mail boxes – this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to a specific VM box.
Possible values:Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:
CIX40 = 90
CIX100, CIX200 and CIX670 Basic: = 100, Exp: = 256
CIX1200 Basic = 100, Exp = 256
01 Alternate Destination
Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the alternate destination if the
Pilot DN is not available (example: ACD after shift). If Dialing Digits is selected, enter the appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
Alternate DN
If Dialing Digits is selected as the alternate destination, enter the PDN,
PhDN or hunt group pilot number to which the call should be routed.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Voice Mail ID
If the alternate destination is voice mail, enter the voice mail ID that should be sent.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
9-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
579 System Voice Mail Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns DTMF/SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters for the system.
1. Select > System > Voice Mail Data.
2. Enter Program 579 data.
3. Get Default - sets all values to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 DID/DNIS or DN VMID
Option
Select DN VMID to send the DN's VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number's VMID to voice mail on DID/
DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
Possible values: Before Answer Only (default), Before and After.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS number (Program 309, field 11 or field 15) or the VMID of the forwarding DN (Program 200, field 19 or 206, field 06) will be sent to voice mail per this option.
Note The DID/DNIS number's VMID (Prog 309, 11 or 15) is always sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that ring directly to voice mail or ring a
DN which then forwards to voice mail before it is ever answered.
02 Cancellation Method for VM MW
Select the method used to cancel voice mail message waiting indication.
Possible values:Auto and Access Code Cancel or Access Code Cancel (default)
03 Message Desk
Number
04 Output of CLASS /
ANI and DNIS
Enable sending of the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI packet; otherwise 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number is sent.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enable including Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
05 Calling Number Digits
Sent to VM
Choose how many calling number digits are sent to VM unit.
Possible values:2~10 digits (default = 10)
Note
If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled this value must be 10.
06 Blank Digits Sent to
VM
07 Auto Cancel of VM and MW
Select SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.
Possible values:1 or 2 (default) - 1 = 1985 (single space), 2 = 1991 (two spaces)
Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW (this function is not currently supported).
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
08 DTMF Duration
Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.
Possible values:80 ms (default) or 160 ms
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-3
Services
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
09 Voice Mail Soft Keys
Enables CIX Proprietary Integration for Soft Key Control of VM. CIX Proprietary
Integration and Soft Key Control of Voice Mail requires an iES32 or Stratagy
Enterprise Server Release 3.x or higher.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
10 Central VM Callback
Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is left blank the previously stored number will be deleted.
Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 CF - All Call Record
Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd All Calls.”
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
12 CF - Busy Record
13 CF - No Answer
Record
14 Direct Call
Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd Busy.”
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving via “Call Fwd No Answer.”
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
Enter DTMF VMID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a Direct Call.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)
15 Retrieve Messages
Enter DTMF VMID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve messages.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 92)
16 Transfer Direct to VM
DN
Pilot DN of the VM as a direct transfer destination.
Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
17 Length of VM ID
Select the number of characters in VMID string.
Possible values:1~10 (default = 10)
18 SMDI Call ID Packet
Enable - to send SMDI Call ID DC packet on Voice mail calls.
Disable - do not send SMDI Call ID DC packet on Voice mail calls.
This feature requires Stratagy R5 or higher. It should be enabled when using multilanguage VM (French, Spanish, English, etc.) or other VM adaptability features.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
19 SMDI ANI/CLID Digit
Length
Enter the number of digits to be sent to on the SMDI packet for Class, CLID, ANI, and
DNIS numbers.
Possible values:2~20 (default = 10)
20 Voice Mail Support on
DP5000 Softkey
Enable for support of voicemail on DP5000 softkeys. Disable for DKT3000 and 2000 telephones.
Possible values:Enable, Disable (default)
21 SMDI Time Stamp
Packet
When enabled, the CIX sends a timestamp packet through the SMDI link to the voice mail system. Used to keep the clock in the CIX and the Toshiba voice mail system in synch. Disable when using SMDI with non-Toshiba voice mail systems.
Possible values: Enable/Disable
Default value: Enable
9-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
580 Voice Mail Port Data
Prerequisite Program: None
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.
1. Select System > Voice Mail Port Data.
2. Enter a VM Port DN or click one of the following buttons:
-
List – view a summary list of programmed VM Port DNs.
Copy – Enter an VM Port DN value in the field with the same name. Click Copy to make a new VM
Port DN assignment with settings copied from the port entered in VM Port DN.
3. Enter Program 580 data.
4. Get Default - sets all values to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 VM Port DN
01 Control Method
02 Send A/D Tone
03 Send B Tone
04 End-to-end
07 VM to VM Call
Blocking
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice mail enter the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for remote voice mail.
Possible values:Inband or SMDI (default = no value)
Select whether Strata CIX sends A or D tone when a station connecting to voice mail answers or disconnects respectively.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = no value)
Enable Strata CIX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer Recall.
Possible values:B Tone, No Tone or B Tone and Extension Number
(default = no value)
Enable Strata CIX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to key presses from a digital telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = no value)
Set to blocking to prevent Voice Mail Auto Attendant, supervised transferred, calls from forwarding back into Voice Mail.
Possible values:Blocking or Non-blocking (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-5
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Programming DR/LCR features in Strata CIX requires an advanced knowledge of telephone programming.
Make sure you have a thorough understanding of the discussion that follows before attempting to program these features. For details on LCR, see
DR Overview
Strata CIX offers DR as a major expansion of traditional Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction is used to prevent the unauthorized use of toll prefixes to the PSTN as follows:
•
•
1 – long distance
0 – operator assistance
•
011 – international
Strata CIX has expanded this to include restriction based on any string of dialed digits. Strata CIX can restrict any string of up to 13 dialed digits including * and #.
Thirteen-digit screening allows control of access to individual telephone numbers in remote area codes.
Restriction of *, # controls access to vertical service codes from the CO such as camp-on and call forwarding.
DR is always applied to calls originated through LCR and may be applied to calls originated through Trunk
Group Access, Individual Trunk Access, CO Key, Group CO Key, Pooled Line Key, and Strata Net private networking. Special screening tables allow restriction of calls placed through Centrex or PBXs to which the
Strata CIX may be connected.
.
DR is controlled by a DR Level (DRL) that is assigned to any station or trunk capable of making an outside call. Each of the 16 DRLs relate to a DR Table. A DR Table may be an Allow or Deny table and may be associated with an Exception Table. A Deny Toll Restriction Table contains a list of dial strings that are prohibited. Its associated Exception Table lists the dial strings within the Deny Table ranges that would be allowed. For example, a Deny table might deny access to all of Area Code 1-800. Its exception table could permit access to specific office codes within that area such as 1-800-234.
9-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Basic Operation
The flow chart below describes the basic logic by which calls are connected or rejected as a result of DR.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-7
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Tables
Strata CIX uses two or three tables to apply DR:
•
•
Screening Tables. There are two types of screening tables as follows:
-
LCR Screening Tables.
OLG-Specific Screening Tables.
DR Table or Exception Table to the DR Table.
Screening tables are used in Behind Centrex/PBX operations to detect access codes required by the
Centrex/PBX and processes them appropriately in a way that is transparent to end users.
DR/LCR Screening
DR is applied to all LCR calls using
“530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment” on page 9-24
. It analyzes the digits dialed after the LCR access code (typically
9
).
Example: A station user dials 9 *72 1-617-234-5678. The outgoing line will serve as an incoming line that this user is attempting to forward to his home. The system administrator has created an LCR/Screening entry to prevent the forwarding of this line to the user’s home. With Skip & Apply under DR action and a
Skip Length of 0, the call will be forced to present *
72
to the DR table where the call will be rejected. Apply under LCR Action ensures that the entire string will be processed by LCR. In this case, Digit Modification is irrelevant.
DR Screening for OLG Table
An OLG-specific DR Screening Table is used when a call is originated through a Line Key, Pooled Line
Key, Group CO Key, Trunk Group Access Code or Direct Trunk Access Code and a CO line is chosen that requires DR. The decision to apply DR to an OLG is made in
minus the Strata CIX access code, are sent.
The OLG-specific table performs two functions:
•
•
It manipulates the digits that will be screened by the DR table.
It creates a Pause Value that ensures that the Centrex or PBX which is the source of the trunk will receive and interpret the digits correctly. This is used to compensate for older, slower equipment.
Example: A station user dials 81-9-1-617-234-5678 where 81 is the Trunk Group Access Code for a
Centrex trunk group. 9 is the Centrex LCR access code. The Skip Length of 1 tells the system how many of the first digits constitute an access code or other digits that may be ignored. The DR Action of Skip &
Apply tells the system to ignore the 9 and present 16172345678 to the DR Table used in the next step in the process. The Pause Value of two seconds tells the system that, if it passes the DR Tables and is connected to a trunk, it is to pause two seconds after outdialing the 9 and before outdialing 16172345678.
9-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
DR Table
Each DRL is associated with a DR Table that defines the destinations to which a holder of that DRL is entitled to place a call. Permission may be expressed in Allow or Deny tables. The DR Table is activated by defining the table as Allow or Deny through
“523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignments” on page 9-21 .
The table is then populated one string at a time through “533 DRL Table Assignment” on page 9-26
. The table may have up to 100 entries. Entries may include any DTMF character including * and #.
As soon as Strata CIX finds a match in the table, it acts upon it. Therefore, entering
1
in a Deny table will deny all 1+ calling to users with that DRL whereas entering
1-888
denies calls to the 888 Area Code.
Exceptions can be created in the DRL Exception Table.
DRL Exception Table Assignment – Once a DR Table has been established for a DRL, its exception table can be created using
“534 DRL Exception Table Assignment” on page 9-27 . Exceptional DR Tables
are optional. Dial strings in Exception tables may be as long as 11 digits. If it was desired to deny access to every office code in the 617 area code except Directory Assistance, one would first create a deny table that included 617 and then create an associated exception table that allowed 617-555-1212.
Interaction With Other Features
Behind Centrex Operation
will use the values stored here to strip local and Centrex access codes from the dial string and determine the external number being dialed. This external number will then be processed according to the DR rules described above.
Note The Centrex to which the OLG is attached may impose its own DRs.
Credit Card Calling
If a valid credit card number is detected, the CIX will not apply DR to a call because the charges for such a call are applied to the credit card rather than the outgoing line used.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-9
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Destination Restriction Guide Page
Use the Destination Restriction (DR) guide pages to program Destination Restriction.
1. Click LCR/DR > DR Guide Page.
The Destination Restriction Guide Page opening screen displays.
2. Click on any Program number to start using the Guide page.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and Next buttons to help you navigate to the previous and next programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a group has a Guide Page button instead of a Next button to take you to the main Destination Restriction Guide Page.
DR Dialing Setup
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening table.
Use this program to define special dialing codes that are normally dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR action should be applied after users dial the special code (Bypass or Skip and Apply DR).
Programs 531 / 650 – Centrex/PBX DR Screening table.
Use this program to define Centrex/PBX line access codes. It defines what DR action should be applied after users dial the Centrex/PBX line access code (Bypass” or Skip and Apply DR). It is also used to assign OLG to this table and/or enable Centrex assume 9 dialing.
Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis.
Use this program to prevent standard telephone users from avoiding DR by sending DTMF tones to the
PSTN before DR analysis is complete. In LCR applications, it allows calls to cut through to the PSTN immediately so users do not have to wait for a pause timer to cut through after dialing a number.
DR Digit Table Setup
Programs 111 / 532 / 533 / 534 – DRL Assignments.
Use this screen to define Destination Restriction tables for each DRL. It combines the following programs into a single screen for viewing, editing and copying DR tables.
111 - Used to define if the DRL allows credit card calling or not.
532 - Used to define each DR table as an Allow or Deny table.
533 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from one DR Exception table to another DR Exception table.
534 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from one DR Exception table to another DR Exception Table.
9-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing
Table 9-1 DRL Dial String Template
DRL Allow/Deny/Exception
DRL1 Deny
DRL10 Allow
DRL11 Deny
DRL12
Exception
Deny
Dial String
Nothing
Nothing
1, 809, 900, 976,
NXX976
Comments
Deny nothing so all calling is allowed
Allow nothing so all outbound calls are restricted
Denies long distance calls, pay per service toll calls, except for toll free calls and allows local calls
1800, 1877, 1888
011, 1809, 1900,1976,
809,900, 976,
1NXX976, NXX976
Allows local and long distance calls, restricts pay per service toll calls, and restricts international calls
DR Class of Service Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service (COS).
Use this screen to set COS options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.
Program 200 / 260 – Station Data.
Set the COS options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.
Program 105 – System Parameters.
Set the system parameters related to DR and other outgoing call options.
Program 510 – Class of Service.
Setup override codes for DRLs and other related features. Override code digit length must be defined in
Program 105-15, System Parameters. This feature is described as Traveling Class Override in the telephone user guide.
Program 509 – System Speed Dial DRL level.
Set the DRL, COS, FRL and OPL level that should be applied when users dial outgoing calls using system speed. This must be enabled in 105-09, system parameters.
Program 306 – Outgoing Line Groups.
Set Station options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-11
Services
LCR Overview
LCR Overview
LCR Analysis Process
The flowchart below represents the process by which the Strata CIX analyzes dialed digits and makes LCR decisions. The graphic is divided into four areas each described below. DR and call connection are described elsewhere in this document and are shown here only for their roles in the LCR process.
Figure 1 LCR Analysis Process Flow
9-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
LCR Overview
DR
LCR begins with the receipt of a dial string from a facility capable of originating an outgoing call: station, automated attendant, Tie trunk, DISA trunk, DID trunk, etc. The dial string is identified as an LCR call by the presence of the LCR feature access code—typically 9. The LCR access code is removed and the remaining external digits are processed.
Route Analysis
Route Analysis chooses a route plan based on the dialed digits. The Routing Analysis Plan becomes the index into the time/date calculations described in the next section. If the Strata CIX is unable to match the dial string, it uses the default route plan which assures a route out of the system. If a match is found, the
CIX determines if an exception table is associated with the dial string. If the dial string appears in the exception table, the call is assigned to the route plan stored in the exception table. Otherwise, the route plan stored in the initial table is used.
Time of Day
The Strata CIX maintains time and day values for LCR separate from those for the general system. One day can be divided into three zones, and each day can be categorized as a Weekday, Weekend, or
Holiday.
Connection
Selection of a Route Choice Table begins the process of actually connecting the call to an outgoing trunk.
Each Route Choice Table consists of six route definitions which operate in terminal hunt fashion to select an OLG and to apply a digit modification treatment.
LCR Guide Page
1. Click LCR/DR > LCR Guide Page.
The Least Cost Routing Guide Page screen displays.
2. Click on any Program Number to start using the guide pages.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and Next buttons to help you navigate to the previous and next programs in a group.
The Program at the end of a group has a Guide Page button instead of a Next button to take you to the main Least Cost Routing Guide Page.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-13
Services
LCR Overview
LCR Dialing Setup
Program 102 – Flexible Access Codes
Use this program to change the LCR access code. The default LCR access code is 9. You can change the default access code to any number from 0~9, *, and/or #. Enter an access code number that does not conflict with the existing numbering plan.
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening Table
Use this program to define special dialing codes that are normally dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR action should be applied after users dial the special code
(Bypass or Skip and Apply DR).
Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Use this program to prevent standard telephone users from circumventing DR by sending DTMF tones to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. In LCR applications, it allows calls to cut through to the PSTN immediately so users do not have to wait for a pause timer to cut through after dialing a number.
LCR Route Plan Setup
Program 520 – LCR Local Route Plan Assignments
Use this program to select which LCR route plan is used for local calls.
Programs 521/ 522– Route Plan Digit Analysis Table
Use this program to assign Analysis and Exception digits (digit strings) to route plan tables.
This screen enables you to view, add and delete Analysis Digits and Exception Digits.
Programs 526 / 525 – Route Definition and Modified Digits Assignments
Use these programs to assign OLG groups and modified digit tables to Route Definitions.
Program 524 – Route Choice Table Assignments
Use this program to assign Route Definitions to Route Choice Tables.
Note Double click a row to activate the Add, Modify and Delete buttons.
Program 523 – LCR Route Schedule Assignments
Use this program to define the Route Schedule for each Route Plan.
9-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
LCR Overview
Table Buttons on the LCR Route Schedule Screen
Notes
•
Clicking table buttons display exclusive and dynamic tables. You can move these tables anywhere on the screen by clicking the blue title bar and dragging it to a desired location.
•
The tables are dynamic because you can click on any route plan on the 523 LCR Route Schedule
Assignment screen and notice the table information change to pertain to that route plan.
•
Route/Plan Choice – Click this button to view route plans and route choice. This table combines all information found in the Route Plan Analysis Digits table and Route Choice Definition table on a per
Route Plan basis.
•
Route Plan Analysis Digits – Click this button to view the Route Plan Analysis table.
•
Route Choice Definition – Click this button to view the Route Choice Table view.
•
Station LCR Group – Click this button to view the Station LCR Group table.
LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup
Program 528 – LCR Days of the Week Assignments
Use this program to assign each day of the week as a Weekday, Weekend or Holiday.
Program 529 – LCR Route Time Zone Assignments
Use this program to define Route Plan day types and time zones.
Program 527 – LCR Holiday Assignments
Use this program to assign which days of the year should follow LCR Holiday routing assignments.
LCR COS and Station Setup
Program 103 – Class of Service
Use this program to enable or disable LCR in COS feature sets.
Program 200 / 260– Station Data
Use this program to assign stations to COS feature sets and LCR station groups.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-15
Services
LCR/DR
LCR/DR
LCR Assignment
Program Number(s): 520, 521 and 522
User access to LCR is determined by programming the following:
•
•
103 COS Assignment – 29 LCR Feature (see
) enables access to LCR COS.
200 Station Assignment – 07 LCR Group (see
page 5-1 ) assigns a station to an LCR Group.
•
304 ILG Assignment – 23 LCR Group
) assigns an LCR Group to an ILG.
Note Appropriate COS, DRL and FRL assignments must be made to all LCR stations and trunks.
1. Click Advanced Configuration > LCR/DR > Assignment.
2. Enter Program 520 data.
3. Enter Program 521 data.
4. Enter Program 522 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to select which of 64 LCR Route Plans should be used to route local calls. The
Local Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment, determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Local Area Code
Enter the 3-digit area code for the dialing area where the system is installed.
This is the area code of the CO that provides local CO lines to the system. If no data is entered in this field, any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values:3 digits (default = no value)
02 Local Route Plan
Enter the LCR route plan number to be used to route local calls. Local calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone numbers not requiring an Area Code.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or expanded is 64.
Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128
03 LCR Campon
Enable - to camp-on to a line group when all lines in the group selected by LCR are busy - this will send ringback tone to the user and the user will be campedon to the busy line group until a line becomes available to make the outgoing call.
Disabled - to not camp-on to a busy line group when using LCR. Will send busy tone to the user when using LCR and all lines in the selected line group are busy. The user does not camp-on to the line group and will have to try to make the call again.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
9-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
LCR/DR
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command assigns number to the Route Plan Analysis Table.
F
IELD
00 Analysis Digits
01 Route Plan Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan.
A Route Plan Analysis Table may have up to 1280 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A Route Plan Analysis Table may have up to 2500 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Digits may include wild cards 'X' and 'N' where X = 0~9 and N = 2~9.
A digit string may be up to 7 digits for CTX28, CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and
CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A digit string may be up to 19 digits for CIX1200 basic and expanded.
(default = no value)
Enter the LCR route plan number that should be used.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or expanded is 64.
Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128.
Entering Remove deletes the Analysis Digits from the table where they had been assigned.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-17
Services
LCR/DR
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-17
This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the LCR Route Plan Exception Analysis
Table which assigns each string to 1 of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are exceptions to the values established in Program 521.
F
IELD
00 Exception Digits
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.) to be assigned to a Exception Plan Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 19 digits long.
An Exception Plan Analysis Table may have up to 1280 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
An Exception Plan Analysis Table may have up to 2500 members in
CIX1200 basic and expanded.
A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Digits may include wild cards 'X' and 'N' where X = 0~9 and N = 2~9.
(default = no value).
01 Exception Route Plan
Enter the LCR route plan number that should be used.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or expanded is 64. Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128.
Entering Remove deletes the Exception Digits from the table.
9-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Route Define
Program Number(s): 524, 525 and 526
Define the participants in the LCR Route Plan.
1. Select LCR/DR > Route Define.
2. Enter Program 524 data.
3. Enter Program 525 data.
4. Enter Program 526 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 525 below
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given Route Table.
F
IELD
00 Route Choice Table
01 Route Definition 1
02 Route Definition 2
03 Route Definition 3
04 Route Definition 4
05 Route Definition 5
06 Route Definition 6
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.
Possible values:1~128(default = no data)
Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
Possible values:1~128, 0 = Delete (default = no data)
Notes For Field 01 Route Definition 1 enter the First Choice Route.
For Field 02 Route Definition 2 enter the Second Choice Route.
For Field 03 Route Definition 3 enter the Third Choice Route.
For Field 04 Route Definition 4 enter the Fourth Choice Route.
For Field 05 Route Definition 5 enter the Fifth Choice Route.
For Field 06 Route Definition 6 enter the Sixth Choice Route.
Services
Route Define
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-19
Services
Route Define
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition consists of an OLG and a Digit
Modification index.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Route Definition
Select the Route Definition number.
Possible values:1~128 (default = no data)
01 OLG Number
Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition. “0” means no data.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no data)
02 Digit Modification
Index
Select the Digit Modification Index associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no data) “0” means no data.
526 Modified Digits Table Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-17
This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from, and adding digits to, the dialed numbers.
F
IELD
00 Digit Modification
Index
01 Delete Digits
02 Add Leading Digits
03 Add Trailing Digits
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice table to determine the digit modification treatment to be applied. Leading digits of a dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing digits may be added to the dialed number.
Possible values:1~128 (default = no value)
Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed number.
Possible values:0~20 (default = 0)
Enter the digit string (up to 23 characters) to be inserted at the beginning of the number. This can include pauses, and links to a maximum of 8 authorization codes.
Possible values:Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Enter the digit string (up to 23 characters) to be inserted at the end of the number. This can include pauses, and links to a maximum of 8 authorization codes.
Possible values:Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
9-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Route Schedule
Route Schedule
Program Number(s): 523 and 528
1. Select LCR/DR > Route Schedule.
2. Enter Program 523 data.
3. Enter Program 528 data.
4. Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each table is a 3-dimensional array of 144 values (3 Types of Day x 3 Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).
F
IELD
00 Route Plan
01 Type of Day
02 LCR Time of Day
03 Station LCR Group
04 Route Choice Table
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Route Plan Number for which to build a schedule indexed by Time of Day, Type of Day and LCR Group. Enter the LCR route plan number that should be used. Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and
CIX670 basic or expanded is 64. Total Route Plans available for CIX1200
Basic or expanded is 128. Entering “0” deletes the Exception Digits from the table. (default = no value)
Select the Type of Day.
Possible values:Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
Select the Time Zone.
Possible values:Time Zone 1, Time Zone 2 or Time Zone 3 (default = no value)
Select the Station LCR Group.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this combination of time, type and LCR group.
Possible values:1~128, delete (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-21
Services
Route Schedule
528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend days or holidays for LCR.
F
IELD
01 Monday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Possible values:Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
07 Sunday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
9-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
Program Number(s): 527 and 529
1. Select LCR/DR > LCR/Holiday Time.
2. Enter Program 527 data.
3. Enter Program 529 data.
4. Click Submit.
527 LCR Holiday Table
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These assignments are related to the day assignments established in Program 523.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Holiday
01 Add/Delete
Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.
Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no value)
Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired dates remain in the table unless deleted.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
Defines the time zones used by each route plan for each day type.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Route Plan
01 LCR Day Type
02 LCR Time Zone
03 Start Time
Select the LCR route plan number to assign to this time zone.
Possible values:Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or expanded is 64.Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128. Entering
“0” deletes the Exception Digits from the table.(default = no value)
Select a day type for which to define a time zone.
Possible values:Weekday, Weekend or Holiday (default = no value)
Select a time zone.
Possible values:Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3 (default = no value)
Enter the start time for the selected time zone (hhmm).
Note
Enter your day type and time zone selections before entering data into this field.
Possible values:hh = hour (0-23) and mm = minutes (0-59)
(default = 0000)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-23
Services
LCR/DR Screening
LCR/DR Screening
Program Number(s): 530 and 531
These programs enable and set up screening for DR and LCR.
1. Select LCR/DR > LCR/Holiday Time.
2. Enter Program 530 and 531 data or click one of the following buttons:
List – view a summary list of programmed Screened Dial Strings or Behind Centrex Access Codes.
-
Copy – Enter a Screened Dial String or Behind Centrex Access Code in the field with the corresponding name. Click Copy to make a new assignment.
Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier Identification Codes or Behind
Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only in LCR calls.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Screening Dial String
01 Add String to Table
02 Destination Restriction
Action
03 Least Cost Routing
Action
Enter the string of external digits to be screened.
Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Add the screening dial string to the DR LCR screening table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)
Select DR Action.
Possible values:Bypass (default) or Skip and Apply
•
Bypass – Do not apply DR.
•
Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits specified in skip length.
Select LCR Action.
Possible values:
•
Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
•
Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits specified in skip length.
04 Digit Modification Action
Select Digit Modification application.
Possible values:
•
Apply – (default) Apply digit modification from the first digit.
•
Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply digit modification starting from the next digit specified by skip length.
•
Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply digit modification starting from the next digit specified by skip length.
05 Skip Length
Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string to be ignored before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Possible values:0~5, 0 = delete (default = 0)
9-24
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
LCR/DR Screening
531 DR Screening Table for OLG
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DR Screening Table for an Outgoing Line Group (OLG). Up to four codes may be assigned per line group. Used for outgoing calls other than LCR.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Outgoing Line Group
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
01 Behind Centrex
Access Code
Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex, PBX or Tie line.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Add or Delete Code
03 DR Action for
Centrex
Add or Delete the code entered above. Leaving the field empty removes an existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group number and 01
Behind Centrex Access Code above.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)
Apply DR to the dialed digits.
Possible values:
•
Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.
•
Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits specified in Skip Length.
04 Skip Length
05 Pause Length
Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)
Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
Possible values:0~10 (default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-25
Services
Destination Restriction
Destination Restriction
Program Number(s): 532, 533, 534 and 111
Assign Destination Restriction (DR) features for the Strata CIX.
1. Select LCR/DR > Destination Restriction.
2. Enter 00 DR Level (DRL).
3. Enter Program 532 data.
4. Enter Program 533 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Dial Strings.
5. Enter Program 534 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Dial Strings.
6. Enter Program 111 data.
7. Click Submit.
532 DRL Table Allow/Deny Definition
Prerequisite Program: 533 below.
Specify the Destination Restriction (DR) Table Type using this command.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Destination
Restriction Level
(DRL)
01 Type of Table
Select the DRL Number.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
Specify whether this DR Table is an allow table or deny table.
Possible values:Allow or Deny (default)
533 DRL Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in
above.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Destination
Restriction Level
(DRL)
01 Dial String
Choose the DRL.
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
02 Add/Delete
Enter the string of dialed digits to be allowed or denied. Wild cards (X and
N) can only be assigned through Network eManager, not the programming phones.
Possible values:1~7 digits (default = no value)
Add or delete the string entered in 01 Dial String above to the DR Table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)
9-26
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Destination Restriction
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 533 above
Note In CTX software R1 ~ R1.2 this table only allows 11 digits. Starting with R1.3 and up 13 digits are allowed.
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL table. If the DRL table is an allow table, its
Exception Table must be a deny table and vice versa.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Destination
Restriction Level
(DRL)
Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an exception table.
Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)
01 Exception Dial String
Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
Possible values: 1~ 7 digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X =
0~9 and N = 2~9.(default = no value)
02 Add/Delete
Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR exception table above to the DR exception table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)
111 DR Level (DRL)
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables credit card calling for a DRL.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Destination
Restriction Level
(DRL)
01 Credit Card Calling
Enter the DRL number.
Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)
Enable Credit Card Calling for this DRL.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
DRL Table View
The DRL table view enables you to view all programmed DRLs. This table is a read only table. To access the DRL table view, select > LCR/DR > DRL Table View.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Centrex/PBX Screening Table View
The Centrex/PBX Screening Table View enables you to the Centrex/PBX Screening table.
To access the Centrex/PBX Screening Table View, select LCR/DR > OLG Screening Table View.
See
Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-27
Services
Account Codes
Account Codes
Program Number(s): 570, 506 and 571
Assign Account Code data to Strata CIX.
Account Codes can be verified or unverified. Verified Account Codes simultaneously function as
Authorization Codes. This is achieved by restricting a telephone’s calling privileges so that it cannot complete a call without entering a code. The Strata CIX compares that code to entries in the table created below and raises the telephone’s restrictions to permit the call. If the dialed code cannot be found in the table, the call will be rejected. The requirement to enter an account code is established in the telephone’s
Class of Service.
Unverified account codes do not affect restriction levels and simply report the account code dialed in the
SMDR record for further processing by call accounting equipment.
All account codes in a CIX (verified or not) must have the same number of digits (Registered Digit Length, parameter 02, in Program 570 below).
The system can be programmed to verify only a portion of an account code (Verified Program Length, parameter 01, in Program 570 below). For example, a company may choose to identify its customers with four digit numbers but have an overall account code length of eight digits. Registered Digit Length would be eight and Verified Program Length would be four. Upon entry of the first four verifiable digits and then four random digits to fill out the required length, the call would be processed.
1. Complete the data sheet.
2. Select > LCR/DR > Account Codes.
3. Enter Program 570 data.
4. Enter Program 506 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Account Codes.
5. Enter Program 571 data.
6. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit.
9-28
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Account Codes
570 Account Code Digit Length
Prerequisite Program: None.
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering a number. This allows dialing within Strata CIX to proceed automatically once the correct account code is dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less than the total code entered, thus the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the user.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Verified Digit Length
The Verified Digit Length sets the number of leading digits within an account code to be verified against the table built in 506 Verified Account
Codes. The Verified Digit Length may be shorter than, or as long as, the
Registered Digit Length.
Note
This field is not changed, when
“506 Verified Account Codes” on page 9-30 are registered.
Possible values:4~15 (default = 4)
02 Registered Digit
Length
03 Call Forward External
Override FAC
The Registered Digit Length sets the number of digits in all account codes whether voluntary, forced and/or verified.
Note
The Registered Digit Length (field 02) must be greater than or equal to the Verified Digit Length (field 01).
Possible values:4~15 (default = 6)
Override Forced Account Code to allow Call Forwarding to an external destination. This applies to R2.22 MH233 and later software.
Possible values:Enable - Allows calls to a Forced Account Code station to forward without entering an Account Code.
Disable - Requires the caller to enter an Account Code before the call will forward. If a valid Account Code is not entered the call will disconnect.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-29
Services
Account Codes
506 Verified Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 570 page 9-29
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in
.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Verified Account Code
01 Verified Flag
02 DRL
03 FRL
04 Network COS
Enter the code to be used as a valid accounting code that the user is expected to dial. The Registered Digit Length (field 02) must be greater than or equal to the Verified Digit Length (field 01).
Number of Verified Account Codes per system:
135 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40)
300 (CIX/CTX670 & CIX200 Basic)
1000 (CIX/CTX670 Exp)
300 (CIX200 Basic HCTU only)
4000 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU)
Possible values:4~15 digits (default = 6)
The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is used as a verified account code or not. Some applications may allow users to dial an account code which changes the restriction level for the call allowing it to be placed.
Possible values:Set or No Set (default)
Note
To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set
.
This DRL is applied to a call when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:0~16 (default = 0)
This FRLis applied when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:0~16 (default = 0)
This Network COS is applied when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 506 page 9-30
Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to the forced and /or verified account code entries (including 911). These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification process and proceed unhindered.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Exception Number 1
02 Exception Number 2
03 Exception Number 3
04 Exception Number 4
Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits.
Exception 1 default = 911
Exception 2~4 default = no value
Note
One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911.
Exception numbers for forced account code fields cannot be duplicated.
9-30
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Account Codes
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 105 System Data
This command assigns the service class components that are used by Destination Restriction Override By
Speed Dial. DR Override must first be enabled in Program 105, System Data.
1. Select > LCR/DR > DR Override by System Speed Dial.
2. Select the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL override values.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Override COS
02 Override DRL
03 Override FRL
04 Override QPL
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the override COS value.
Possible values:1~32 (default =1)
Select the override DRL value.
Possible values:1~16 (default =1)
Select the override FRL value.
Possible values:1~16 (default =1)
Select the override QPL value.
Possible values:1~16 (default =1)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-31
Services
Account Codes
510 COS Override Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 105 System Data
Assigns the COS, FRL, DRL and QPL to be used by COS Override. If a COS parameter has been assigned in either the original or the override COS, it will be applied.
1. Select > LCR/DR > COS Override.
2. Enter Program 510 data or select a COS Override Index and click Copy to copy settings from the selected COS Override Index.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 COS Override Index
01 COS Override Code
02 Set COS
03 Set DRL
04 Set FRL
05 Set QPL
06 Set Network COS
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the COS Override index.
Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)
Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is entered in this field any previously entered data is erased.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Select COS number for this override code.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
Select DRL number for this override code.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select FRL number for this override code.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select QPL number for this override code.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
Select Network COS index for this override code.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
9-32
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Account Codes
656 Node ID Assignment
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 102 page 4-3
This program assigns up to four network node IDs to process incoming network calls. Each node ID has an overlap code. Strata CIX will substitute the overlap code for the node ID before processing the call further.
A network directory number consists of a node ID and the desired node.
1. Select > Strata Net > Node ID.
2. Enter Program 656 data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
01 Primary Node ID
Primary Overlap Code
02 Local Node ID 2
Overlap Code 2
03 Local Node ID 3
Overlap Code 3
04 Local Node ID 4
Overlap Code 4
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the primary node ID for this node. This node ID identifies the node used for administering Strata Net.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter the overlap code associated with the primary node ID. An overlap code is the string of digits that replaces the node ID to continue call processing.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
Enter node ID 2 for this node.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter overlap code for node ID 2.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
Enter node ID 3 for this node.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter overlap code for node ID 3.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
Enter node ID 4 for this node.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter overlap code for node ID 4.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
Note The node ID can be one to six digits in length. The system uses most significant digit matching. The node ID leading digits must not conflict. For example if node ID 15 is assigned node ID 150 to 159 cannot be used. If node ID 135 is assigned node IDs 13 or 13xx cannot be used. See examples below:
Node ID 27xxx - IDs 27000 to 27999 - 1000 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27xx - IDs 2700 to 2799 - 100 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27x - IDs 270 to 279 - 10 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27 - ID 27 - 1 ID Starting with the digits 27 is possible.
Note Node ID digits + DN digits must be seven digits or less.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-33
Services
Account Codes
670 Remote Node Data Assignment
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This command assigns the Remote node data (requires R1.3 and higher).
1. Select > Strata Net > Remote Node Data.
2. Enter Program 670 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Remote Node ID
01 Remote Node IP
Address
02 Remote Node Port
Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Remote Node ID for this node.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter the remote node IP address.
Possible values:Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
Enter the Remote Node port number for this node.
Possible values:0~65535 (default = no value)
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 656 page 9-33
and 306
Assigns the Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking.
1. Select > Strata Net > Route Plan Analysis.
2. Enter the node ID number (six digit numeral) to add to the Private Routing Plan Analysis Table.
Click List to see a summary list of programmed Node IDs or click Copy to copy data from an existing node ID. Get Default sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the Private Route Choice Table in which to add the node ID entered in
values are 1~64, 0 = Delete and default = 0.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Node ID
01 Pvt Ntwk Route
Choice Table
Numbers
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the node ID to be associated with a private route choice table number.
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)
Enter the private route choice table number to be associated with this node
ID. Entering 0 deletes the node ID.
Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)
9-34
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Private Route Choice Definition
Private Route Choice Definition
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 653, 654 and 655
Use these command to define Private Network Routing parameters.
1. Select > Strata Net > Route Choice.
2. Enter Program 653, 654 and 655 data.
3. Select the Private Network.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Choice Table. A Private Route Choice Table contains up to six
Route Definitions. The system will step through these route definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find a route to the desired private networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Pvt Ntwk Route
Choice Table Number
01~06 Route Definition
Tables
Select the private network route choice table number.
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)
Select route definition tables 1~6 to be used for this private network route choice.
Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Definition. A Private Route Definition consists of an OLG and a pointer to the private digit modification table that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or inserted before being communicated to the distant node.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Private Network
Route Definition
Select the number of the Private Route Definition to be defined or deleted.
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)
01 Outgoing Line Group
Select the OLG to be used by this route definition.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200
Exp B)
(default = 0)
02 Digit Modification
Table
Select the Digit Modification Table to be used by this route definition.
Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-35
Services
Private Route Choice Definition
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Digit Modification Tables for Private Networking.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Private Network Digit
Modification Table
01 Deleted Digits
Select the private network digit modification table to be defined.
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)
Select the number of leading digits to be deleted.
Possible values:1~10, 0 = delete (default)
02 Insert Leading Digits
Select the leading digits to be inserted.
Possible values:Up to 23 digits (default = no value)
9-36
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Mapping
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 657, 658, 659 and 660
The following programs map network and primary COS, DRL, FRL and QPL settings to each other.
1. Select > Strata Net > Mapping.
2. Enter Program 657 data.
3. Enter Program 658 data.
4. Enter Program 659 data.
5. Enter Program 660 data.
6. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit.
Services
Mapping
657 Network COS Mapping Table
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
This table maps a network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service for access to local services. There is no translation of outgoing network COS.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Ntwk COS
Local COS
02 Off-hook Call
Announce
03 System Speed Dial
04 COS Override
05 TGAC Override
Enter the network COS to be mapped.
Possible values:1~32 (default = no value)
Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received network COS.
Possible values:1~32 (default = no value)
Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can activate OCA.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can use a system speed dial number to make an outgoing call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can use Class of
Service Override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can override local trunk group access control. Typically an attendant function.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-37
Services
Mapping
658 / 659 / 660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
These commands are used to establish two mapping tables to equate local DRLs, FRLs and QPLs with network DRLs, FRLs and QPLs for both outbound and inbound network calls.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Type
Network DRL/FRL/QPL
Local DRL/FRL/QPL
Select the network DRL/FRL/QPL type.
Possible values:Outbound or Inbound (default = no value)
•
Outbound – maps a local DRL/FRL/QPL to a network DRL/FRL/QPL.
•
Inbound – maps a Network DRL/FRL/QPL to a local DRL/FRL/QPL.
Enter the network DRL/FRL/QPL (for outbound) you want to map to a local
DRL/FRL/QPL.
Possible values:DRL/FRL/QPL1~DRL/FRL/QPL16 (1~16 (default = 1))
Enter the Local DRL/FRL/QPL (for inbound) you want to map to the network DRL/FRL/QPL selected in the network DRL/FRL/QPL field above.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
661 Network DN Table Assignment
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs to a CIX node ID. This includes all DNs in all CIX nodes on the CIX network except the DNs in the node you are currently programming.
This enables someone in one node to call an extension in another node without having to dial the node ID number. The caller dials the extension and the system appends the node ID. This function is transparent to the caller and the dialed party. (See example following.)
Capacity: CITX100, CIX200, CIX670 - 3000; CIX1200 - 6000
1. Select Strata Net > Network DN Setup > Network DN Assignment (Prog. 661), and enter a network DN followed by its node ID. Repeat this process for each DN.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Network DN
01 Node ID
Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CIX node
ID. This include all DNs in all CIX nodes on the CIX network except the
DNs in the node you are currently programming.
6000 (CIX1200), 3000 (CIX200 and CIX670), 1000 (CIX100) Five digits max. (Default = No Data)
Enter the CIX node ID that should be assigned to the DN.
Possible values:Six digits max. (Default = No Data)
9-38
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Mapping
Example
Refer to the illustration below and this example: When programming the DNs for telephones in node 10, enter the DNs and their node ID numbers for DNs in nodes 11 and 12 into the network DN table,
Program 661.
Notes
•
If the same DN exists in more than one node (i.e., DN 400), it should not be placed in the node ID tables of any node. The user must dial the node ID where the DN is located plus the DN to call the DN.
• When using network DN tables for CIX networking assign the primary node ID in Program 656, but do not assign overlap codes.
The networking tables show the DN numbers and node ID that have been assigned.
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID entered in this screen.
Important!
Do not use this program unless requested by Toshiba Technical Support.
1. Select > Strata Net > Delete DSS Node ID.
2. Enter the node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-39
Services
Strata Net Over IP
Strata Net Over IP
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
To use programs 671 and 672, refer to “Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines” on page A-21 .
671 IP Address Convert Table
1. Select > Strata Net > Network Over IP. Go to the IP Route tab.
2. Enter Program 671 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Remote Node ID
01 IP Address Route 1
02 IP Address Route 2
03 IP Address Route 3
04IP Address Route 4
05 IP Address Route 5
06 IP Address Route 6
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the node ID of the remote CIX that the primary CIX should route to in the IP private network.
Possible values:Up to six digits (default = no data)
Enter the IP address of the remote xIPU that should be routed to first.
Possible values:Valid IP address
Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all channels in the first xIUP route is busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address
Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all channels in xIUP Route 1 and 2 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address
Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all channels in xIUP Route 1, 2 and 3 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address
Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all channels in xIUP Route 1, 2, 3 and 4 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address
Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all channels in xIUP Route 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address
9-40
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Strata Net Over IP
672, 673 Node ID Detail Information
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This command assigns the parameters to be used by MIPU, GIPU, LIPU or BIPU-Q1As at the remote nodes connecting to the MIPU, GIPU, LIPU or BIPU-Q1A in the local node over IP Private Networking.
•
•
•
Important!
These parameters must match all nodes on the IP network.
When setting node ID assignments on an Strata Net IP network, the node ID assignment settings for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
Whenever node ID assignment changes are made for IP telephones or Strata Net IP Node IDs, Toshiba recommends pressing the RESET button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.
1. Select > Strata Net > Network Over IP - Detail Info tab.
2. Enter Program 672 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Remote Node ID
01 IP Protocol Type
D
ESCRIPTION
Node ID of remote CIX connected to this CIX with xIUP, IP networking. Refer to Program 152.
Possible values:Up to six digits (default = no data)
Select the desired IP protocol to be used by the xIUP at the remote node. This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP network.
Possible values:Strata Net IP (default), H.323 (do not use; H.323 is not available)
02 Voice Packet Table
Select the desired voice packet configuration table number (programmed in this CIX) to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote node. Voice Packet tables are configured in Program 152.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX100, CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic) 1~256
(CIX670/CIX1200 Exp.) (default = 1)
03 TCP Connection
Release
Select whether to release TCP connection when the call was released. TCP release should be enabled for normal IP calling operation.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:Enable (default) or disable
Notes
•
If disabled, the TCP connection is connected continually.
•
This parameter is normally used with its default, which means TCP connection is established and released for each call. If there are only two nodes on Strata Net over IP network, this parameter should be set to
Disable which means TCP connection is always established.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-41
Services
Strata Net Over IP
F
IELD
04 H.323 Fast
Connection
D
ESCRIPTION
Fast connection should be enabled for H.323 protocol only when the remote end has this option enabled. This should be disabled for Strata Net IP
Protocol.
Possible values:Enable (default) or disable
05 Channel Negotiation Select whether channel negotiation for Call Control is applied or not. This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP network. This programming is applied only to H.323 protocol.
Possible values:Enable or disable (default)
06 Audio Codec
Select the desired audio codec type.
Important!
G.711 must be used for transmission of end-to-end
DTMF signaling. G.711 provides the highest voice quality but requires the most bandwidth.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:G711(default), G.711MU, G.711A, or G729A
07 DTMF Translation
08 E911 Priority
Select of whether DTMF translation by the control channel is enabled or not.
This parameter should be enabled when using G.729A codecs and disabled if using G.711 codecs for end-to-end DTMF signaling.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:Enable or disable (default)
If E911 calls originated from this CIX should be sent over the IP network to the selected remote node, enter the E911 priority assignment that should be used for the selected remote node. Assign 0 or 1~5.
Assign 1, the highest priority, to the remote node that has the main CAMA or
ISDN E911 connection; 2~5 reduces the E911 priority with 5 providing the lowest priority - these priorities should be used for alternate network routing of
E911 calls.
If E911calls should not be sent over the IP network to the selected node, assign 0 as the E911 priority.
Note If two or more remote nodes have the same priority, E911calls will route to the CIX with the lowest node number.
Possible values:0 (default) ~5
9-42
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
The Strata CIX system can monitor SMDR, Call History and Behind Centrex. Use the following programs to set up these services.
SMDR
The following enables programming for SMDR, Call History and Behind Connection settings.
Program Number(s): 512, 513 and 514
The following programs assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
1. Select System > SMDR.
2. Enter Program 512 data.
3. Enter Program 513 data.
4. Enter Program 514 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
512 SMDR for System Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
F
IELD
01 Caller ID Field
02 Record for
Abandoned Call
D
ESCRIPTION
Include Caller ID records in SMDR.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Generate B Record for an abandoned call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
03 Record ANI
04 Record Authorization
Code
Include authorization codes in SMDR records.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
05 End-of-Record CR
Include ANI in SMDR record.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
06 Abandoned Call Ring
Time
Enable - to output an SMDR call record of the ringing time of abandoned calls.
Disable - to not output an SMDR call record of the ringing time of abandoned calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-43
Services
SMDR
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
07 Global Call ID Number Enable - allow the Global Call ID Number to be generated in the SMDR data.
Disable - the Global Call ID Number will not be generated in the SMDR data.
Note
The Global Call ID data (15-digit hex characters) is located in columns 70-84 of the SMDR data stream in the following format:
ZXXXXXXYYYYYYYY
Z represents the direction of the call (S=originate or source node in network call, D=destination node in network call, L=single node or non-Network call.)
X represents the CIX node ID (6-digit hex characters)
Y represents the call number (8-digit hex characters)
513 SMDR for ILG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.
F
IELD
01 Generate SMDR
Records
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Incoming Line Group
(ILG)
Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU (default = 0)
Enable to generate records for this ILG.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
02 DNIS Field Indication Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
03 Record Incoming
Call
Enable record generation for incoming calls with or without incoming SMDR being enabled.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
04 Record Abandoned
Calls
05 Display Transferred
Call Records
Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must be turned on. Abandoned call records are generated whether or not incoming
SMDR has been set.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or destination party.
Possible values:Source (default) or Destination
06 Record QoS
Information
Enabling this options allows QoS information including delay, jitter and packet loss output to SMDR for incoming VoIP calls. Incoming SMDR must be turned on.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
9-44
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
SMDR
514 SMDR for OLG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Outgoing Line Group
(OLG)
02 Outgoing Records
03 Charged Station
04 Abandoned
Outbound Call
05 Record QoS
Information
Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100,1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)
Generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display must be enabled.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
Apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or its destination.
Possible values:Source (default) or Destination
Record abandoned outbound calls
Enable or Disable (default)
Enable this option to allows QoS information including delay, jitter and packet loss output to the SMDR for outgoing VoIP calls. Outgoing SMDR must be turned on.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-45
Services
SMDR
577 Caller History
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns which station stores Caller ID information for PDN,CO,GCO and POOL line buttons.
1. Select Station > Call History Store Terminal.
2. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
Ckt Type/Number
01 Primary DN
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 9-2 below.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
Enter Station DN for which to store call history data.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Table 9-2 Circuit Type Code Definitions
Circuit Name Circuit Type
DN 1
CO
GCO
POOL
2
3
4
Circuit Number
0~99999 (DN)
1~264 (Trunk Number)
1~128 (GCO Key Group Number)
1~128 (POOL Key Group Number)
Example
if DN is 200, value is 1200 if CO is 30, value is 230 if GCO is 50, value is 350 if POOL is 80, value data is 480
650 Behind Centrex Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This feature allows Strata CIX to connect to the station side of a PBX or Centrex using a physical loop trunk interface. DR and Least Cost Routing may need to account for access codes required by the PBX or
Centrex before connecting to the public network.
1. Click Advanced Configuration > Miscellaneous > Behind Centrex Assignment.
2. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 OLG Number
01 Behind Centrex
Select OLG that is attached to a Centrex (or other PBX).
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp/CIX1200 ExpA), 0~220 (CIX1200
ExpB) (default = 0)
Enable Behind Centrex Operation for this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
02 Assume 9
03 Pause Timer
Enable the Assume 9 feature.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
Enter the number of seconds (0~5) the CIX will wait for second dial tone from Centrex/PBX. Possible Value: 0~5 (default = 0
9-46
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
External Devices
External Devices
Door Phones
Program Number(s): 507, 576, 573 and 508
This command assigns Door Phone parameters.
1. Select Station > Door Phones.
2. Enter Door Phone Number or click one of the following buttons:
-
List – View a summary list of programmed Door Phones.
Create – Assigns a new Door Phone with default settings.
-
Copy – Copies settings from an existing Door Phone.
Delete – Deletes a Door Phone.
-
Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter remaining Program 507 data.
4. Enter Program 576 data.
5. Enter Program 508 data.
6. Click Submit.
507, 573 Door Phone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can be connected to ADKU, PDKU and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected to one
DDCB. A door lock control relay may be assigned to the B output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB door
phone (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-50 ).
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Door Phone Number
Enter the door phone number.
Possible values:1~6 (CIX40, CIX100), 1~9 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200
Basic),
1~24 (CIX670/CIX1200 Exp.), (default = no value)
Door phone numbering for the CIX40, CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200is as follows:
•
DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door phone or door lock.
•
DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door phone or door lock.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-47
Services
External Devices
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Door phone numbering for CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic is as follows:
•
DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door phone or door lock.
Door phone numbering for CIX670/CIX1200 Exp. only is as follows:
•
DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or door lock.
•
DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or door lock.
•
DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or door lock.
•
DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or door lock.
•
DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or door lock.
DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB Equipment
(Shelf/Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to door lock, a door phone cannot be set.
01 DDCB Equipment No.
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the door phone should be assigned.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = analog trunk circuit 01~08, or ZZ = T1 channel 01~24.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Exp cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Exp cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for each Exp cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for each Exp cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.
9-48
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
External Devices
F
IELD
02 Tenant Number
04 Ring Duration
05 LCD Name Display
06 Day1 Destination/
Destination Number
07 Day2 Destination/
Destination Number
08 Night Destination/
Destination Number
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the Tenant Number (1~8) for which the door phone should ring over external page in the system Night mode. All CIX systems provide up to 8 tenants. CTX Release 1.0 only supports Tenant 1).
(default = 1)
Enter the time in seconds that the door phone should ring destination devices when the door phone button is pressed.
The ring time can be 3 to 30 seconds set in 3 second intervals - each 3 second interval provides one ring to the destination. Destination devices include selected DNs and page groups.
Possible values: 3~30 (default = 9)
Enter the door phone name that should display on LCD telephones when the door phone rings the telephones, or when the telephone calls the door phone.
Possible values:Up to 16 characters (default = no value)
Select the type of destination that should ring when the door phone button is pressed during the system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
Possible values:None (default), DN or Paging Group 1~4 (CIX100);
1~8 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic); 1~16 (CIX670 Exp),
1~24 (CIX1200 Exp)
Enter the destination number. If the ring destination type is a PDN or
PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination type is page, enter the page group number.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page
This assignment sets the Page Group that should ring during the system Night Mode when a door phone button is pressed. The assignment can be made for Tenant 1 only.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number
Select the system tenant number to be assigned door phone to page group/night ringing.
Possible values:1(default)~8
01 Page Group Number
Select the system page group number that should ring for the selected tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the system night mode.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~8 (CIX200, CIX670, C1200 Basic),
0~16 (CIX670 Exp), 0~24 (CIX1200 Exp) (default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-49
Services
External Devices
508 Door Lock Control Assignment
This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays. The contacts of these relays are used to control electrical door locks. One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight door phone control boxs (DDCB, Port -B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU PCBs (any one of the four control relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B) will provide the door lock relay contacts. This jack can not be used to connect an MDFB door phone.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Door Lock Number
01 Interface Type
02 BIOU Relay Number
Enter the door lock control number to configure.
Possible values:1~3 CTX28, CIX40, 1~4 CIX100, 1~5 CIX670 Basic, 1~10 CIX670 and CIX1200 Expanded (default = no value)
Door lock control relay contacts are provided by the DDCB (Port - B) and BIOU interface control relays.
Possible values:None (default), BIOU or DDCB
Assign BIOU control relay as a door lock relay. This relay activates when the door lock button is pressed or a door lock access code is dialed.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0) BIOU1 provides control relays 1~4; BIOU2 provides control relays 5~8.
Note
Assign BIOU control relay (1~8) as a door lock relay - this relay activates when a door lock button is pressed or a door lock access code is dialed.
BIUO1 provides control relays 1 to 4. BIUO2 provides control relays 5 to 8.
The CIX100 ACTU and CIX200 built-in relays are programmed as relay 5.
9-50
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
External Devices
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
03 DDCB Equipment No.
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the door lock should be assigned.
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU interface
PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=circuit 01~16
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a ADKU, PDKU, BEDKU, or BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Note Note: If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.
Cabinet numbers:
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
•
•
CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
•
•
•
•
CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
•
•
CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded cannot be changed.
•
Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-51
Services
External Devices
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
, and 105
This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on each BIOU set in Program 105 12
Night Relay and 18 Night Bell Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program 503 19
BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOUs to provide a total of eight control relays. The control relays can be configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night Mode Control, and
Door Lock Control.
Notes
•
BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
•
BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.
1. Select System > BIOU Relay Type.
2. Enter Program 515 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 BIOU (1 or 2)
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the BOIU number.
Possible values:1 or 2 (default = no value)
Note
BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card Assignment.
01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5; or CIX100
02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
Possible values:Not Use, Ext Paging, Night Bell, Night Relay or Door Lock
(default = no value)
•
NOT USE – if the relay is not used.
•
PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an external page (see
“503 Paging Devices Group Assignments” on page 9-53 ).
•
NIGHT BELL – Night bell control activates during the system night mode
only when incoming CO lines ring (see “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3
).
•
NIGHT RELAY – Night mode control activates continuously during the
system night mode (see “105 System Data” on page 4-15
).
•
DOOR LOCK – Door lock control activates when a telephone's door unlock button is pressed (see
“508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-50
).
9-52
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Services
External Devices
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 502 page 5-33
Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.
1. Select Station > Paging Devices.
2. Enter 00 Page Zone Relay Number.
3. Check the Paging Groups that you wish to activate.
4. Select the external generic relay number.
5. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Zone Relay Number
01-16 Page Groups
17 All Page Group
18 All Call
Emergency Page
Group
19 BGM Mute Relay
20-27 PG17~24 (CIX1200
Exp)
D
ESCRIPTION
Select the BIOU page zone relay that should be assigned to the page groups below. This relay activates whenever the selected page group is paged.
•
BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
•
BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.
Possible values:1~8 (default = no value)
Check the box if the selected BIOU page zone relay should activate with this page group.
Possible values:On or Off (default)
Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay activates whenever the external page is in use
•
BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
•
BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 0)
Note
The CIX100 ACTU or CIX built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation, BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program
100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
9-53
Services
External Devices
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Prerequisite Program: Program 105
This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group.
1. Select Trunk > Enhanced 911.
2. Select Program 550 data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
00 Emergency Call
Group Number
01-08 OLG1~8
D
ESCRIPTION
Specify the Emergency Call Group.
Possible values:1~8 (default = no value)
Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200
Exp B)
(default = 0)
9-54
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
10
This chapter discusses Strata eManager operational programming functions.
System Setup
Program Number(s): 900, 901 and 915
These programs enable programmers to initialize Strata CIX, check software versions and set the region
(for built-in parameters not changeable by jumper or switch - unique for each region and affect system operation).
1. Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
2. Click Restart to reset Strata CIX or click Initialize CIX to delete programmed data and revert to default settings.
3. 901 CIX Version data is for viewing only.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-1
Operation
System Setup
900 CTX/CIX Restart
Prerequisite Program: None
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes or restores programmed data.
CAUTION! Both commands will drop all existing calls.
F
IELD
Restart CIX/CTX
Initialize CIX/CTX
Important!
D
ESCRIPTION
Clicking on this button initializes a System Power Off/Power On sequence to reset hardware. All calls in progress are dropped. This is also known as an
Initialize Level 2.
Clicking on this button invokes an Initialize Level 1 sequence which drops all calls in progress, erases programmed data and enters default data into the
Strata CIX System.
If a Toshiba SM/SD is installed in the available slot, using this option restores
data from backed up from the SM/SD (see Restoring Data from SM/SD below).
Choosing Initialize CIX without installing an SM/SD Card deletes all programmed data and returns your Strata CIX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data is lost.
Restoring Data from SM/SD
When initializing with Initialize CIX, you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and stored on an SM/SD card. To do so, follow the steps below:
1. Insert an SM/SD card that contains the Progdata folder with the default.dat file. The default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See
“910 Data Backup” on page 10-9 .
2. Run System Initialization by clicking Initialize CIX/CTX.
Notes
•
Restoring data from the SM/SD card may take an hour or more.
•
During the restore process the telephone LCD may display date and time. This does not necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
•
To verify completion of the restore process, access the programming mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
3. Remove the SM/SD card and restart the CIX again after restoring system data. This is necessary to reset xIPUs, Strata Net, ISDN and other advanced features.
10-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
System Setup
901 CTX/CIX Version And Processor Hardware
Prerequisite Program: None
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to view the Active and Standby software versions installed on the Strata CIX system processor.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
System Type
Active Software
Standby Software
DTMF, BBMS, BEXS,
BSIS, Ethernet,
Modem, DREC
Version, IPL Version
Displays the system type that is connected.
Possible values:CIX1200, CIX670, CIX200, CIX100 (Active only).
Displays the software versions.
These fields indicate the following:
A = Indicates software for USA, Canada or Mexico.
Rx.xx = Indicates the CIX release level.
M0011.00 = The software version number.
Note
The Active software does not always have to be the same as the
Standby software, although the Active and Standby software versions may be the same when you receive it from Toshiba.
The check marks in these boxes indicate the hardware that is installed on the
Strata CIX processor.
On the CIX100:
•
Ethernet means AETS is installed on ACTU.
•
Modem means AMDS is installed on ACTU.
•
DTMF means ARCS is installed on ACTU.
•
Indicates the DTMF/ABR software.
•
Indicates basic boot-up software version.
915 Regional Selection
Prerequisite Program: None - Perform this program before doing any database programming.
1. Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to select the region for specific parameter operation.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Region
Important!
Select Region.
Possible values:
USA
Canada
Mexico
Taiwan
Hong Kong
China
UK
Singapore
Malaysia
Indonesia
Sri Lanka
Thailand
Japan
Australia
The region change does not take affect until the system has been initialized. This Level-
1initialize (Prog 900) will disable any database programming already in place.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-3
Operation
System Setup
Set Time and Date
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CIX.
Select System > Date and Time
F
IELD
Date
Time
D
ESCRIPTION
Set Strata CIX current date or select it from the date picker at right.
•
Select current date (YYYYMMDD).
Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day
•
Current day of week will display once the year, month and day parameters have been entered.
Possible values:Sunday ~ Saturday (Read only) (default = no value).
•
Leap year will display based on the year entered.
Possible values:Leap, Leap Next x, where x = 1, 2 or 3. X. is the number of years since the previous leap year (read only) (default = no value).
Set Strata CIXs current time (hhmmss).
Possible values:hh = hour, mm = minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value).
121 Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables the CIX to automatically change the system clock according to local day light savings time (DST) changes.
Select System > Daylight Saving
F
IELD
Enable Automatic
Day Light Savings
Time Change
Change Based On
Month, Week and Day of the Week
D
ESCRIPTION
This field is not set by default. This field must be set to allow automatic DST change.
The method used to set the day and time of day the DST change occurs.
Possible values:Day of week (recommended) set the day, the week and the time for the change. For example: Sunday, The first week of
April at 2AM
Date (not recommended in the USA) The the date and time for the change. Example Oct. 31, 2:00 AM
Default is Sunday, first week of April, 2:00 am
Begin Daylight
Saving Time
End Daylight Saving
Time
Default is Sunday, last week of October, 2:00 am
10-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
F
IELD
Time Adjustment
Change based on
Date and Time
Operation
System Setup
D
ESCRIPTION
Defines the exact amount of time change. Default is one hour. The time adjustment should not be long enough to cause a date change.
DST change can be set two ways:
1. Day of the week: time will change based on the Month, Time and Day of the week set in this program
2. Date: time will change base on the Date and Time set in this program
Default: Day of the week
908 Secure Digital and SmartMedia
This program enables you to format and perform file management tasks on a Secure Digital or SmartMedia card while it is installed in the CIX processor. Secure Digital (SD) cards are required for ACTU3A (CIX100),
BCTU2A (CIX670) and HCTU1A (CIX1200) processor cards.
Select Maintenance > SM/DS Card.
Secure Digital or SmartMedia Card
The SD card is replacing the SmartMedia (SM) card for use as a removable, portable memory device. The
SD is physically smaller than the SM card while storage capacity is the same or greater.
Notes
•
32MB or 64MB must be used for Strata CIX maintenance functions.
•
The Strata CIX does not use Compact Flash or other similar types of small storage devices.
Functions
An SD or SM Card(s) is required for most of the important Strata CIX maintenance functions such as:
• Saving (Backup) and re-loading the programmed database of a particular Strata CIX system.
• Saving Event trace data files for troubleshooting problems.
• Updating or upgrading the Strata CIX operating software version.
Note
The procedure below will refer to the SM/SD card. The same procedures are used for both the
SmartMedia and Secure Digital card.
Administration and Use
• When the SM/SD card is used to perform one of its functions, it is installed in the SM/SD slot of the
Strata CIX processor. It must be first formatted for Strata CIX operation by running Forced Format
(Program 908). Using the PC to format the SM/SD card is not recommended.
• The Strata CIX format will create five special folders. These folders and how to use them are explained below and in Chapter 14–Data Backup and Restore.
1. Install the SM/SD Card into the SM/SD slot of the Strata CIX processor.
2. Select Maintenance > SM/SD Card.
3. Click one of the following:
• Normal Format – creates any CIX SM/SD folder that does not exist already. Existing folders are not overwritten by this procedure.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-5
Operation
System Setup
•
Forced Format – erases any existing folders and files. All existing data is overwritten. It then creates
the five Strata CIX folders. See “CIX SM/SD Folders” on page 10-7
for more information.
•
Unmount – copies the CIX event and alarm log files from the CIX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SM/SD card and then clears the buffers. It then stops CIX from writing to the SM/SD card so it can be removed without damaging it.
CAUTION! Always run unmount before removing the SM/SD card. Failure to do so can cause damage to the card.
•
Transfer – copies the CIX event and alarm log files from the CIX processor buffers (RAM) to the SM/
SD card and then clears the buffers.
F
IELD
Operation
Completion
CTX/CIX SM/SD
Media Card
Folder
Local Folder
D
ESCRIPTION
Displays the procedure selected.
Possible values:Normal Format, Forced Format, Unmount and Transfer.
Displays the progress and status of the procedure selected.
Possible values:Processing or Complete
Contains files in the CIX SM/SD Folder.
Possible values:Files listed under Admlog, Errlog, Evnttrce, Progdata, Program and
Traffic folders.
You must manually create a new folder on your PC under CIX folder > WinAdmin >
Ctmc > Ctmc_Local > SM/SD Card > New Folder
The created folders will be available in the Local Folder drop-down box. You can store CIX SM/SD files on these folders (See details below).
SM/SD Card FTP File Management
1. The Smart card files can be copied from the SM/SD card to your Network eManager PC and vice versa using the Network eManager SM/SD FTP function. The SM/SD card must be installed in the CIX processor and formatted using Program 908 before it can be used. After it is installed and formatted the
CIX will automatically store files under the Admlog, Errlog and Evnttrce folder of the SM/SD card - see
CIX SM/SD folders below for details.
2. New folders must be created (with your own chosen names) on the Network eManager PC using
Windows Explorer before you can use the SM/SD FTP screen. The folders must be created under the following path which already exists on the Network eManager PC:
CIX>WinAdmin>Ctmc_Local>SM/SDCard >Your Folder Name.
3. After the SM card has been formatted and your folders have been created on the Network eManager
PC you can manage files as described below:
• Download: Copy files from the CIX SM/SD Card to the Network eManager PC.
•
From the CIX SM/SD drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder and file(s) that should be copied to the Network eManager PC.
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the Network eManager PC folder to which the files should be copied to - then click on Download.
• Upload: Copy files from the Network eManager PC to the CIX SM/SD card.
10-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
System Setup
•
From the Local Folder drop down, select the Network eManager PC SM/SD folder and file(s) that should be copied to the CIX SM/SD card.
•
From the CIX SM/SD Folder drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder to which the files should be copied to - then click on Upload.
• Delete SM File: Delete files stored on the CIX SM/SD card.
•
From the CIX SM/SD drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder and file(s) that should be deleted - them click Delete SM file.
CIX SM/SD Folders
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five folders on the SM/SD card as follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves a history of CIX Administration (programming) command entries in xxx.SNP and xxx.DKT files. SNP files provide a log of Network eManager entries and DKT files provide a log of programming telephone entries.
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder. See Maintenance chapter, Event Trace Control
Programs 903, 904 and 905 to set up trace.
• Evnttrce – Network eManager Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CIX programmed settings are all saved in this folder. When a backup is performed, Strata CIX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder as a default.dat file.
Note
To perform the backup function you must first delete any existing default.dat files to allow CIX to create a new default.dat file.
• Program – The operating software of the Strata CIX is saved in this folder as a nhs.prg file.
SM/SD Errors
Any error causes the SM/SD LED to flash (0.25sec ON – 0.25sec OFF continuous) except when the SM/
SD Volume Label is UPDATE; in this case the SM/SD LED will always flash.
SM/SD LED Specification
SM/SD LED, located near the SM/SD slot on the CIX processor, is lit when the following occurs:
• The SM/SD is accessed for read and write.
• Errors are detected. See above for the detail of errors.
• The SM/SD is inserted into the slot, SM/SD LED blinks once. This is because the system accesses the media to read the housekeeping data. When it does not blink, it means that the SM/SD is not detected by the system at all. If the blink does not stop, it means that any of above error is detected or the SM/
SD volume label is UPDATE.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-7
Operation
System Setup
Remote Program Update
Important!
Before beginning the Remote Update process:
•
The SM/SD card must be formatted and installed in the system.
• Backup the existing database (***.dat) BEFORE starting the Remote Update process.
•
Activation of the new software requires a clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.
1. Download the correct file for your system from the Toshiba FYI site:
CIXYYYR5.20MT0xx file (current)
CIXYYYR3.10MK0xx
(YYY=CIX system type; xx=version number)
2. DO NOT UNCOMPRESS the zip file. Copy the zip file to a folder on your PC.
3. In Network eManager, select Maintenance > CIX Software Update.
The first screen presents the option of backing up the CIX data before beginning the update process. If you click Yes, the database backup screen displays allowing you to selet the database to backup. Once the backup procedure has been completed, click the Browse to find the corresponding CIX software update for each CIX system to be updated (the udpate software must match the corresponding system or the update procedure will fail).
4. Click on Step 2 - Upload file(s) to eManager server. The update software is copied to a designated folder in the Network eManager server
5. When all the CIX software updates have been uploaded, press the Start button to complete the update process.
CIX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CIX software release and builds in software file names or when verifying
CIX software versions. For example, if the software ID is ML029, this means ML0 is equal to CIX Release
4.0 and nn is the software build number 29.
CIX Release
= MJ0nn
Software ID
R3.0
R3.1
R4.0
R4.1
R4.2
R5.0
R5.1
R5.2
= MK0nn
= ML0nn
= MN0nn
= MP0nn
= MR0nn
= MS0nn
= MT0nn nn = Software build level/number
Remote Update for Release 4
The remote program update is administered in the same manner as previous releases. In previous releases however, the remote update transferred approximately 200 small files. In R4 the remote update is done with one large file, the same file used for local update.
10-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
System Setup
It should be noted that the Network eManager screen will ‘freeze’ while modem updates are in progress.
This freeze, when using a dial-up modem connection, can last up to 60 minutes. You can check the status of the file transfer when using a dial-up modem by right clicking on the connection icon that appears in the tool tray at the bottom of the screen. (The Remote Update file size is about 9MB). Over a LAN connection remote update takes approximately 15 seconds.
CAUTION! When updating a CIX200 R3 system with the existing LCTU1A card to R4, it will be necessary to perform the update locally (remote update will not work). After the system has been updated to R4 the Remote Update function will be available.
System Turn-on and Start-up Time
When a Release 4 system is turned on it takes about 30-90 seconds to operate. CIX Release 2.x and 3.x take about 15 seconds.
910 Data Backup
Prerequisite Program: 908 page 10-5
This program enables you to backup programmed data from Strata CIX to an SM/SD Card.
1. Install the SM/SD Card into the designated slot of the Strata CIX processor.
Note
The SM/SD card must be formatted by Strata CIX and the “Progdata” folder must be empty (no
Default.dat file)
2. Select Maintenance > Data Backup.
3. Select the system(s) to backup. Click Cancel to interrupt the selected function.
4. Click Backup.
5. The Progress field displays the progress of the selected function.
F
IELD
Backup
Completion
D
ESCRIPTION
Select one of the following buttons. When performing a Backup, you must use a formatted SM/SD card.
•
Backup – Backup Strata CIX data to SM/SD card. This creates a Default.dat file under the Progdata folder of the SM/SD card.
Notes
•
Default.dat is the name of the file that is created and it contains all Strata
CIX programmed data. It is not default data. It is data that is currently programmed in the Strata CIX.
•
The Progdata folder on the SM/SD card must be empty before trying to backup data. You can use FTP to copy and delete an existing default.dat file.
•
Cancel – Cancel the Backup/Restore function.
Current Status of Backup.
Possible values:Completed successfully, Not completed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-9
Operation
System Setup
916 IP Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None
This program displays Network Communication IP address configuration. This program applies to the
Strata CIX Network (NIC) jack connection only. It does not apply to the CIX maintenance modem. To
change TCP/IP settings see “CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming” on page 1-9 .
1. Select Maintenance > CIX Processor IP Address.
2. The following Strata CIX default address displays:
•
IP Address – a.b.c.d where a.b.c.d = 0~255. This IP address is for the NIC/Ethernet only.
•
Subnet Mask – e.f.g.h where e.f.g.h = 0~255 (default = 255.255.255.0). Octet “h” in SubNet Mask cannot be the same as octet “d” in the IP address.
•
Default Gateway (default = 0.0.0.0).
10-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
FTP User Accounts
FTP User Accounts
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes up to four FTP users for the built-in Strata CIX FTP server function located on the
CIX processor. These Strata CIX FTP accounts allow FTP access to the CIX SM/SD card. This allows administration of the CIX SM/SD folders and files.
1. Select Maintenance > SM/SD FTP User Account.
2. Select the FTP Index. Up to four FTP users can be established.
3. Assign the FTP user’s Account Name.
4. Assign the FTP user a Password.
5. Enter the default folder that this FTP account is to access. This should be /0/ which is the root folder of the Strata CIX SM/SD card.
6. Click Submit.
Note
FTP User Accounts are stored in memory on the Strata CIX processor and are intentionally deleted for security when the Strata CIX is powered off/on or initialized.
File Information
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view lists of Alarm and Administration files stored on the Strata CIX SM/SD
card. See “Set Time and Date” on page 10-4
for more information about these files.
1. Select Maintenance > Log/Trace Rile Setup > File Setup.
2. Select from one of the following options or click List to see a summary list of files already programmed into the system. View the file name index, number, name, and creation and modification dates under each of the categories listed below.
• Error Alarm Files.
• Error Alarm Expansion Files.
• SNMP Administrator Files (Network eManager log).
• DKT Administrator Files (programming telephone log).
Note
For a detailed description on Trace function go to “Event Trace Control” on page 11-2
.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-11
Operation
Community Name
Community Name
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to create and set up a Community Name (or passwords) to allow access to specific Strata CIX systems.
F
IELD
1. Select Maintenance > SNMP Community Name.
2. Select the Index Number to assign to the Community or click one of the following buttons:
• Remove – highlight an existing community from the table and click this button to remove the selected community from the index.
• Modify – highlight an existing community from the table and click this button to modify the IP
Address, Privileges and Administrator Level settings for this community.
3. Enter the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
D
ESCRIPTION
Community
Name
IP Address
Enter the Community name. The community name is a password that is stored in the
Strata CIX. To communicate with a Strata CIX, the Network eManager PC must send a legal community name to the CIX when attempting to connect. The default community name stored in the CIX is communityName (case sensitive). The CIX can store up to 10 community names.
Enter the IP address of the community name. Each community name is associated with an
IP address. This IP address is stored in the CIX with its associated community name.
Possible values:a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Privileges
Administrator
Level
Notes
•
To allow any Network eManager PC to connect to the CIX with a particular community name, enter 0.0.0.0 as the IP address for that community name.
•
To allow only a specific Network eManager PC to connect to the CIX with a particular community name, enter the static IP address of that PC for that community name.
Select User Privilege Levels. These privileges are to assign the community name or IP address to an internal Strata CIX level.
Possible values:Read (default) or Write
Note
Read – The user cannot modify Strata CIX data regardless of the Strata eManager
User level 1~4.
Write – The user can modify Strata CIX data according to the Strata eManager user level 1~4.
Select Administrator Level. This level is to assign the community name or IP address to an internal Strata CIX access level.
Possible values:Super User (default) or Ordinary User
Notes
•
Super User – Strata CIX allows the user access to all CIX commands. Super Users can only view ordinary user community names and their own community name but not other Super User community names.
•
Ordinary User – Strata CIX allows the user access to all CIX programs except 900
Initialization/Restart and 911 Update. Ordinary users can only view their own community name.
10-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
Community Name
909 MAC Address
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the Media Access Control (MAC) Address assigned to your Strata CIX
System processor PCB. The MAC address is a unique serial number that is electronically coded in the CIX processor memory at the factory – it cannot be changed. The MAC Address is also printed on the back of the processor card that is used for the CIX1200 (Processor Part Number HCTU1A), CIX670 (Processor
PN BBCU1A) and CIX100 (Processor PN ACTU1A). A MAC Address must be converted to the applicable serial number utilized in Internet FYI for License code generation.
1. Select Maintenance > CIX Processor MAC.
2. Serial Number - review your system serial number.
Note
The serial number is printed on the invoice and bar code of the product shipment.
3. MAC Address displays as shown to the right. AABBCCDDEEFF = 0~9, A~F (hexadecimal values).
4. MAC Address Status - Network eManager verifies whether the MAC address retrieved from the CIX/
CTX is valid or not.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-13
Operation
License Control
License Control
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for Strata Network eManager users.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1. Select Maintenance > Licensing > License Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting and pasting or manually entering the 60-character string in the License Code text box.
Note
If you are not adding the License Code to Network eManager immediately, copy and save the code in Notepad -using Fixedsys font - onto a disk.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
•
Issue – to issue the License Code.
•
Cancel Issue – to cancel the License Code issue.
4. Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
•
Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.
Note
Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.
License Issue
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for Network eManager users.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Status
License Code
Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing
Status.
Possible values:Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate
Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate
Cut and paste the License Code text string or manually enter the License Code
(four characters per box).
Possible values:60 characters.
Note
The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website
(http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from
Toshiba’s FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC
Address and the number of ports. The License Code that is generated for a particular MAC Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.
10-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
License Control
License Activate
Prerequisite Program: License Issue, above
This program enables activation of Network eManager licenses issued in License Issue.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Delay Timer
Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.
Possible values:0~24 (default = 0)
Notes
•
Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.
•
After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check that all ports and features have been activated properly.
License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for Network eManager users.
Prerequisite Program: None
1. Select Mainteance > Licensing > License Information.
2. View Equipped License Information details for this Strata CIX account.
This view is read-only information.
F
IELD
CIX/CTX Release
Number
System Type
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Number of Serial
Ports
Number Of DTMF
Receivers
D
ESCRIPTION
This is the Basic Release Number of CIX software. To view the Active Software
Version, go to Operations/System Setup.
This identifies the type of CIX system to which Strata eManager is currently connected.
This identifies the maximum number of cabinets. The total of base plus expansion cabinets.
This identifies the number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.
One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).
This identifies the number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS
Subassembly is required on the CIX100 processor, no additional hardware is required for CIX670 or CIX1200.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-15
Operation
License Control
F
IELD
Number of Basic
Ports
D
ESCRIPTION
This identifies the number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use (or programmed).
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or door phone is assigned to the circuit.
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is assigned to the circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI assignments.
Strata Net Channels
This identifies the number of Strata Net channels licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use (or programmed). This license must be enabled on each CIX in a Strata Net network.
Number of CTI
Sessions
This identifies the number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console, the ACD or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one
CTI session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).
Number Of
Attendant Consoles
This identifies the number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license is required for each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also required for each Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).
The number of Soft IP Phones licenses. Each phone requires one license.
Number of
Softphones
CIX IP Telephony
Number Of IP
Endpoints
Number Of LVMU
Channels
Shows CIX IP Telephony is Enabled or Disabled.
The number of IP Endpoints licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use
(or programmed).
Shows how many of the licensed LVMU channels are used.
SIP Trunk Channels
Shows how many of the licensed SIP trunks are used.
Number of DP5022-
SDM
Identifies the available number of licensed DP5022-SDM.
10-16
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
Alarm Control
Alarm Control
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 919 and 920
Alarm Notification (AN) sends a notification of a system alarm condition. The notification can be sent over a network connection to an eMonitor system, other application and, optionally, to a feature button on a telephone. The alarm notification is SNMP trap data that can be sent to as many as 11 different IP addresses. Up to eight stations can have a button programmed as an Alarm Indicator. There are three categories of alarms: ISDN, T1, and System Resources.
There are two types of SNMP messages sent to the external, eMonitor, PC or Server; (1) Alarm
Notification when an error condition occurs. (2) Current Alarm Condition Summary sent every 10 minutes whether an alarm has occurred or not.
The following programs enable you to control the alarm settings for a system or slot(s) for Network eManager users.
System Alarm Control (Program 919)
Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > System Alarm.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program resets all alarms and enables/disables the Current Alarm Summary notification.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Clear Alarm
Buffer
02 Alarm Buffer
Status
System ID
The Clear command resets all current alarms. This command is used to manually clear the buffer. Set to Invoke and Submit to clear the buffer.
When the clear command is invoked the system will not re-send a persisting T1 or PRI alarm condition.
When an alarm condition is clear for several seconds, the system will clear the buffer without the need to manually clear the buffer.
Possible values:Idle, Invoke (default = idle)
This command when enabled sends the alarm status to the Alarm Monitor device periodically (approx. 10 minutes).
Possible values:Enable/Disable.
This number is sent in the SNMP Alarm Trap data stream to the CIX Alarm
Monitor application, or any other SNMP trap monitor. It can be used as the
System ID of a CIX node or the same System ID can be assigned to multiple nodes to identify a group of systems (max. 8-characters, alphanumeric).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-17
Operation
Alarm Control
Alarm Control for Slot (Program 920)
Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > Alarm Slot.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program resets all alarms and enables/disables the Current Alarm Summary notification.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
00 Equipment
Number
Enter the cabinet and slot number of the equipment to be monitored.
01 Alarm Enable/
Disable
Notes
•
If you want to monitor expansion cabinet power, you must set the appropriate cabinet number (02~07) and slot number to “00.”
Set this parameter to enable to monitor the selected equipment. Set this parameter to disable to not monitor the selected equipment.
Possible values:Enable/Disable.
Enable/Disable in Prog 920 Enable/Disable in Prog 919
Alarm Occurs
10 minutes 10 minutes
Current Alarm Summary
10-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
Traffic Measurement
Traffic Measurement
Program 921 Control Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Traffic Measurement (TM), when ON, sends data each hour. The data is stored in the SD/SM card on the processor in a TRAFFIC folder or it can be sent to an external device via LAN or RS-232. Each file is named: MMDDHHNN.trf.
MM = Month (01 - 12)
DD = Day (01 - 31)
HH = Hour (01 - 24)
NN = Sequence Number
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Traffic Measure > Control Setup
2. Enter data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Traffic Measurement On/
Off
02 Send TM Data to SM/SD
Card
03 Select Tenant to Measure
Select the System Day/Night Table to be used for the work day and non-work day and holiday definitions. This does not select TM by tenant.
Set the time zone (report hours) in each category.
04 ~ 12 Time Zones
13 Traffic Measurement
Units
Traffic intensity units
Possible values: Erlang or CCS (default)
ILG tab - 14 Select ILG
Select Enable to run Traffic Measurement. Select Disable to stop
Traffic Measurement.
Enable
Disable
To send data to the SM/SD card (TRAFFIC folder) and, if setup in I/O Device configuration, to an external device (RS232c or LAN).
To send data only to the external device. The external device must be set (refer to the I/O
Device configuration Program 803).
OLG tab - 15 Select OLG
DID-Numbers
16 Select DID ILG
Select DID Number
Select which Incoming Line Group should have traffic measurment enabled/disabled
Select which Outgoing Line Group should have traffic measurment enabled/disabled
Select which Incoming DID Line Group should have traffic measurement enbled/disabled for selected DID numbers
The DID number in the selected DID Incoming Line Group that should have traffic measurement enabled/disabled. Use “?” to assign wild cards.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-19
Operation
Traffic Measurement
F
IELD
DID Intercept
17 Select DID ILG-Intercept
DID Intercept Call Type
D
ESCRIPTION
Select which Incoming DID Line Group should have traffic measurement enbaled/disabled for intercepted calls. Intercept occurs on DID calls when a received DID number does not match any DID number programmed in the database, or a destination assignment match was not found because a destination was not programmed in the database or the destination was not operating properly.
Select No DID to measure DID calls that come to the system that are not assigned as a DID number in the CIX database. Select Not
Determined to measure DID calls that come to the system that are not assigned to a destination in the CIX database, or the destination is not operating properly.
18 Measure DTMF Receivers
Measure DTMF Receiver traffic
Possible values: Enable or Disable
19 Measure Conf. Circuits
Measure Conference Circuit Receiver traffic
Possible values: Enable or Disable
20 Station Hunt Group No.
Enter the Station Hunt Group number that should be included in Traffic
Measurement reports.
Possible values: Enable or Disable
10-20
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Operation
Traffic Measurement
Program 922 Specified Traffic Reports
Prerequisite Program: 921 Traffic Measurement
Traffic Reports are a summary of the traffic measurement data. Traffic Reports are stored as a file named
TRAFFIC.TRF, written to the SD/SM card. The SD/SM card must be inserted in the processor before executing this program. The SD/SM card can store one traffic report. If a report is on the SD/SM card when another report is started, the new report will overwrite the old report. The TRAFFIC.trf file will be mixed in with the YYMMDDHHNN.trf files.
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Traffic Measure > Traffic Report.
2. Enter data.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
01 Start Traffic Report
02 First Date in Traffic
Report
03 Last Date in Traffic
Report
04 Traffic Report Status
Start To start a report.
Cancel To stop a report that is running.
The first day of TM data to be included in the report. Traffic Report
Start Time - The first hour of the first day of TM data to be included in the report.
The last day of TM data to be included in the report. Traffic Report
Stop Time - The last hour of the first day of TM data to be included in the report.
No entry. This is a status display.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
10-21
Operation
Trap Destinations (IP Trap Setup)
Trap Destinations (IP Trap Setup)
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to setup Trap IP Destination.
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > IP Trap Destination.
2. Select a Trap IP Index number or click Add to add a Trap IP index.
3. Click Submit.
F
IELD
IP Address
Community Name
D
ESCRIPTION
Enter the IP address for remote connection. This is the IP address of the CIX eMonitor PC or server or other trap monitor device.
Possible values:a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Enter the Name of the Community.
This is the name assigned to the trap monitor PC or server. This is not a password. It is only used to identify the location of the trap monitor device. The default name for eMonitor is ‘eMonitor’ however any name can be used, such as a location name (i.e.; Aledo).
Possible values:Alpha characters (default = no value).
10-22
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Maintenance
11
This chapter discusses Strata CIX maintenance functions.
Trace Function
To analyze Strata CIX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CIX may experience. It is helpful for troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the procedures that appear in this section. Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.
Trace Data
By running traces when tests are conducted on your Strata CIX system, you ensure that data are being kept in the event your system encounters a problem. This data can be sent to Toshiba Tech Support for analysis and troubleshooting.
Strata CIX can collect the following trace data:
•
Error Log (including crash dump)
•
Event Trace
•
ISDN L3 trace
Error Log
When Strata CIX detects an error the information is stored automatically without executing a program.
However, if the system locks up, you must restart the system to save the data to the Secure Digital (SD) or
SmartMedia (SM) card.
Start/Stop/Store Trace Data
When you execute a test, start recording the trace data by enabling the
(Program
. If you use ISDN extensions or trunks, please record ISDN trace data by starting “904
ISDN Trace Location” on page 11-3 .
To test and retrieve trace data
Note This procedure requires use of optional SD/SM reading hardware and software or FTP management
with a personal computer. See “908 Secure Digital and SmartMedia” on page 10-5 .
1. Start your test. If a problem occurs, stop the trace (please refer to the Event Trace Control
program instructions in this manual).
2. Verify the results by running the same test(s) again. If the problem can be duplicated the information contained in the trace data becomes more useful.
3. Unmount data to the SD/SM using
“Set Time and Date” on page 10-4 .
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
11-1
Maintenance
Event Trace Control
4. Remove the SmartMedia card from the Strata CIX. Use caution - the SD/SM device can be damaged if removed incorrectly.
5. Insert the SD/SM card into your SD/SM reader.
6. Locate the Evnttrce folder and save all files ending with .sdt and .mdt to your PC hard drive.
7. Locate the Crash Dump in the errlog folder. File extensions are .exp and .mnl and append to your hard drive.
8. E-mail the files to your Toshiba support person.
If you start recording trace data after a problem occurs, the previous data is overwritten. Make sure the required data files are stored to the SD/SM and saved to disk prior to starting another trace.
The following table shows you how much SD/SM card memory is allocated to each directory
.
System traffic load will determine how much data is stored in the Evnttrace log
.
Table 11-1 SD/SM card file allocation size in Mega Bytes
SmartMedia Type
Errlog
Evnttrce
Admlog
Progdata
Program
Total
16MB
2MB
4MB
2MB
8MB
0MB
16MB
32MB
4MB
12MB
8MB
8MB
0MB
32MB
64MB
8MB
32MB
16MB
8MB
0MB
64MB
128MB
24MB
64MB
32MB
8MB
0MB
128MB
Event Trace Control
Program Number(s): 903, 904, 905 and 906
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in the Strata CIX. Program Numbers 903,
904, 905 and 906 are consolidated in one Network eManager screen.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the designated slot of the Strata CIX processor.
2. Select Maintenance > Log/Trace File Setup > Trace Start/Stop.
3. Enter Program 903 data.
4. Enter Program 904 data
5. Enter Program 905 data.
6. Enter Program 906 data.
7. Trace data displays in the dialog boxes.
11-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Maintenance
Event Trace Control
903 Start/Stop Trace
F
IELD
Start/Stop Trace
Current Function
Completion
Size [x16 Bytes]
Category
D
ESCRIPTION
Click in the appropriate button to start or stop Message Trace. Start Trace indicates that the system’s trace data collection process has begun. Stop indicates the trace data collection process is terminated
Before removing the SmartMedia card run Program 908. See
Digital and SmartMedia” on page 10-5
.
Possible values:Start Trace or Stop Trace (default)
Displays the last command sent to the CIX.
Displays the progress of the current function.
Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the default setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
Possible values:1~256 bytes with 1 unit = 16 bytes (default = 2)
Select Trace data type to be stored.
Possible values:Call Processing, Maintenance, and Call Processing and
Maintenance (default)
904 ISDN Trace Location
ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions are established using this program.
Note This trace can be performed on BSU and PTU cards only.
F
IELD
D
ESCRIPTION
Cabinet/Slot/Circuit
Enter the Equipment Location to be traced (xxyyzz).
Possible values:xx = Cabinet 01~11; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04
Trace Kind
Select the trace collection level.
Possible values:LLCI Trace, Layer 3, Layer 2 & 3, State Transitions, Errors,
Layer 2 States.
Trace Level
Select the extent to which the trace collects information.
Possible values:No Trace (default), Brief or Extensive
905 All ISDN Lines Trace Level Selection
F
IELD
Trace Level For All
ISDN Lines
D
ESCRIPTION
Select whether to trace all ISDN PRI and BRI trunks.
Possible values:Set Extensive (default) or Set No Trace
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
11-3
Maintenance
Memory Access Operation
906 Change Trace Selection
F
IELD
Set Message Trace
Set ISDN Trace
Set Both
Current Trace
Selection
Completion
D
ESCRIPTION
Select Message Trace only.
Possible values:Message Trace (default), ISDN Trace or Both
Select ISDN Trace only
Select Message Trace and ISDN Trace
Displays the last command sent to the CIX.
Displays the progress of the current function.
11-4
Memory Access Operation
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to manipulate memory settings.
1. Select Maintenance > Memory Access.
2. Click the Read Memory or Write Memory button to access memory.
3. Enter the memory Address to be accessed.
4. Select size of memory to access (1~256, default = no value).
5. Click one of the following buttons:
•
New – click this button to create a new Memory Access filename.
•
Open – click this button to open an existing Memory Access file.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Save to save Memory Access file.
Note The Content box displays the contents of the memory address selected.
Components
Prerequisite Program: None
The following programs enable you to monitor the status of individual Strata CIX slots and ports.
This is the main system slot/port monitor. The Components screen allows each cabinet card slot and each card slot port to be monitored, enabled or disabled.
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - Exp Cabinets 1~7.
Auto Fault Detection/Disable
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or line, the Strata CIX system will make them busy. In this case the Strata CIX system will automatically disable the card slot or card port (circuit or channel). The Component Status/Control screen will indicate the card or port failure status with “Disabled by Fault xx” where xx is the status code in the table below. When a digital telephone is disabled the telephone’s LCD will display Make Busy. The station or line card can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts replacements as well.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Maintenance
Components
Note The port or slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.
The figure on the next page displays the status of Exp. Cabinet 1 from a demo system.
Manual Disable/Enable
The components screen allows you to enable or disable any card slot or port.
• When disabled by Disable or Forced Disable, line or stations are made busy and the status will display
“disable by cmd” on the screen. On the telephone LCD, it will display Make busy.
• Disable will disable an idle port or slot and cause ports/slots that are in use to go to Pending Disable
– which go to Make Busy after they go idle. Disable waits until a call clears to disable it.
• Forced Disable will disable an idle port or a port that is in-use (the call will be disconnected).
• Enable – removes the Make Busy condition if the slot or port is manually disabled.
Note You cannot enable a slot or port if the system automatically disabled it. The status on the screen will display Disabled by Fault.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
11-5
This page is intentionally left blank.
Tools and Profile
12
This chapter discusses Tools and Profile to customize and manage your Strata CIX System.
Tools
The download tool provided in Network eManager enables you to download databases stored in system memory into a Network eManager folder named Download. These downloaded databases can then be viewed in your PC to check for errors or other anomalies. The downloaded files are saved as files on the same drive that Network eManager is installed on (often the C: drive) in this path:
eManager\userdata\login name\mac address
Note that the file name will include the name you logged on to Network eManager with, and the MAC address of the system you logged into.
They may be opened and viewed using Excel, Word or some other application.
Download
Prerequisite Program: None
1. Select > Maintenance > CIX Data Download.
2. A list of all Strata Network eManager programs displays.
3. Click on the program to be downloaded. Selected programs are highlighted in yellow and the word
Selected displays to the right. The following buttons are also available:
•
Clear All – click this button to clear all previously selected files.
•
Select All – click this button to select all programs for downloading.
4. Click the Start Downloading button in the top right corner of the display.
5. The system notifies you when the download is complete.
12-1
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
This page is intentionally left blank.
Telephone Button Programming
13
This chapter provides a subset of the button programming interface provided with the Strata CIX. This chapter includes Button Programming for the 900 series programs. For the other programs refer to the
Telephone Button Programming document.
Telephone Button Overview
Strata CIX programmers can access the programming mode from any IP, IPT, or DKT LCD telephone except DKTs connected to an RDSU. A 20-button telephone (shown below) is required to ensure full access to all programming parameters. The telephone button programming interface enables limited programming capabilities over ranges of stations or trunks.
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU cannot be used to program the Strata CIX.
The figure below shows the telephone button pad for a 20-button DP5000-series Digital Telephone or
IP5000-series IP telephone.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Buttons 1-10 beginning with FB1 at the bottom
Speaker
Buttons 11-20 beginning with FB11 at the bottom
13-1
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Telephone Button Commands
1. Use the following buttons to execute the commands:
• Hold – Enter.
• Page/Scroll – Scroll up or down.
• Speaker – This delimiter moves cursors between sub-parameter values.
• Volup – Escape. Vols displays as & on the LCD. Press Volup to program # or * in dialing sequences.
• Voldown – Back space for line editing.
• # # Hold – Cancel.
• * – Use this button between values to specify a range of objects to be programmed (e.g., 1001*1005 enables programming of stations 1001 through 1005).
• ** – Use this button between values to specify a set of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001**1005**1012 enables programming of stations 1001, 1005 and 1012).
• Off-hook – lift and replace the handset to immediately exit programming mode.
2. Keep the following in mind as you maneuver through Strata CIX programs.
• Default and/or current settings are displayed on the telephone LCD with an asterisk.
• Some Strata CIX programs have more than 20 programmable parameters. To toggle from parameters FB01~FB20 and FB21~FB40 press the Scroll or Page button after entering Program
Mode.
• To view parameter options on your telephone LCD press the desired FB button and press the Scroll or Page button.
• Each parameter shows a number to the left (e.g., 2:DISABLE). Program the desired parameter by pressing the number button (in this example 2) that corresponds to your desired parameter.
• To enter data, use the number keys.
• To submit your program entry press Hold. To confirm a submitted entry, press Hold again.
• To exit a program press # # Hold.
• To enter the # character in your data string press the Volup and the # button simultaneously. An & sign appears in your LCD. Press the # button, then enter the remaining data.
• If you get an error code, press Hold (twice) to continue programming. See System Error Codes in the Error Code document for error code details.
Programming Parameters
Programs can have between one and 40 programmable parameters, each represented by the FBnn buttons. The LEDs light up for each FBnn button that features a programmable parameter. Each parameter is programmed by entering values into the LCD from the telephone button pad.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press the appropriate FBnn button.
2. Enter the appropriate value from the telephone button pad using the Parameter Fields tables supplied with each program.
3. Press Hold to submit.
4. Press another FBnn button to program more parameters
… or press Hold again to program.
13-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Programming Sub-parameters
Some commands enable programming of Sub-parameters to further refine Strata CIX settings. Internet or
Network IP addresses are entered using sub-parameter data. IP addresses are displayed as four threedigit values, or Octets, separated by “periods” (e.g., 192.168.255.253). (If your programming telephone’s
LCD is only capable of displaying the IP information three digits, or one Octet, at a time, selecting FB01 in
Program 916 displays the first Octet, 192, on the LCD. To view or change the next Octet (in this example
168) in the IP Address, press the Speaker button. Pressing Speaker again, displays the following Octet (in this example 255)).
The following is an example from Program 200, FB04. FB04 is broken down into three sub-parameters as follows COS DAY1, COS DAY2 and COS NIGHT.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press FB04.
2. At the COS DAY1= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
3. Press Speaker.
4. At the COS DAY2= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
5. Press Speaker.
6. At the COS NIGHT= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
7. Press Hold to submit.
8. Press another FBnn button to program more parameters
… or press Hold again to program a new DN.
Note To change one of the sub-parameters, you must proceed through all three sub-parameters before pressing Hold. For example, to change the value of COS DAY1, you must change the COS DAY1 value, then press Speaker twice, and finally, press Hold.
Button Programming Procedure
Step 1: Enter Program Mode
Enter the button sequence displayed below to enter the CIX1200/CIX670 programming interface from a station.
1. Log in by pressing: Hold *#*#1*2*3*.
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password. Default is 0000.
3. Press Hold.
Step 2: Enter Program Number
1. At the PROG= prompt enter the three digit program code (e.g., 200) and press Hold.
2. Programmable parameters are identified by the FB LEDs that are illuminated on the DKT. Go to
“Choose a Button Sequence” on page 13-4
Press on the related FBnn button to program a parameter or if there are no illuminated FB LEDs, continue to Step 3.
Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters
FB00 parameters designate a specific station, trunk, or circuit to be programmed. The FB00 prompt (e.g.,
EQUIP=, DN=, INDEX=, etc.) appears automatically in the LCD screen.
1. At the FB00 prompt, enter the desired value using the telephone number pad.
2. Press Hold.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-3
Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence
Select the button sequences based on the programs required for programming the Strata CIX from the
Telephone.
Program Listings
This table is a list of programs found in this chapter.
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
915
916
Program
Number
900
901
902
903
904
905
Program Name
System Initialize
Display Version
Set Time and Date
Event Trace Control
ISDN Trace Location
All ISDN Trunk Trace
Event Trace Side Change
System Admin Log
Format/Unmount SmartMedia
MAC Address (System Serial Number)
Data Backup
Program Update
Make Busy Control
Regional Selection
IP Configuration
13-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
900 Series Programs
These programs are organized based on functions versus program numbers.
System Initialize
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores, programmed data.
Program Number(s): 900
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 900 and press Hold.
FB Name
Initialize Level
01
FB Summary
Press 1 or 2 to select the initialize level.
Level 1 – Erases programmed data and enters default data or backed up data if a
SmartMedia Card is installed (see Note).
Level 2 – Simulates System Power Off/Power
On operation to reset hardware.
2.
1.
Value
Initialize Level 1
Initialize Level 2
LCD Prompt
1:Restart with
Clear Data
2:Restart
To access programming parameters
1. Press FB01 to choose Initialize Level 1 or 2.
2. Press Hold twice to initialize.
Important!
Choosing Initialize Level 1 without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed data and returns your Strata CIX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data is lost.
Restoring Data from SmartMedia
When initializing with Level 1 you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and stored on a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Install a SmartMedia card that contains the Prog data directory with the default.dat file. The default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See Data Backup.
Important!
A CIX/CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CIX/CTX software version that is the same or higher than the CIX/CTX software version on which the default.dat file was created. For example, a default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF029 can be restored on an R2.0
MF030, MF031 and higher R2.1MG0XX, R2.2 MF0XX (XX = 01~99, but it cannot be restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
2. After installing the SmartMedia card, run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the restore process access, the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note During the restore process the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-5
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Display Version
This program enables you to view current software versions for the Strata CIX system and installed options.
• Active – As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the Strata CIX system.
• Standby – This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in the event problems are experienced by the Active version.
Program Number(s): 901
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 901 and press Hold.
FB Name
Version Number
Active
Version Number
Standby (CIX1200/
CIX670 only).
FB Summary
01 Display Active side software version and installed options.
As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the CIX system.
02 Display Standby side software version and installed options.
This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in the event problems are experienced by the Active version.
Value
6~31 digits
LCD Prompt
Installed Version
Installed Version
1. Press FB01 to view the current Strata CIX software version. Press the Scroll or Page key to move the display left or right.
2. Press FB02 to view backup Strata CIX software version.
3. Press Hold, then # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
13-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Reading the Version Code
The figure below is an example of the Strata CIX software version code.
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Position
Version
Code
1
A
2
A
3
520
4
MTxxx
5
Px
6
Dxxx
7
XSEM.00
• Pos. 1 - Product ID – This is the first character in the version code string. N designates CIX670; S designates CIX100, A designates CIX1200
• Pos. 2 - Country Code - 2 – “A” identifies the country (USA, Canada, Mexico).
• Pos. 3 - CIX Release Level – This string of numbers identifies the Strata CIX Release level
(NA101=R1.01, NA102=R1.02, NA103=R1.03, etc).
• Pos. 4 - CIX Software Version – This string of characters identifies the current software version. For the example above, the software is called “M00XX, MA2XX, MA3XX, etc,” where XX is the version number.
• Pos. 5 - IPL Version
• Pos. 6 - DTMF Version – This three character string identifies the existence of DTMF and ABR circuits and the version. The “D” designation indicates that DTMF is being applied to the Strata CIX while “12” indicates the DTMF version number. The CIX1200 DTMF version has 3 digits.
• Pos. 7 - Installed Equipment ID – There are five characters, each referencing a unique equipment identification value assigned to hardware installed in your Strata CIX system. If the particular hardware is not installed a “-” displays. The following are the equipment identifier designations.
• B – BBMS is installed (CIX1200 does not use this)
• X – BEXS is installed.
• S – BSIS is installed.
• E – The Ethernet is installed.
• M – The Modem is installed.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-7
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Set Time and Date
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CIX.
Program Number(s): 902
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 902 and press Hold.
FB Name
Date
Time
FB Summary
01 Enter current system date in this field.
02 Enter the current time in this field.
Value
yymmdd format yy = current year mm = current month dd = current day hhmmss format hh = current hour mm = current minute ss = current second
LCD Prompt
DATE=
TIME=
1. Press FB01 to enter current Strata CIX Date. See table above for format.
2. Press Hold to program.
3. Press FB02 to enter current Strata CIX time. See table above for format.
4. Press Hold to program.
5. Press Hold to submit, then # # Hold to return to the
PROG
= prompt.
6. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Event Trace Control
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CIX.
Program Number(s): 903
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
Access Sequence:
Install SmartMedia card
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 903 and press Hold.
13-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
FB Name
Trace State
Trace Size
FB Summary
01 Enter 1 or 2 to Start or Stop Message
Trace. Stopping the trace outputs data to the SmartMedia card. Wait for the
PROG= prompt on the LCD before proceeding.
Before removing the SmartMedia card run Program 908. See Format/Unmount
Secure Digital/SmartMedia on page 13-14.
02 Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the default setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
03 Trace data type to be stored.
1:Start
2:Stop
Value
1~256 (in bytes)
1 unit = 16 bytes
Default = 2
1:Call Processing
2:Maint and Admin
3:Both of the above
LCD Prompt
1:START
2:STOP
SIZE=
Trace
Category
1.CP
2.M&A
3.CP+M&A
(default)
1. Press FB01 to enable Start or Stop trace. Use the number key pad to make your selection.
2. Press Hold.
Notes
• Start indicates the trace was previously started and is currently running.
• Stop indicates the trace is not running and all trace buffer data was transferred to the
SmartMedia.
3. Press FB02 to enter trace file size. To change the setting use the number Dial Pad.
4. Press Hold.
5. Press FB03 to set trace category. To view setting options, press the Scroll or Page button.
6. Press Hold twice to execute. Wait for the
PROG
=
prompt to display before proceeding.
7. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card.
A new trace file is stored on SmartMedia under the Evnttrace directory. Run the Unmount command
(Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-9
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
ISDN Trace Location
This program enables set up of ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions.
Program Number(s): 904
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 904 and press Hold.
At the EQUIP= prompt enter the Shelf, Slot and Port numbers.
Notes
•
Shelf, Slot and Circuit number is entered in “XXYYZZ” format where Shelf is a two digit value from
01~07 corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet number; slot is a two digit value from 01~10 corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet’s PCB slot number; circuit is a two digit value from 01~04 corresponding to the Strata CIX PCB Slot’s circuit number.
•
Always use circuit 01 for RPTU.
FB Name
LLCI
Layer 3
Layer 2 and 3
FB Summary
01 Level of collecting LLCI values.
02 Level of collecting Layer 3 messages.
03
Level of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages.
State Transitions 04 Level of collecting State Transitions.
Errors 05 Level of collecting errors.
Layer 2 States 06 Level of collecting Layer 2 States.
Value
1:None (no information)
2:Brief
(important information)
3:Detailled (all information)
LCD Prompt
1:NON
2:BRIEF
3:DETAILED
1. Press FB01 to run a LLCI Trace. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
2. Press FB02 and set CCL3 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
3. Press FB03 and set L2L3 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
4. Press FB04 and set STATE Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
5. Press FB05 and set ERRORS Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
6. Press FB06 and set L2 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
7. Press Hold to execute.
8. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
9. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
13-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
All ISDN Trunk Trace
Program start/stop of packaged detailed collection of event trace functions. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 905
Prerequisite Program: Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia on page 13-14, ISDN Trace Location on page 13-11 and Event Trace Control on page 13-9
Reference:
Access Sequence:
Install SmartMedia card
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 905 and press Hold.
FB Name
Trace All
ISDN Trunks
FB
01
Summary
Output All ISDN Trunk Events to
SmartMedia
Value
1:On (default)
2:Off
LCD Prompt
1:ON
2:OFF
1. Press FB01.
2. Select 1, or 2 to turn on or off.
3. Press Hold twice to execute.
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Event Trace Side Change
This program enables you to manage your ISDN protocol trace. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 906
Prerequisite Program: Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia on page 13-14
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 906 and press Hold.
FB Name
Side
Change
FB
01
Summary
Enter desired parameter number
Value
1:Message
2:ISDN
3:Message+ISDN
LCD Prompt
1:MESSAGE
2:ISDN
3:MESSAGE+ISDN
1. Press FB01.
2. Select 1, 2, or 3 to select parameter.
3. Press Hold to execute.
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the Secure Digital or
SmartMedia card. Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the Secure Digital or
SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-11
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
System Admin Log
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log.
Program Number(s): 907
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 907 and press Hold.
FB Name
Admin Log On/
Off
FB
01
Summary
Enter 1 or 2 to Start or Stop Admin
Log.
Value
1:Start
2:Stop
LCD Prompt
1:START
2:STOP
1. Press FB01. To run System Admin Log press 1 Hold (twice). You are sent to the PROG= prompt.
2. To Stop the log, press FB01 and press 2 on the dial pad.
3. Press Hold twice and wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card.
Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the Secure Digital or SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.
Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia
This program enables administrators to format a SmartMedia card from the Strata CIX Network eManager or the telephone button pad.
Note Strata CIX Network eManager cannot view SmartMedia files directly. Additional hardware is required to view the contents of the SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 908
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
Access Sequence:
None
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 908 and press Hold.
13-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
FB Name
Control
.
FB Summary
01 Choose SmartMedia card formatting method:
Value
1:Normal
Normal – creates any Strata CIX SmartMedia directory that does not exist already. Exiting directories are not overwritten by this procedure.
Forced – erases any existing directories and files. All existing data is overwritten. See
below for more information.
Unmount – writes data into SmartMedia Card. Always run unmount before removing the SmartMedia card to prevent damage to the card.
2:Forced
3:Unmount
4:Transfer
Transfer – writes data from static RAM to SmartMedia
Card.
LCD Prompt
1:NORMAL
2:FORCED
3:UNMOUNT
4:TRANSFER
1. Press FB01 to enter parameter. Enter 1~4 as your command choice. Press the Scroll or Page button to make your selection.
2. Press Hold to confirm and Hold again to execute.
3. Wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Strata CIX Secure Digital/SmartMedia Directories
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five directories on the SmartMedia card as follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder.
• Evnttrce – Strata CIX eManager Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CIX programmed settings are all saved in this folder.
• Program – The operating software and default data of the Strata CIX is saved in this folder.
When a backup is performed, Strata CIX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.
MAC Address (System Serial Number)
This program enables you to display your CIX1200 or CIX670 System Serial Number.
Program Number(s): 909
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 909 and press Hold.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-13
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
FB Name
MAC Address
FB Summary
01 Display System Serial Number.
Value
12 digits
LCD Prompt
MAC Address
1. Press FB01 to view parameter. The MAC Address is view only and cannot be changed.
2. Press Hold (twice) to exit to the PROG= prompt.
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Data Backup
This program enables you to Back up system data to a SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 910
Prerequisite Program:
“Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12
must be performed before running this program.
Reference:
Access Sequence:
None
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 910 and press Hold.
FB Name
Backup
Function
Numbers
Current
Number
Backup State
FB Summary
01 Start and Stop system backup.
Restore function is not operational and
should never be executed. Use System
Initialize (Program 900) Level 1 to restore
system backup.
02 The number of data blocks. This number varies depending on the amount of programming the system contains.
03 This number increments as the backup progresses. When the backup is complete this number should match the total number of data blocks displayed in Numbers (FB02).
04 All_Ok – Backup completed with no errors.
Partial_Ok – Backup has completed with errors.
NG – Backup has failed.
Cancel – Cancel Backup.
Importing – Program data is being restored.
Exporting – Program data is being sent out.
Value
1:Backup
2:Restore (Do not use. See Note on left).
3:Cancel
Variable
Variable
1:normal end all
2:normal end part
3:abnormal end
4:cancel
5:importing
6:exporting
LCD Prompt
1:BACKUP
2:RESTORE
3:CANCEL
ALL NO=
CUR NO=
1. Press FB01 to enter your Backup choice. Press the Scroll or Page button to view selection options.
2. Press 1. FB01 and FB04 should blink green.
3. Press Hold to execute. Press Hold again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit programming mode from your telephone.
13-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
To view Backup progress
1. While the program is running (FB01 and FB04 blink green), press FB02 to view the total number of files to be transferred.
2. Press FB03 to view the current file number that is being transferred.
3. The Backup is complete when FB04 blinks intermittently.
4. To verify success, push FB04. Your telephone LCD should indicate *1.ALL_OK.
5. Press # # Hold to exit.
Note Do not press the Hold button. Pressing the Hold button restarts the Backup procedure.
To Restore data from the SmartMedia card to Strata CIX, see
“System Initialize” on page 13-5
.
Program Update
This program enables you to update the Strata CIX programs.
Program Number(s): 911
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card. Before running this program make sure the
SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See
“Format/Unmount Secure Digital/
for more details.
Reference:
Access Sequence:
None
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 911 and press Hold.
FB Name
Update Function
Total Blocks
FB
01
02
LCD Prompt
1:Update
2:Reboot
3:Cancel n/a
Copied Blocks
Active Side Status
Stand by Side
Status
03
04
05
Summary
Enter 1 or 2 to identify the type of Update intended.
Select 3 to cancel a running update.
View total blocks to be updated (total blocks will vary depending on software versions).
View number of blocks copied.
Backup Type Display
Stand by Backup Type
Value
1:Update
2:Reboot
3:Cancel
0~65536
(CIX1200/670)
0~128 (CIX100) default = 0
0~65536
(CIX1200/670)
0~128 (CIX100) default = 0
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error n/a
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
1:Normal
2:Trial
3:Fault
4:Don’t Care
5:Error
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-15
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
FB Name
Active Side
Number
Status
FB
06
07
Summary
Active Side Number.
View Backup Status.
Value
0 or 1 default = 0
1:Idle
2:Running
3:Success
4:Error
LCD Prompt
ACT SIDE=
1:Idle
2:Running
3:Success
4:Error
1. Press FB01 to enter your Backup choice. Press the Scroll or Page button to view your selection options.
2. Press 1. FB01 and FB04 should blink green.
3. Press Hold to execute. Press Hold again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit programming mode from your telephone.
13-16
Make Busy Control
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this feature makes them busy. The station or line card can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts replacements as well. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 912
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference:
Access Sequence:
None
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 912 and press Hold.
At the CABINET= prompt enter the Shelf number.
Note The Shelf number is entered in “XX” format where Shelf is a two digit value from 01~07 corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet number. See “Program Button LEDs” below for a description of the LED display.
FB Name
Equipment
Slot #1
Slot #2
Slot #3
Slot #4
Slot #5
Slot #6
Slot #7
Slot #8
Slot #9
Slot #10
FB
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Summary
Enter Cabinet Number
Enter 1 or 2
Value
01~07 (value=xx)
1: Set make busy
2: Clear make busy
1. Press FB01~FB10 to enter your Make Busy selection for the appropriate Slot in the Cabinet entered in
Access Sequence above.
Note The slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
2. Press Hold to execute.
3. Press Hold again to return to CABINET= prompt.
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Program Button LEDs
The LED blink pattern indicates the following:
• Red continuous blinking – PCB experienced a Make Busy status error.
• Red continuous illumination – PCB Make Busy Status mode is on.
• Green continuous blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is stand by.
• Green intermittent blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
Regional Selection
Set Operating region for your Strata CIX. This assignment sets built-in core LSI hardware parameters that are not changeable with jumpers or switches. These parameters must be set unique for each country and affect system operation.
Program Number(s): 915
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control > CIX Processor
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 915 and press Hold.
Field
Region
Description
Set region number. 0~2 are valid entries for
North American Operations.
Value
0~31 (USA = 0,
Canada = 1, and
Mexico = 2)
LCD Prompt
REGION=
1. Press FB01. Enter 0~2. Press Hold.
2. Press Hold (twice).
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
13-17
Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs
IP Configuration
This program enables you to set up Network Communication Protocols.
Program Number(s): 916
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 916 and press Hold.
FB Name
IP Address
FB
01
Summary
Enter IP Address 1
192 = First IP Address Octet
168 = Second IP Address Octet
254 = Third IP Address Octet
253 = Fourth IP Address Octet
Enter Subnet Mask Address 1
Value
0~255 default = 192.168.254.253
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
02
03 Enter Default Gateway 1
0~255 default = 255.255.255.0
0~255 default = 0.0.0.0
Notes
•
The LCD only displays three of the twelve IP address digits at a time. Press the Speaker button to view the remaining digits.
•
The IP Address is the static IP address of the Strata CIX processor NIC/Ethernet connection only. The
PPP IP address for the Strata CIX processor modem is always 192.168.255.254 and cannot be changed.
1. Press FB01 to view the current TCP/IP Address 1 (press FB02 to view the current Subnet Mask
Address 1, or press FB03 to view Default Gateway Address 1).
Press Hold.
2. Enter first IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 3.
3. Press Speaker button and enter second IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 4.
4. Press Speaker button and enter third IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 5.
5. Press Speaker button and enter fourth IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 6.
6. Press Hold.
7. Press FB02 to configure the remaining parameters.
8. Press Hold.
9. After all parameters are entered press Hold to submit the new settings.
10.You are automatically returned to the PROG= prompt.
11. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
13-18
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
14
Data Backup and Restore
Backup Feature
Backing up your files creates a *.dat file. The file is automatically named default.dat (as shown in Case 1 below). If one already exists it is overwritten (as shown in Case 2). If more than two *.dat files exist in the progdata folder, a file whose name is default.dat is created (shown in Case 3).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-1
Data Backup and Restore
Data Backup and Restore
CAUTION!
Release 4 will overwrite the default.dat file. This is different than previous Strata CIX/
CTX versions that will not overwrite an existing default.dat file.
14-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Data Backup and Restore
Restore Feature
To restore files, you can only have one programming data file whose name is “*.dat” in the progdata folder
(shown in Case 1 below). You can name the file anything you want based on the rules given above. If there are two or more “Programming data files” in the progdata folder, it cannot be used to restore files (shown in
Case 2 below).
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-3
Data Backup and Restore
System Turn-on and Start-up Time
System Turn-on and Start-up Time
When a Release 4.0 or later system is turned on, it takes about 30-90 seconds to operate. CIX Release 2.x and 3.x take about 15 seconds.
R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup
This section provides Strata CIX maintenance procedures that can be activated from the programming telephone. These procedures are for R3.0 and earlier systems.For SmartMedia, refer to
Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12 .
1.
Format the SmartMedia using
“Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12 (Program
908).
2.
Insert the formatted SmartMedia into Strata CIX.
3.
Backup data using “Data Backup” on page 13-14 (Program 910). LED indicators should show the
following:
•
FB01~FB03 solid red light.
•
FB04 intermittent green.
4.
Press FB01 and choose Backup by pressing 1 on the telephone button pad.
CAUTION!
Never use Restore (2). It is not valid for current versions of CIX software and could result in corrupt databases and system mis-operation.
5.
Press Hold. Backup for programmed data starts. The LED indicator FB04 consistently blinks green during back up. After back up is complete, FB04 will flash inconsistently slower.
CAUTION!
Do not press Hold while Backup is being performed.
6.
Press Hold twice to exit programming.
Backup Progress and Completion Indicators
You can monitor Backup progress by pressing the FB02 or FB03 buttons as follows. See
Configuration” on page 13-18 for more details.
• If the value displayed in the LCD is increasing each time FB03 is pressed, the Backup is proceeding successfully.
• When the value displayed in the LCD for FB03 and FB02 are the same, the Backup process is complete.
• When the FB04 LED returns to an intermittent green, Backup is complete.
• Press FB04 to verify Backup is completed. If the LCD displays *1:ALL_OK the Backup was successful.
14-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Restoring Programmed Data
To restore data from a Backup performed onto SmartMedia follow the directions below:
1.
Insert the SmartMedia card that has the system’s default.dat file (under the PROGDATA folder) into the Strata CIX SmartMedia slot.
2.
Run Program 900 “System Initialize” on page 13-5
, Level 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR). See programming steps below.
Restoring data takes anywhere from 10 minutes to one hour for completion depending on the size of the database (default.dat file).
3.
When the programming telephone LCD becomes active, enter the programming mode and enter your password.
Restore is complete if the system accepts the password and enables you to enter programming mode.
4.
Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CIX again after restoring system data. This is necessary to reset xIPU, Strata Net, Strata Net, ISDN and other advanced features.
Local Update
The following procedures are required for Local Update of all CIX systems.
Prerequisites for CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 Local Update
The following are the prerequisites for Local Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and will take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the type of CIX system and the type of Update that will be performed.
CIX Software Update Files
Each Strata CIX system type has two Software Update files: one for Network eManager Remote Update and another file for Local Update (to use with the programming telephone procedure).
CAUTION!
Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.
Data Backup and Restore
Restoring Programmed Data
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-5
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
CIX Software Identification
Refer to the table below to identify CIX software release and builds in software file names or when verifying
CIX software versions.
Software Release
R1.00 and R1.01
R1.02
R1.03
R1.3
R2.0
R2.1
R3.0
Software ID
= M01nn
= MA2nn
= MA3nn
= ME0nn
= MF0nn
= MG0nn
= MJ0nn
R4.0
R4.1
R4.2
R5.0
= ML0nn
= MN0nn or =MN2nn
= MP0nn
= MR0nn
R5.1
R5.2
= MS0nn
= MT0nn nn = Software build level/number
Step 1: Download and Extract CIX Software
The latest released version of CIX system software Update files are posted on the Toshiba FYI site http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com. To download the software files, follow the procedure below.
Step 1A: To Download CIX System Software Files from FYI
1.
From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are located under the appropriate System Software heading.
2.
Double-click the appropriate link: System Software: Software (Local Update)
3.
When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4.
Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5.
Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version, then click Save.
Step 1B: Extract Downloaded Files
1.
After the download is complete, select the Open or Open Folder button on the Download Complete screen to extract/open the files now, or select the Close button to extract the files later.
Notes
• The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
• If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor screen.
These files are the self-extracting .exe files.
2.
In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3.
Verify the unzip folder path for Local Update: SmartMedia Drive:\PROGRAM
14-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
4.
Verify the unzipped files or folders for Local Update of the Strata CIX100, CIX670and CIX1200 the file name is the same “nhs.prg”.
The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and then copied to the appropriate SmartMedia
PROGRAM folder or Strata eManager Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be approximately 15MB.
Step 2: Choose Strata CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 for Local
Update
Choose one of the following:
Strata CIX100 Local Update
Strata CIX200 Local Update
Strata CIX670 Local Update
Strata CIX1200 Local Update
Strata CIX100 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CIX software version and restore programmed data. The new software is first loaded on the SmartMedia card. It is then transferred to the Strata CIX100 processor flash RAM. The Strata CIX100 programmed data is then restored.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with Backup of Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a back up of the Strata CIX programmed data (default.dat).
1.
Insert a SmartMedia card into the CIX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see the
“R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup” on page 14-4
).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2.
Remove the SmartMedia card from the CIX and physically label it “Strata CIX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of New CIX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CIX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system software:
1.
Obtain the Strata CIX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an appropriately named folder on your PC (see the Download and Extract CIX Software procedure on page 1).
2.
Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CIX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced
Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3.
Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CIX and Install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4.
Copy the new Strata CIX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
Note It is not necessary to create a SmartMedia Card Volume label for CIX100 Update. However, if you create a volume label, do not use PRGUPDATE, PRGRESCUE0, or PRGRESCUE01 as volume labels.
5.
Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CIX100, MXnnn” or whatever software version you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
•
One card containing the CIX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
•
One card containing the CIX software update file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-7
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
Step 3: Update CIX100 Software
CAUTION!
This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more depending on the CIX database.
1.
Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CIX processor
SmartMedia socket.
2.
From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press Hold. Press FB01 and dial 1
(UPDATE) and then press Hold.
CAUTION!
Pressing Hold twice will cause the Update to fail
After a short pause the CIX will begin to upload the software from the SmartMedia card to the processor flash RAM causing the following:
•
If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
•
If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure the file is a CIX100 nhs.prg file and not
CIX670 or CIX1200 file.
•
You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
•
When all the data blocks are copied the CIX stops normal processing and all telephone LCDs go blank.
•
The processor Heartbeat LED is on steady red.
•
The processor SmartMedia LED turns on flashing rapidly at first, then flashes slowly and finally stops flashing.
•
The above will last about five to 10 minutes.
•
When the Update is complete the system begins to operate normally with default data.
3.
Use Program 901 to check that the new software version of CIX software has been loaded. If you cannot enter the Program Mode the new software may still be loading.
4.
Remove the SmartMedia card (which contains PROGRAM/nhs.prg file) from the CIX processor.
Step 4: Restart and Restore Strata CIX100 Backup Data
1.
Insert the SmartMedia labeled “Strata CIX Backup data” which you previously made at the start of this procedure. This card contains PROGDATA/default.dat file.
2.
From the programming telephone enter Program 900. Press FB01 and dial 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR) and then press Hold (twice). The Strata CIX will restart (initialize) on the new software and restore the backed up program data. The time required for this operation will vary from a few minutes to 30 minutes or more depending on the size of the database.
14-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
Step 5: Confirm Software is Updated and Backup Data is Restored
1.
When the telephone LCDs display and system dial tone is available, try to log in to the Programming
Mode from digital telephone. (If Update/Restore is finished, you can log in).
2.
From the programming telephone check the Strata CIX version number using Program 901.
3.
Turn the CIX100 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset QISG, ISDN and other advanced features.
4.
Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail, etc., are working correctly.
5.
Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CIX processor. This enables you to make and back up changes using Network eManager remotely.
Important!
It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is complete.
Strata CIX670 or CIX1200 Local Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CIX software version and restore programmed data. The new software is first copied from the SmartMedia card to the standby side of the Strata CIX processor flash
RAM. Then the new software on the Standby flash RAM is switched to the active mode and the original software is switched to the Standby mode for a trial run.
After swapping the software version making the new software “Active,” the Strata CIX restores the programmed data. If the system functions properly, the trial operation can be set to normal operation; if there are problems you can switch the original software back to Active.
A CIX default.dat database can only be restored to a CIX software version that is the same or higher than the CIX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples:
• A default.dat created on CIXR2.0 MF013 can be restored on an R2.0 MF013, MF014 and higher.
• R2.2 MF0XX, R2.1MG0XX (XX = 01~99), cannot be restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or
R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Backup of the Customer Database
This SmartMedia card will contain a Backup of the Strata CIX programmed data (default.dat).
1.
Insert a SmartMedia card into the CIX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see
“R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup” on page 14-4
).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2.
Remove the SmartMedia card from the CIX and physically label it “Strata CIX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of the New CIX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CIX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system software.
1.
Obtain the Strata CIX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see “Download and Extract CIX Software” on page 14-6
.
2.
Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CIX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced
Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-9
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
3.
Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CIX and install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4.
Copy the new Strata CIX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
5.
Create a SmartMedia Card Volume label “PRGUPDATE” on CIX Update SmartMedia card as shown:
• Select and right mouse click the appropriate SmartMedia drive, for example, drive E or G in some computers.
• Click Properties.
• Under General tab, in the Label field enter label name (in this case PRGUPDATE).
6.
Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CIX670, MXnnn, “CIX1200, MXnnn”” or whatever software version you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
•
One card containing the CIX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
•
One card having the volume label “PRGUPDATE” and containing the CIX software Update file:
PROGRAM\nhs.prg
Step 3: Update CIX670 or CIX1200 Software
1.
Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the CIX processor SmartMedia socket.
2.
From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press Hold. Press FB01 and dial 1
(UPDATE) and then press Hold once. Pressing Hold twice will cause the Update to fail. This will not interrupt the CIX system operation.
• If FB07-LED is flashing green it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure it is a CIX670 or CIX1200 nhs.prg file and not a CIX100 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When FB07-LED is solid green with periodic short blinks, it indicates the first part of Update completed successfully (2 to 10 minutes).
3.
After FB07 is on solid green with a periodic wink, press Hold, while in Program 911. Press FB05 and dial 2 (TRIAL) and then press Hold. This will change the status of the Standby Flash Memory to trial.
4.
Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg file).
5.
Insert the SmartMedia CARD labeled “Strata CIX Backup data” into processor/ SmartMedia socket.
The SmartMedia LED on the processor begins to blink.
The “Strata CIX Backup data” SmartMedia card is the card you previously made that includes the Strata
CIX programmed data in the default.dat file under the PROGDATA folder. If this is not done before starting Clear-reboot, all programmed data will be lost.
The next operation will take the system out of service for 10 minute to an hour depending on the size of the CIX database.
6.
From the programming telephone enter Program 911 and press Hold; press FB01 and dial 3
(CLRREBOOT) and then press Hold. This will Clear-reboot the system to switch the new software version from standby to active and restore Backup data.
14-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Local Update
CAUTION!
This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more depending on the CIX database. Do not skip any steps or the Update will fail.
Notes
• If CLRREBOOT is activated without the Backup data SmartMedia card installed, the active and standby software is swapped and the system default program data is restored.
• The Strata CIX processor heartbeat LED stops flashing and all telephones become inactive. After a few minutes the Strata CIX initializes and starts up with new version of software as active and the original software as standby, and then restores the backed up program data from the SmartMedia card default.dat file (the processor SmartMedia LED flashes while it restores the program data to the processor RAM).
• After CLRREBOOT has completed the new version of CIX System software will be active in Trial mode.
• If system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the Trial mode, the original software switches back to active and the new software will switch back to Standby. This is to provide an automatic method of switching back to the original software version if the new version is causing problems.
7.
Confirm that the software is updated and the Backup data is restored by verifying/doing the following:
•
Make sure the processor SmartMedia LED is off.
• Log in to programming mode from a digital telephone. If you cannot log in, it means the data restore process is not completed.
• From the programming telephone, in Program 901 make sure that the new Strata CIX system software version number is on the active side. FB01 shows the new system software version number on the active side, and FB02 shows the original software version number on standby side.
8.
Set the Active side of flash RAM from “Trial” to “Normal” as follows:
•
From the programming telephone, enter Program 911 and press Hold. Press FB04 and dial 1
(NORMAL), then press Hold. The new software is on the active side running in Normal mode.
•
If Strata CIX power is turned off/on before the Active side is switched to “Normal”, the Strata CIX will automatically perform a CLRREBOOT and make the old software active.
Note The active side switches from “Trial” to “Normal” automatically after 24 hours if it is not done manually using Program 911.
9.
Remove the SmartMedia card and turn the power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset BIPU-M,
BIPU-Q, QISG, ISDN and other advanced features.
10. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail, etc., are working correctly.
11. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CIX processor. This enables you to make and backup changes using Network eManager remotely.
Important!
It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is complete.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-11
Data Backup and Restore
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update
A local update starts with the update software loaded on the SD/SM memory card. The update software is then copied to the processor card RAM. Obviously, the technician must be ‘local’ to the system to plug the
SD/SM card into the processor.
A remote update copies the update software from the Network eManager (NeM) PC to the Strata CIX system processor card. This process can be performed at a location that is remote from the processor card or on site.
Update Process
The following procedure details the process.
• Download the Update software
• Backup the Strata CIX system database
• Upload the update software
Download the Update Software
1.
Create a software update folder on your PC.
2.
Download the update software from the Toshiba FYI website. Ensure that the ‘Remote Update for use with Network eManager’ file is selected for download.
3.
Save the file to an update folder on your PC. Do not unzip the file.
Backup the System
4.
Launch Network eManager.
5.
Connect to the Strata CIX system to be updated.
6.
Select Maintenance > CIX Data Backup.
14-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update
Update the System Software
7.
Use the Browse button to open the folder with update file downloaded from the FYI web site.
8.
Click on the Step 2 - Upload file(s) to eManager server button.
9.
Click to check-mark the Upgrade and AutoActivate boxes.
4
4
Note Calls will drop during the database restore process. Depending on system size this may that several minutes.
10. When the Connect to Client screen appears; Wait until the telephones connected to the system reset
(this may take approximately 30 minutes).
11. Connect to the system to verify the equipment version.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-13
Data Backup and Restore
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) SD/SM Cards
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) SD/SM Cards
To update Strata CIX100 and CIX670 R3 systems to R5 software requires new processor cards. The older processors use SM memory cards, R5 and later processors use SD memory cards.
Note The process requires a SM/SD adapter for your PC.
To backup an R3 database to restore on an R5 processor use the following procedure.
1.
Connect the Strata CIX system using Network eManager. Note the MAC address of the processor.
2.
Backup the system database to the on-board SM. The backup will be the DEFAULT.DAT file in the
PROGDATA file on the SM card.
3.
Download the default.dat file from SM to a file on your PC. The path to the PROGDATA folder on your
PC is: C:\eManager\main\eManager\UserData\Administrator\<MAC address of the processor card>\SM.SD_CARD
4.
Copy the file from your PC to the PROGDATA folder on the SD card.
5.
Power down the system and remove the processor card.
6.
Insert the new processor card. Insert the SD card into the connector on the processor card.
7.
Power up the system.
8.
Copy the file from your PC to the PROGDATA folder on the SD card.
9.
After the SW update restore the database from the SD card. When using the Network eManager update procedure this step is automatic. The SD card must be in the processor card for this function to execute automatically.
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) Local PC
To update Strata CIX100 and CIX670 R3 systems to R5 software requires new processor cards. The older processors use SM memory cards, R5 and later processors use SD memory cards.
Note This process requires a PC with Network eManager.
To backup an R3 database to restore on an R5 processor use the following procedure.
1.
Connect the Strata CIX system. Note the MAC address of the processor.
14-14
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Data Backup and Restore
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) Local PC
2.
Backup the system database to the on-board SM. The backup will be the DEFAULT.DAT file in the
PROGDATA file on the SM card.
3.
To copy the DEFAULT.DAT file from SM to a file on your PC select the PROGDATA Media Card Folder on the left side of the screen. Highlight the DEFAULT.DAT file then, click on the Download button.
4.
The system will copy the DEFAULT.DAT file to your PC.
5.
Power down the system and remove the processor card.
6.
Insert the new processor card. Insert the SD card into the connector on the processor card.
7.
Power up the system.
8.
Connect the Strata CIX system. Note the MAC address of the new processor.
9.
The path to the PROGDATA folders on your PC is:
C:\eManager\main\eManager\UserData\Administrator\<MAC address of the processor card>\SM.SD_CARD
10. Copy the DEFAULT.DAT file from the PC folder of the old processor to the PROGDATA folder on your
PC for the new processor. Note: Network eManager selects the folders to upload to, or download from by the processor MAC address.
11. Select the DEFAULT.DAT file on the right side of the screen. Highlight the PROGDATA folder on the left side of the screen. Click on the Upload button.
12. After the file has copied Initialize the processor.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
14-15
This page is intentionally left blank.
Applications Guide
A
This appendix contains guides to setup and program specific applications such as Voice Mail, IP
Telephony, StrataNet and others.
Voice Mail Set Up
The following steps/program sequences are provided as a guideline to programming system voice mail settings.
Analog Ports
1. Program 100 Card Slot Assignment. Assign the PCB for voice mail ports (RSTU).
2. Program 200 Station Data. Verify fields 01~04.
• field 03 Circuit Type – Assigns voice mail to be assigned to PDNs associated with voice mail RSTU circuits.
• field 15 Display DN – DN to be displayed and assigned to hunt group. Manually assign DNs and equipment.
3. Program 209 Station Hunting Group. Voice mail group is determined by the hunt group.
4. Program 218 Station Hunt Group Assignment.
5. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data. Complete, fields 01~17.
Notes
•
10 - Central VM Callback – Enter the node ID and hunt group for voice mail. Used for centralized voice mail SMDI only.
•
DTMF – Message Waiting Call Back DN across Strata Net TIE lines. DTMF integration uses the number that displays in Program 200, field 15.
6. Program 580 Voice Mail Port Data. This is the collection of all ports.
7. Program 803 IO Logical Device Assignment. You can add members to the hunt group. Assign RS-232 port for SMDI.
Note System only provides Code 300 for SMDI. Code 301 is not supported.
8. Program 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port setup.
9. Program 309 Direct Inward Dialing.
• field 11 - DID/DNIS No. Code
• field 15 - VM Application Digits
10.Program 318 DID Intercept Assignment.
• field - 11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
• field - 15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF VMID
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-1
Applications Guide
Voice Mail Set Up
Digital Ports
1. Program the following initial settings:
•
Program 100 – Set cabinet slot PCB type to “BDKU/BDKS or BWDKU 16 DKTs without Spkr OCA”.
•
Program 200 (Basic tab) – Assign stations to the slot and assign as voice mail. For example,
200~215 (for 16 ports). Set field 15 - Display DN as the pilot number of the voice mail hunt group.
This value should be the same as field 04 - Number to Display in Program 209.
•
Program 204 (DKT tab) – Change station’s field 05 to Tone First, 21- Adapter: BPCI, 19 -
Continuous DTMF: Not Continuous. Copy the changes to all voice mail stations.
2. Install and program serial card BSIS in the Strata CIX.
Note CIX Proprietary Integration is required for the iES16 or iES32. A BSIS card must be installed in the
Strata CIX.
3. Install a serial cable between the BSIS card and the Stratagy (see CIX wiring diagrams in the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and Maintenance Manual, Peripheral Installation chapter).
4. Program 803 - Specify CIX BSIS output port # and set the port type to be “300 SMDI #0” and “RS-232”.
5. Program 804 - Set the port attributes to:
•
field 01 - Baud rate: 9600
•
field 02 - Parity: none
•
field 03 - Data Bits: 8
•
field 04 - Flow control: 1
•
field 05 - Wait timer: 0
6. Program 579 - System Voice Mail Data. Complete fields 01~17.
7. Program 580 – Set all CIX voice mail ports as SMDI integration.
8. Program Station Hunting Programs 209 and 218
Telephone Station Ports
1. Program 200 Station Data.
• field 19 VMID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for forwarded and direct calls.
• field 22 VM MW Center Port – Message Waiting center DN.
2. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
•
Complete fields 11~15.
3. Program 204 DKT tab.
• field 23 Mailbox Selection – Used for the Voice Recording Feature. Uses the VMID from Program
200 if set to Auto or allows the user to enter any valid mailbox on Stratagy followed by #.
4. Program 206 Phantom DN.
• field 06 VM ID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for forwarded and direct calls.
• field 09 Message Center – Message Waiting center DN.
A-2
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
More than one voice mail system can be connected to one network node and one or more voice mail systems can be connected to multiple nodes. Access, integration and message waiting are controlled on a call-by-call basis according to parameters assigned to individual extensions. There is nothing to prevent a single DKT from having access to four voice mail systems, each connected to a remote node.
The Primary DN and three PhDNs are each programmed with independent voice mail destinations, voice mail IDs and record and playback codes. Figure A-1 is an example for networking multiple voice mail systems to enable Soft Keys. A similar set up can be used for enabling other voice mail features.
Figure A-1 Voice Mail Networking
Call Record and Soft Keys
A station can record conversations with another station or external line in a specific mailbox in voice mail
(VM) using the Record function button. You can replay the recorded conversation using the message waiting button or using the voice mail menu.
Networking for Call Record and Soft Keys is available only with Stratagy ES/IES R4 or higher.
Step 1:
Set up Station Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Local and Remote CIX
1. Select System > I/O Device, IO Logical Device tab.
2. Enter/Select the following:
• field 00 Logical Device No. = select 300 SMDI #0.
• field 01 Device Connection = LAN.
• Port Index No. = 1~9.
3. Click LAN Device tab -Program 801 - enter the LAN data:
• field 00 LAN Port Index No. = 1~9
• field 01 Protocol = TCP
• field 02 Application Type = Client
• field 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• field 04 Server Port No. = 0 (default)
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-3
Applications Guide
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems
• field 05 Client IP 1-4 No. = 192.168.254.250
• field 06 Client Port No. = 5000
• field 07 Read Retry No. = 1
• field 08 Write Retry No. = 1.
• field 09 CallerName Set To CSTA = No
4. Click Submit.
Step 2:
Set up Remote CIX
1. Select System > Voice Mail Port Data. Program 580 – VM Port Data displays.
2. Enter the appropriate fields.
3. Select Station > Station Assignments. Program 200 – Station Data screen displays.
4. Enter the Prime DN. For Call Record, enter the Node ID and Pilot number of the local CIX (where the voice mail is located).
5. In field 20 – VM MW Center Port. For Remote CIX systems, assign message center including Node IP for CIX Proprietary Integration integration. This parameter enables Call Record function too.
Note Refer to
“Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for regular voice mail set up.
Step 3:
Set up Strata Net Between All Nodes
Use the following programs to set up Strata Net:
1.
“304, 305 Incoming Line Group” on page 6-1
.
2.
“306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-5 .
3.
“302, 303 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG)” on page 6-30
4.
“102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3
5.
“651 Private Routing Plan Analysis” on page 9-34
6.
“653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment” on page 9-35
7.
“654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment” on page 9-35
8.
“655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment” on page 9-36
9.
“656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-33
For all other voice mail set up steps refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1
.
A-4
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
Strata CIX BRI Video Conferencing Programming
Strata CIX BRI Video Conferencing Programming
The table below shows the programs required to program a PRI line to ring to a RBSU interface to allow for
Video Conferencing capabilities.
The following may differ in your system: card slot assignments, trunk groups, channel groups and BRI station numbers.
The following program changes are required once the system has been installed and initialized.
Programs
Program 100
Program 105
Program 304
Program 306
Program 309
Program 302
Program 320
Program 202
Description
Card Assignment
RPTU and RBSU S/T Interface with each two TIE’s
System Data
Field 21=RPTU card slot
Incoming Line Groups
ILG=n, Field 01=ISDN, Field 02=CO, Field 03=DID, Field 04=Standard
Outgoing Line Groups
OLG=n, Field 01=ISDN, Field 02=CO/DID, Field 03=Standard
Direct Inward Dialing
ILG=n, Field 01=nxxx, Fields 05 through 10=Dialing Digits Type with Destination
Digits
PRI Trunks
Channel Group=n, Field 01=Equip Nos, Field 02=Nat’l ISDN, Field 03=n, Field
04=n, Field 07=n, Field 08=Check, Field 09=Check, Field11=Check,
Field12=Check, Field 19=Check
“B” Channels
Field 00=Equip Nos, Field 01 through 23=Check
ISDN BRI Station
Prime DN=nnnn, Field 01=Equip No., Field 02=n, Field 03=Nat’l ISDN, Field
04=Point to Multi-Point, Field 13=Check, Field 14=Check
Note
Field 02 must be a different channel group for each BRI station and cannot conflict with PRI channel group.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-5
Applications Guide
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
Deploying many IP telephones on a data LAN can have some unexpected pitfalls if the network does not have the bandwidth and speed required to handle VoIP traffic. To prevent delay, jitter, and data loss for
VoIP traffic and to retain the performance of your other business-critical network applications a network
Voice Readiness Assessment should completed before installing VoIP.
Important!
Voice Readiness Assessments are the responsibility of the installing TSD dealer. Toshiba is not responsible for supporting problems which occur because the network on which the IP telephones are installed does not meet VoIP packet requirements.
CIX IP provides a number of adjustable tuning parameters dealing with sharing of network resources, collectively referred to as Quality of Service (QoS). Some CIX IP voice quality and packet priority parameters that can be adjusted are described below:
General QoS Adjustments
The CIX provides parameters that can be adjusted to improve IP voice quality. These are normally kept at default but may be adjusted as necessary to modify IP voice quality. Set each item individually and then test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed.
1. In Network eManager, select IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250), Field 08 Audio Codec, and select the codec that should be enabled for individual IP telephones.
The G711 provides the best voice quality but requires the most network bandwidth. Usually G.729A is used when IP telephones are connected remotely.
2. In Network eManager, select IP-Telephony > System IP Data (Program 150), Field 11 Gain Control of
IPT and BIPU and select the desired setting.
3. You can assign a Voice Packet Table to individual IP telephones in IP Telephony > IPT Data (Program
250–Field 07) Voice Packet Table. In Network eManager, select IP Telephony > Voice Packet
Configuration (Program 152) and configure up to 256 different tables (see below).
Voice Packet Configuration Table (Program 152)
Normally the default table settings are used. If experiencing voice quality problems, set each item individually and then test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed. The default settings are shown below. The tables in this program must be assigned to individual IP telephones in
IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250) for them to be used by the CIX.
Important!
• When setting voice packet configuration tables on a Strata Net IP network the packet table settings for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever voice packet configuration table changes are made for IP telephones on Strata Net IP nodes Toshiba recommends pressing the RESET button on the BIPU to ensure the changes take effect.
Voice Packet Configuration Parameters defaults:
• field 01 - Voice Packet Transmission Interval – 20 msec
• field 02 - Jitter buffer type – adaptive
• field 03 - Jitter buffer length – 100 (smooth out packet playback)
• field 08 - Maximum acceptable delay – 20
• field 07 - Packet loss threshold – 5
• field 13 - Packet loss ratio – 5
• field 10 - Measurement period – 100
A-6
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming
Priority Control Adjustments
This VoIP feature provides a framework in which voice traffic flowing on the network is prioritized over other types of traffic. CIX supports two industry standard types of Priority Control: IEEE802.1p and Diffserv
(Differentiated Services). These options should be enabled simultaneously so the voice packets remain prioritized through the whole network path. IEEE802.1p prioritizes voice packets on the Ethernet (LAN) level and DiffServ prioritizes voice packets that pass through the internet, intranet, etc.
Important!
Priority Control processing has two requirements for it to work accurately. All network
Ethernet equipment connected to the BIPU LAN (routers, switches, etc.) must be in compliance with IEEE802.1p voice packet prioritization. When going through a network provider (ISP, etc.), the provider must support the DiffServ feature - contact your ISP for this service.
To setup priority control from Network eManager
1. Select IP-Telephony > System IP Data.
2. For Ethernet level (LAN) voice packet priority control:
• Enable field 07 IEEE802.1p
• Set field 08 IEEE802.1p. Configuration and set Voice or Best Effort - voice provides a higher level of priority.
3. For IP level (Internet) voice packet priority control enable field 03 DiffServ.
4. Set field 04 TOS Field Type (TOS -Type Of Service or DSCP - Differentiated Service code point)
Note The most common type used is TOS
• If set to “TOS”
Set field 05 “TOS Precedence type” (CRITIC/ESP ~ Routine) where CRITIC has the highest priority.
Set “TOS Delay type” (Normal or Low) – Low is the best service setting
Set “TOS Throughput” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
Set “TOS Reliability” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
• IF set to “DSCP”
Set field 06 DSCP from 1~64, Basic setting should be one of the following:
0 = Best effort, The default setting for most IP traffic.
24 = Assured flow (AF) or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40 = Expedited Flow (EF) or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic. Used by VoIP gateways to mark VoIP traffic.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-7
Applications Guide
Networking
Networking
Strata CIX enables networking of resources using Strata Net Private Networking. Read the following discussion through before programming Strata CIX networking features.
Strata Net Private Networking
The Strata CIX introduces robust private networking, Strata Net, to the Toshiba family of telecommunications products. Based on an international standard, QSIG, Strata Net will allow multiple
Strata CIX systems to share voice mail systems and attendants, share features and a coordinated numbering plan and route calls simply and easily throughout the enterprise. Strata Net is distinguished from CIX Basic Networking which provides interconnection of nodes through conventional, E&M Tie lines.
QSIG
Toshiba has adopted QSIG as the basis for Strata Net. QSIG is an open, international standard for networking PBXs. It was begun in 1994 with a memo of understanding between twelve leading PBX manufacturers. The QSIG Handbook can be found on the web at http://www.QSIG.ie/ . The standards were developed and are maintained by the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA), an international, Europe-based industry association founded in 1961 and dedicated to the standardization of information and communication systems. ECMA may be found on the web at http://www.ecma-international.org
.
QSIG is an intelligent and powerful signaling system, providing great flexibility in terms of network architecture. Any network node can establish routes to 128 other nodes and segmented networks can grow beyond that. New nodes can be added to the network as business needs dictate. The use of QSIG does not impose the use of a specific network topology and it can be used with any network configuration: meshed, star, main and satellite, etc.
Toshiba, like most of its competitors, has chosen to implement QSIG over Primary Rate Interface. Strata
Net supports QSIG Basic Call Control that allows it to interoperate with other PBXs that conform to the
QSIG standard.
Node ID
The basic logical element in Strata Net routing is the node ID. It functions similarly to the address in a packet data network. As a call is routed through the network, each node examines the leading received digits for a node ID defined in its flexible numbering plan. After first discerning a node ID, the Strata CIX then determines whether the node ID is for itself or for a remote node. If it is a remote node ID, the call goes through a routing process that selects an OLG, manipulates the digits and sends the call to the next node in the network. If the call contains the local node ID, the Strata CIX manipulates the number according to the overlap code and delivers the call to a local station, trunk or feature.
The node ID is one to six digits long. The Strata CIX knows that a node ID to which an overlap code has been assigned is for the local node and that all others are for the remote nodes.
Strata Net bases its routing decisions exclusively on the node ID and makes no attempt to analyze or restrict the remaining dialed digits. These remaining digits are not processed until delivered to the destination Strata Net node. This provides a simple, powerful tool because the programmer does not need to consider local conditions in transit nodes and does not need to fear interference with the call regardless of the path it takes through the network.
Network Directory Number
A Network Directory number consists of two elements: the node ID and the local directory number. A node
ID is a string of 1 to 6 digits that identifies one node on the network. A network DN may be a simple concatenation of the two elements in which the complete node ID precedes the complete extension or the
A-8
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
Networking
two elements may overlap. In the event of an overlap, an overlap code identifies the digits to be substituted for the received node ID.
The node ID allows a call to route through multiple Strata Net nodes until its destination node recognizes it as a local call. Local node IDs are programmed using Prog 656 Node ID. Remote node IDs are programmed in Prog 651 Network Routing Plan Analysis to define the appropriate outgoing route to the desired destination. Digits received after the node ID are passed on to the distant node without analysis.
One node may have up to four node IDs. A unique overlap code is programmed for each node ID. The overlap code allows the programmer to control the number of digits to be dialed for network calls and to create a coordinated dialing scheme across the network. If the network DN is to be a simple concatenation with no overlap, the overlap code field is left blank. All node IDs, local and remote, must be defined as such in the flexible numbering plan.
The following are examples of linked and overlapped node IDs.
Linked:
• Node ID = 789
• Extension = 2345
• Overlap Code = BLANK
• Network DN = 7892345
Overlapped:
• Node ID = 789
• Network DN = 789345
• Overlap Code = 2
• Local Extension = 2345
This simple, powerful, logical tool will support large, complex networks. It is the means by which a coordinated numbering plan can be established across all Strata Net nodes including existing systems with established numbering plans.
Network Feature Access Code
The Network Feature Access Code is similar to the network DN but is used to access features in a remote
Strata Net node. Features may include routing features, such as Trunk Group Access and Least Cost
Routing, or user features such as Message Waiting and Paging.
The Network FAC format is:
Node ID (1~6 digits) + Local FAC (1~5 digits) + Parameters (unlimited).
For example, 789 9 16175551212 access’ node ID 789 and uses that node’s LCR (9) to dial directory assistance in Boston.
Given their variability, Network FACs are usually processed without overlap codes. If a node ID with an overlap code has been established for local extensions, it cannot be used for feature access; a separate node ID must be established. If no overlap codes are used, one node ID will serve for all purposes.
Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation is the term for the altering of an original string of dialed digits in order to re-route a call or connect it to a specific service. Digit Manipulation is usually applied to the leading digits in the string which appear left-most in written form. Strata Net uses two forms of manipulation: overlap codes, described above for inbound calls, and network digit modification tables for outbound calls. The network digit modification tables contain up to 64 treatments in each of which as many as 10 leading digits may be deleted and as many as 23 leading digits substituted. These 64 treatments may be applied to any of 64 route definitions.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-9
Applications Guide
Networking
Traveling Class Mark
Calling privileges, restrictions and priorities may be imposed across Strata Net using the Traveling Class
Mark. The Traveling Class Mark accompanies all calls across the network. When the call reaches its terminating node, that node uses the Traveling Class Mark to determine whether the originator of the call is entitled to the dialed facility. The mark is a single information element linked from the following:
• Network Class of Service
• Network DR Level
• Network Facility Restriction Level
• Network Queuing Priority Level
All nodes contain tables to translate between local and network DR Levels, Facility Restriction Levels and
Queuing Priority Levels. DRL, FRL and QPL each require two tables: one to translate from the local level to the network level for outgoing calls and one to translate from network to local level for incoming calls.
Network Class of Service is an exception for two reasons. First, at the originating node, each station is assigned a Network Class of Service; there is no translation. The terminating node does contain a table to translate the received Network Class of Service to a local Class of Service but it adds parameters to the local Class of Service before determining how to process the call. Those parameters are:
• Permission for Off-Hook Call Announce
• Ability to register System Speed Dial numbers in the terminating node
• Ability to register Class of Service Override in the terminating node and
• Trunk Group Override Access
Time of day considerations are handled at the originating node. If a call originates in a node that is in night mode and terminates in another node, it will deliver the night mode values regardless of the condition of the terminating node.
Path Replacement
Known also as Route Optimization and Release Link, Path Replacement makes the most efficient use of talk paths between network nodes. For example, if a series of transfers around the network results in a conversation between two stations in the same node, all of the tie line circuits are released and a simple station-to-station call is established in the one node. This efficiency reduces the number of facilities to be provided and improves transmission quality by minimizing the number of links over which loss could occur.
Path Replacement applies to:
• Call Transfer
• Ring Transfer
• Station Call Forward
• System Call Forward
Coordinated Numbering Plan
A Coordinated Numbering Plan rationalizes the dialing patterns required of network users and relieves them of the need to know complicated access codes to navigate the network. The basic mechanism is the
Network Directory Number described above. The combination of node ID and Directory Number appear to the user as simple extension dialing. The ability to overlap the two components reduces the number of dialed digits. If it is necessary to preserve legacy extension ranges at individual nodes, a Network Access
Code can be used to resolve numbering conflicts with other nodes.
A-10
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
Networking
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Strata Net generates call records for incoming or outgoing calls from the nodes in which they originated or terminated. For example, if a station user in node 3 makes an outside call that is routed through transit node 2 to gateway node 1 for connection to the public network, nodes 1 and 3 generate SMDR records; node 2 does not.
Node #1 Node #2 Node #3
Private Line Private Line
DN3000
Gateway Node Transit Node Extension Node
The record in node #3 will include the Network DN of the calling station, the dialed digits and the OLG number and Channel Group number used to access node #2. The record in node #1 will include the ILG number and Channel Group number of the Strata Net trunk on which the call was received and the PSTN trunk to which it was connected. The record format and conditions are the same as for a single node system using the new format adopted for Strata CIX.
Station-to-station calls across Strata Net are considered internal calls and do not generate SMDR records in any nodes. Abandoned Call SMDR records are only generated for incoming calls over local trunks.
Unforced account codes are generated from the node in which they originated. Forced account codes are included in the records of the node that required them. Similarly, the node which provides DISA services is responsible for checking the DISA Security code and for generating the SMDR record. The remote node and the transit node will not generate the SMDR record.
Plowable buffers are usually attached to each network node and polled by a central call accounting system. If the buffer is not available, the Strata CIX will buffer records as shown in the table below.
Equipment numbers, time stamps and call type designations assist the call accounting system in associating records for the same call from different nodes.
Table A-1 SMDR Record Buffer Capacity
System Type
CIX1200 (HCTU)
CIX1200 (HEXAU)
CIX1200 (HEXBU)
CIX670 (BCTU/BEXU)
CIX670 (BCTU)
CIX200
CIX100
CIX40
CIX28
Buffer Capacity
Up to 600 records
Up to 2000 records
Up to 3000 records
Up to 1000 records
Up to 300 records
Up to 300 records
Up to 100 records
Up to 200 records
Up to 200 records
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A-11
Applications Guide
Networking
Centralized Voice Mail
Users in multiple network nodes may use the services of a single voice mail system attached to one node.
The network transmits the voice mail ID (VMID) for remote stations and the calling conditions under which the call is being directed to voice mail (Call Forward All Calls, Busy, etc.). The centralized voice mail system can control message waiting indications and provide automated attendant services throughout the network through its integration with a single node.
Centralized voice mail requires a Coordinated Numbering Plan throughout the network for proper operation. The Coordinated Numbering Plan allows the voice mail to interact with the entire network as if it were on a large PBX. Basic operations include:
• Forward to Voice Mail – A forwarded, busy or unanswered extension may forward across the network to the voice mail unit. Centralized voice mail notifies the voice mail of the source and calling conditions and the voice mail returns the greeting of the original target extension. Notification of calling conditions requires SMDI integration.
• Message Retrieval – A user can press the message button on his phone and be directed to a voice mail system connected to his own or a remote node. The call will be correctly identified as a retrieval for the correct VMID and the user will be prompted for his security code. The same operation may be programmed for PhDNs in Station Programming.
• Message Waiting – The voice mail system can control message waiting indications in distant switches by accessing the remote node via node ID, registering the Message Waiting Feature Access Code and specifying the desired station.
• Automated Attendant – Automated attendant calls to voice mail may be transferred to stations or services in distant nodes using the Network Directory Number. If the automated attendant transfers the call to a busy destination, it can activate Call Transfer with camp-on across the network simply by hanging up.
Not all Stratagy features available to a single switch are available to remote Strata Net nodes. This is a result of the local node being directly integrated to the voice mail system. The following table shows the availability of voice mail features across the Strata Net.
Stratagy Feature
Message Lamp Control
Forward to Voice Mail
Message Retrieval
Automated Attendant
Call Record
Soft Keys
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail
Attached Node
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Remote Node
X
X
X
X
X
X (R1.3 and higher)
X (R1.3 and higher)
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems – Refer to
“Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems” on page A-3 .
Centralized Attendant
It is possible for one attendant to serve an entire Strata Net. Station users anywhere in the network can simply dial 0 to reach the centralized attendant. Calls to the attendant are identified with calling number and name. Incoming trunk calls to any node in the network can be routed to one attendant and then extended anywhere in the network.
A-12
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
Applications Guide
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
Network BLF is an indication on the CIX attendant console and digital telephones that an extension is
Busy, Idle or in DND over different nodes. The Primary CIX can read the BLF information from the remote
CIXs.
In order to use Network BLF, the CIX attendant console and digital telephones must have access to each
CIX by LAN/WAN and requires the IP addresses of each node or CIX. The figure below is a BLF/DSS networking flow diagram. It shows you the types of connections required between the BLF servers, the
Strata CIXs and the CIX attendant console.
Figure A-2 BLF/DSS Networking
Note The Node ID must be independent of the Station DNs for Network BLF to work.
Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 12/09
A